JP2019170904A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably increasing a degree of attention to a game.SOLUTION: Hold information is acquired based on entry of game balls into an operation ball entry part provided in a game area, and a winning/losing lottery regarding a shift to an opening/closing execution mode or not is executed successively based on the hold information. In a shift to a second normal game state in which a support mode by an electric accessory attached to a right operation ball entry part becomes a high-frequency support mode and a lottery mode for performing winning/losing determination becomes a high-probability mode through the opening/closing execution mode, the number of time-shortening times functioning as a shift condition to a third normal game state more advantageous to a player than the second normal game state is set. In the second normal game state, a counter image CF for indicating the number of remaining time-shortening times and a target image TF for indicating the third normal game state to be shifted to when all of the number of remaining time-shortening times is consumed are displayed on a display screen 75a of a pattern display device.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 47

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When the game ball launched from the game ball launching unit enters the entrance part provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1). ).

JP 2002-78904 A

  In the type of gaming machine described above, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to gaming.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the degree of attention to a game.

The present invention
A game board in which a game area is formed;
Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball enters the start ball portion provided in the game area;
Acquisition information storage means capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information;
Prior to the determination being made by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, a game turning operation is started, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination is used. A game for controlling the result notifying means so that the operation for the game times of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the operation being ended as one game time. A time control means;
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the completion of the game turning operation by the gaming time control means. Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state,
The normal game state includes a first normal game state, a second normal game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state, and a third normal that is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. A gaming state is provided,
Second normal gaming state transition means for transitioning the gaming state to the second normal gaming state with the end of the special gaming state;
Upper limit setting means for setting an upper limit of the number of games in the second normal gaming state when the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state;
Third normal gaming state transition means for transitioning the gaming state from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state based on the fact that the number of games in the second normal gaming state has reached the upper limit;
In the second normal gaming state, from the second normal gaming state, the first information indicating the third normal gaming state as a transition destination when the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit Informing means for informing the second information indicating the number of remaining games until the transition to the three normal gaming state is provided.

  According to the present invention, the degree of attention to a game can be preferably improved.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. (A) The front view which shows the structure of a game board, (b) It is a front view of a main display unit. It is a front view of an upper side variable prize apparatus. It is a front view of a ball entry unit. (A) It is a front perspective view of a right operation entrance part, (b) It is the schematic which shows the channel structure concerning a right operation entrance part. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between passage length and passage required time. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the schematic for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. It is the schematic which shows the acceptance table for lower operation openings. It is the schematic which shows the success / failure table for right operation ports. (A) Schematic which shows the distribution table for lower operation ports, (b) It is the schematic which shows the distribution table for right operation ports. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the control process for lower working ports. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process for lower operation openings. It is a flowchart which shows the control process for right operation ports. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process for right operation ports. It is a flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. It is a flowchart which shows a big prize opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of opening-and-closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electronic combination support. It is the schematic which compared the change display time and fixed display time for every support mode. It is a flowchart which shows a power combination opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display time setting process for a lower working port. It is a flowchart which shows the change display time setting process for right operation ports. It is the schematic which shows the difference of the variable display time for every gaming state, and a fixed display time. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between the kind of jackpot result, and the frequency | count of continuation of high frequency support mode. It is a block diagram which shows the relationship of each game state. It is the schematic which illustrated the motion of the game ball in the 2nd normal game state and the 4th normal game state. It is the schematic which illustrated the motion of the game ball in the 3rd normal game state. It is the schematic which illustrated the motion of the game ball in the 3rd normal game state. It is a timing chart which shows increase / decrease in the ball with progress of a game. (A) The timing chart which shows the flow of the game in the 2nd normal game state, (b) The timing chart which shows the flow of the game in the 3rd normal game state. It is a timing chart which shows change of the number of reservation information accompanying game progress. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the game at the time of transfer to the 2nd normal game state. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the game at the time of transfer to the 2nd normal game state. It is a schematic diagram showing a right operation entrance part. (A) It is a timing chart which shows the display mode of the display part for through gates in low frequency support mode, (b) It is a timing chart which shows the display mode of the display part for through gates in high frequency support mode. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure which concerns on an alerting | reporting / production control apparatus and a display control apparatus. It is the schematic for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is the schematic for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is the schematic for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between a game state and the change display area | region of a pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the information display control process performed in MPU of a alerting | reporting / production control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the display control process for special game states. It is the schematic which shows the flow of a display when transfering from a 1st special game state to a 2nd normal game state. It is a flowchart which shows the display control process for normal game states. It is a flowchart which shows a target display control process. (A) Schematic illustrating the relationship between the number of games in the second normal gaming state and the size of the target display area, (b) Schematic illustrating the relationship between the target display area and the symbol variable display area. It is a flowchart which shows the counter display control process corresponding to a right working port. It is a flowchart which shows the counter display control process corresponding to a lower working port. It is the schematic which shows the mode of the update of a counter display. (A) Schematic showing the flow when shifting to the third normal gaming state, (b) Schematic showing the flow when shifting to the first special gaming state. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the game at the time of shifting to the 3rd normal game state in a 3rd embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the subtraction pattern of the counter display in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the subtraction pattern of a counter display. It is the schematic which shows the flow of the update of the counter display in 5th Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the flow of a counter display update.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 viewed from the front side, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded manner. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main part 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

  The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting plate members to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. By attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and the outer frame 11 may be provided on the island facility of the game arcade.

  The gaming machine main part 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be opened and closed. Specifically, the upper support bracket 17 is fixed to a connection portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11, and further, a lower portion is connected to the connection portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11. Side support fittings 18 are provided. The upper support bracket 17 and the lower support bracket 18 form a support mechanism. The support mechanism causes the gaming machine main unit 12 to turn the left side of the pachinko machine 10 in the front view with respect to the outer frame 11. The right side can be turned to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with the turning tip side (see FIGS. 2 and 3).

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main part 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack arranged behind the inner frame 13. Unit 15. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main part 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view ( (See FIG. 3).

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. Yes. A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the central portion of the frame body 20 so that a substantially entire game area PE described later can be viewed from the front. The window portion 21 is formed by the glass unit 22. The front door frame 14 is closed from the back side.

  The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of glass panels 23 having transparency and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition portion for partitioning the holding region of the glass panel 23 in the front-rear direction, and the two glass panels 23 face each other in the front-rear direction with the partition portion interposed therebetween. That is, by securing a predetermined gap between the glass panels 23, the gaming area PE is covered by the glass panels 23 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 while avoiding interference between the glass panels 23. It is in a state.

  Note that it is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame 20. Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and security, it is preferable to employ a plurality of glass panels and to make the glass panels face each other across a predetermined gap. Incidentally, it is also possible to employ a synthetic resin panel member having transparency instead of the glass panel.

  As shown in FIG. 1, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21). For example, an annular illumination part 26 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window part 21. In the annular illumination part 26, lighting or blinking is performed according to a change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or at a predetermined reach. In addition, an error display lamp unit 27 that is turned on at the time of a predetermined error is provided in the center of the annular illumination unit 26 and at the uppermost part of the pachinko machine 10, and a prize that is turned on while the prize ball is being paid out on the left and right sides. A sphere lamp portion 28 is provided. Further, a speaker unit 29 is provided at a position close to the left and right prize ball lamp units 28 to output sound effects corresponding to the gaming state.

  Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32 that bulge toward the front side are arranged side by side. An upper pan 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower pan 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32. The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism described later while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 34 has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 33.

  A game ball launching handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to protrude toward the front side. By operating the game ball launch handle 41, a game ball is launched from a game ball launch mechanism described later.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back surface of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is formed of a synthetic resin, and has a front door side upper dish passage that leads to the upper dish 33 and a front door side lower dish path that leads to the lower dish 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving portion that protrudes rearward and opens upward is formed at the upper corner portion thereof, and the entrance portion of the front door side upper plate passage is formed by partitioning the receiving portion left and right by a partition wall. The portion and the entrance portion of the front door side lower dish passage are partitioned. The game balls that have entered the front door side upper dish passage are guided to the upper dish 33, and the game balls that have entered the front door side lower dish path are guided to the lower dish 34.

  Projecting shafts are provided at the upper end and the lower end of the rotation base end side of the back surface of the front door frame 14. These projecting shafts constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of bar brackets 49 extending rearward are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction on the rotating front end side of the back surface of the front door frame 14. These hooks 49 constitute a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13.

(Inner frame 13)
Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The inner frame 13 is mainly configured by a resin base 50 whose outer shape is substantially rectangular like the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the resin base 50 is set slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. The resin base 50 is disposed close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the resin base 50. A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close the gap. The curtain plate is disposed below the resin base 50 (specifically, the lower end portion thereof). When the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the resin base 50 is placed on the curtain plate. .

  Support metal fittings 51 and 52 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the rotation base end side of the front surface of the resin base 50. Shaft holes are formed in the support fittings 51 and 52, and the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by inserting the projection shaft of the front door frame 14 into the shaft holes. ing.

  Insertion holes for inserting the metal fittings 49 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 are provided on the rotation front end side of the front surface of the resin base 50. As shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which a locking device 55 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is hidden behind the inner frame 13. Therefore, the front door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened by the hook metal 49 being locked to the locking device 55 (specifically, the front door hook receiving member) through the insertion hole. The locking device 55 has an inner frame collar member 57 extending rearward of the inner frame 13. When these inner frame hook members 57 are hooked on the hook receiving member 19 of the outer frame 11, the gaming machine main part 12 is locked in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 11.

  A cylinder lock 58 for performing an unlocking operation of the locking device 55 is installed at the lower right corner of the resin base 50. The cylinder lock 58 is integrated with the locking device 55. When the key inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned to the right, the locking of the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 is released, and the cylinder lock 58 is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 58. The locking device 55 is configured so that the locking of the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 is released when the key is turned counterclockwise.

  A substantially elliptical window hole 54 is formed at the center of the resin base 50, and the window hole 54 is closed from behind by a game board 60 attached to the resin base 50. The game board 60 includes a wooden plywood and a sheet material that covers a front plate surface of the plywood, and the front surface of the game board 60 is exposed to the front side of the resin base 50 through the window hole 54. In the exposed portion, that is, the front surface of the game board 60, a game area PE in which game balls flow down is formed. Note that the game board 60 is not limited to wooden, and may be made of synthetic resin.

  Hereinafter, the game board 60 (in particular, various configurations arranged in the game area PE) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 60.

(Game board 60)
The game board 60 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in its own thickness direction (front-rear direction). In each of the openings, a general winning opening 61, operating ball entering portions 62 and 63, variable winning devices 64 and 65, a through gate 66, a variable display unit 67, and the like are arranged. When a ball is entered into a ball winning portion such as the general winning opening 61, the operation ball receiving portions 62 and 63, and the variable winning devices 64 and 65, it is detected by a detection sensor, and a predetermined number of awards are obtained based on the detection result. Benefits such as ball payout are given to the player.

  Specifically, 10 game balls are paid out when the entry to the general winning opening 61 occurs, and 4 pieces are entered when the entry into the lower operation entry portion 62 occurs. When a game ball is paid out and a ball enters the right-hand actuated ball entering portion 63, one game ball is paid out, and when a ball enters the upper variable winning device 64. The payout of 14 game balls is executed, and when the pay to the lower variable winning device 65 occurs, the payout of 10 game balls is executed.

  An out port 68 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 60, and game balls that have not entered the various entrances are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 68. Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening part, and after passing through the opening part, the game ball passes through the opening part as well as being discharged from the game area PE. A mode in which the game area PE is not discharged later is also included. In the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 68, the general game port 61, the actuated ball units 62 and 63, the variable game devices 64 and 65 and the through gate 66 are entered. Is also expressed as a prize.

  Further, the game board 60 is provided with a large number of nails 69 in order to disperse and adjust the flow path of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill are provided. By various configurations such as the nail 69 and the windmill, the flow path of the game ball is differentiated and adjusted so that a winning to the above-described general winning opening 61 or the like occurs with an appropriate probability.

  The variable display unit 67 is arranged in the center of the game board 60, and the operation entrance parts 62, 63 and the like are arranged around the variable display unit 67. The operation entrance parts 62 and 63 are largely divided into a lower operation entry part 62 disposed below the variable display unit 67 and a right operation entry part 63 disposed on the right side of the variable display unit 67. In particular, the right-hand actuated entrance portion 63 is provided with an openable entrance assist device (entrance assist means) or an electric accessory 71 as an open / close member (open / close means). The electric accessory 71 includes a shutter and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the shutter, and the right operation entrance portion 63 (the right operation port 63a) is changed by changing the position of the shutter by the drive unit. It is possible to switch between an open state (acceptance state) in which the ball can be entered and a closed state (non-acceptance state) in which the ball cannot be entered. The electric accessory 71 attached to the right operation entrance portion 63 may be switchable between a state in which entry into the right operation port 63a is easier and a state in which entry is more difficult.

  The through gate 66 is disposed at a position upstream of the right-hand actuated ball entering portion 63, specifically, at the side (right side) of the variable display unit 67 in the game area PE (details will be described later on the right route). Yes. The through gate 66 allows a game ball to pass in the vertical direction, and the game ball won in the through gate 66 flows down to the downstream side in the game area PE without being discharged from the game area PE. Yes. When the winning combination is a lottery triggered by the passing of the game ball through the through gate 66, the electric accessory 71 is switched from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time.

  The upper variable prize winning device 64 is disposed at a position between the through gate 66 and the right operation ball entering portion 63 on the right route. The upper variable winning device 64 is formed with an upper prize winning opening through which a plurality of game balls can enter simultaneously, and an opening / closing mechanism is provided as an opening / closing means for opening and closing the upper prize winning opening. The opening / closing mechanism includes a shutter as an opening / closing member for a special prize opening. The shutter can be switched between an open state (assisting state or receiving state) where a game ball can be entered or facilitated and a closed state (non-assist state or non-accepting state) where the entering ball is impossible or difficult. It has become. In addition, the shutter is connected to a variable prize driving unit (specifically, a solenoid), and the shutter is kept closed in a normal state, and the opening / closing execution mode (special game state or opening / closing execution state) is performed in the internal lottery. When it becomes the transition result, it can be switched to the open state.

  The lower variable prize-winning device 65 is disposed at a position downstream of the right-hand operation ball entry portion 63 on the right route. The lower variable prize winning device 65 is formed with a lower major prize opening through which a plurality of game balls can be entered simultaneously, and is provided with an opening / closing mechanism as an opening / closing means for opening and closing the lower major prize prize opening. The opening / closing mechanism includes a shutter as an opening / closing member for a special prize opening. The shutter can be switched between an open state (acceptance state) in which a game ball can enter and a closed state (non-acceptance state) in which the game ball cannot enter. In addition, the shutter is connected to a variable prize driving unit (specifically, a solenoid), and the shutter is kept closed in a normal state, and the opening / closing execution mode (special game state or opening / closing execution state) is performed in the internal lottery. When it becomes the transition result, it can be switched to the open state.

  Here, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode that shifts when a big win or a special win is reached. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 65 in the opening / closing execution mode, for example, a predetermined period (30 sec or 0.8 sec in the present embodiment) or a predetermined number (9 in the present embodiment) of winning is 1 The number of rounds is set so that the shutter is opened with a predetermined number of rounds (1, 2, 6, 8, 16 rounds in this embodiment) as the upper limit.

  Next, the variable display unit 67 will be described. The variable display unit 67 has a symbol display device 75 that variably displays symbols (variation display) with a winning in the activated ball entering sections 62 and 63 as a trigger.

  The symbol display device 75 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content on the display screen 75a is controlled by a display control device described later. On the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, for example, symbols are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled in the vertical direction. When a big win or a special win comes, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset active line, and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode. The symbol display device 75 is not necessarily a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix or a 7-segment type display device.

  The variable display unit 67 is provided with a center frame 76 so as to surround the symbol display device 75. The center frame 76 is fixed to the game board 60 from the front side thereof, and in this fixed state, the center frame 76 and the glass unit 22 are raised from the front surface of the game board 60. The gap dimension between the two is smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball. This prevents the game ball flowing down the game area PE from colliding with the symbol display device 75, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is on the right side of the variable display unit 67 (specifically, the center frame 76). The route is roughly divided into the right route that detours from the left and the left route that detours from the left.

  Note that the above-described right-hand acted ball entering portion 63, variable prize-winning devices 64, 65, and through gate 66 are arranged on the right route, and for the game balls flowing down the left route, the right-hand acted ball entering portion 63, variable prize-winning. Winning to the devices 64 and 65 and the through gate 66 is avoided. On the other hand, the lower operating ball entering portion 62 is arranged on the left route, and the game balls flowing down the right route are prevented from winning the lower operating ball entering portion 62. The player can advantageously advance the game by selecting the launch destination of the game ball (the flow path of the game ball) from the right route / left route according to the game situation.

  A main display unit 81 is disposed on the protective member for the guide rail 100 disposed outside the game area PE. The front surface of the main display unit 81 is opposed to the glass unit 22 (specifically, the rear glass panel 23) that allows the game area PE to be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the opposed portion includes A main display portion D is provided on which a predetermined pattern or the like is displayed. The main display unit 81 is electrically connected to a main controller described later, and the display content of the main display unit D is controlled by the main controller.

  The main display section D includes a lower operation opening display section DL for displaying a lottery result based on winning in the lower operation entry section 62 (lower operation opening 62a), and a right operation entry section 63 (right operation opening 63a). ) And the right working port display section DR for displaying the result of the lottery performed based on the winning.

  In the lower working port display unit DL, the variation display of the picture is performed with the winning of the lower operation ball entering unit 62 (lower operation port 62a) as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the lower operation ball entering unit The result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to 62 is clearly shown. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the lower operating ball entering portion 62 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the change display is stopped in the lower working port display portion DL, After a predetermined pattern is displayed as a stop result, the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the right working port display section DR, the variation display of the picture is performed with the winning of the right operation ball entering section 63 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the fluctuation display, the right operation ball entering section 63 (the right operation port 63a) is displayed. The result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of is clearly indicated. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the right-hand actuated entry part 63 is a winning result corresponding to the big hit or special win, the change display is stopped in the right actuating port display part DR, After a predetermined pattern is displayed, the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode according to the result.

  Here, on the basis of winning in one of the operating ball entering parts 62, 63, the variable display is started in the corresponding operating port display units DL, DR, a predetermined stop result is displayed, and the above variable display is stopped. This is equivalent to one game time. However, the number of game times is not limited to the above-mentioned content. For example, a single display area is provided, and even if a winning is made to any of the operating ball entering parts 62 and 63, the single game area is only given. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in one display area, the variable display is started in the single display area, and the above-mentioned variable display is stopped in a state where the predetermined stop result is displayed. Once.

  The main display unit D of the main display unit 81 is provided with a lower operation port reservation number display portion SL and a right operation port reservation number display portion SR. The lower operation port hold number display portion SL corresponds to the lower operation port 62a, and the number of times the game ball has won the lower operation port 62a is held up to four times, and the lower operation port hold number display portion SL is turned on. The number of holds is displayed. The right operation port hold number display portion SR corresponds to the right operation port 63a, and the number of times that the game ball has won the right operation port 63a is held up to four times, and the right operation port hold number display portion SR is turned on. The number of holds is displayed.

  In addition to the various display units described above, the main display unit 81 has a through gate display unit DS for displaying a lottery result based on winning in the through gate 66. In the through gate display unit DS, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning of the through gate 66 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 66 is displayed as a result of stopping the variation display. It is clearly shown. If the result of the internal lottery based on winning through the through gate 66 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display section DS, and the display is changed. After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the state where the electric combination is released, the electric combination 71 attached to the right operation ball entering portion 63 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 66 is retained up to 4 times, but the number of suspension is displayed on the main display portion D of the main display unit 81. A through gate hold number display section SS is provided.

  The configuration of the inner frame 13 will be described again with reference to FIG. 2. A game ball is directed toward the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launch handle 41 below the mounting area of the game board 60 in the resin base 50. A game ball launching mechanism 110 is provided. The game ball launching mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball placed at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines the launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and a game at the launch standby position. A ball feeding device 113 for supplying a ball and a base plate 114 on which the various configurations 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as main components, and the base plate 114 is fixed to the resin base 50 so that the resin base 50 is fixed. On the other hand, it is integrated.

  The firing rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an inclined state so as to be inclined upward toward the game board 60 side. A ball stopper that holds the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 at the above-described firing standby position is disposed at a position closer to the downstream end portion (that is, the lower end portion) of the firing rail 112. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream than the ball stopper.

  The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power source / launch control device described later. Based on the output of the electrical signal from the power supply / launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion / contraction direction, so that the game ball placed at the launch standby position is on the game board 60 side, more specifically, the game. It is launched toward the guide rail 100 mounted on the board 60.

  In the guide rail 100, the game area PE is partitioned so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. In addition, the guide rail 100 includes an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 arranged so as to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a single guide passage 103 is defined by both the rails 101 and 102. Is formed. The guide passage 103 has an inlet portion that is open to the tip end side (obliquely downward) of the firing rail 112 and an outlet portion that is located above the game area PE. The game ball fired based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the firing rail 112 → guide rail 100 (entrance portion → exit portion). By adjusting the amount of operation of the game ball launch handle 41, the game ball can be divided into an area on the left side of the variable display unit 67 in the game area PE and an area on the right side of the variable display unit 67 in the game area PE. It is possible.

  In the game board 60, a reverse prevention member 106 for preventing the game ball reaching the game area PE from returning back into the guide passage 103 is attached to the front side of the exit portion, specifically near the tip of the inner rail 101. Thus, it is possible to prevent the subsequent launch of the game ball from being hindered by the game ball that has reached the game area PE first.

  The guide rail 100 (see FIG. 4) and the firing rail 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the firing rail 112 face each other with the lower end edge of the game board 60 interposed therebetween. That is, both the rails 100 and 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the firing rail 112 are shifted left and right in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the game board 60. Thus, a gap of a predetermined interval is formed between the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the firing rail 112 while bringing both rails 100 and 112 close to the lower end edge of the game board 60.

  A foul ball passage 46 is disposed below the gap formed in this way. The foul ball passage 46 is formed integrally with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 do not reach the game area PE and return to the inside of the guide passage 103 as foul balls, the foul balls enter the foul ball passage 46 through the gap. It becomes. The foul ball passage 46 communicates with the lower door passage on the front door side, and the game balls that have entered the foul ball passage 46 are discharged to the lower plate 34 shown in FIG. This suppresses interference between the foul ball and the next game ball to be launched.

  A through hole that penetrates the resin base 50 in the front-rear direction is formed on the left side of the firing base 112 in the resin base 50 (specifically, the side that supports the front door frame 14). A passage forming member is formed in the through hole. 121 is disposed. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the resin base 50 and has a main body side upper dish path and a main body side lower dish path. The upstream side of the main body side upper dish passage and the main body side lower dish passage communicates with a game ball distributing section described later. In addition, the receiving portion of the passage forming unit 45 attached to the front door frame 14 enters below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side upper plate passage is disposed below the main body side upper plate passage, A front door side upper dish passage is disposed below the main body side lower dish passage.

  An opening / closing member 124 that opens and closes the main body side upper dish path and the main body side lower dish path is attached to the resin base 50 below the passage forming member 121. The opening / closing member 124 is supported by a support shaft provided at the lower end thereof so as to be pivotable in the front-rear direction, and further includes an urging member that urges the main body side upper dish passage and the main body side lower dish path to a front position. Is provided. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13, the opening / closing member 124 rises as shown in the figure, and closes the main body side upper dish passage and the main body side lower dish path. Thereby, when the front door frame 14 is opened in a state where game balls are stored in the main body side upper dish passage or the main body side lower dish passage, it is possible to prevent such a problem that the stored balls spill out. On the other hand, in a state where the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening / closing member 124 is pushed open against the biasing force by the receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper dish path and the front door side upper dish path communicate with each other, and the main body side lower dish path and the front door side lower dish path communicate with each other.

  Next, the back configuration of the inner frame 13 (the resin base 50 and the game board 60) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Bearing fittings 132 are arranged vertically on the rotation base end side of the back surface of the resin base 50. The bearing bracket 132 is formed with bearing portions spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions.

  A plurality of locking fittings 135 are provided on the back surface of the resin base 50, and the game board 60 is attached to the resin base 50 by the locking fittings 135 as described above. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board 60 will be described.

  A display control device is attached to the variable display unit 67 disposed in the center of the game board 60 so as to cover the variable display unit 67 from behind (not shown). A notification / production control device unit 142 is mounted behind the display control device so as to overlap the display control device. The notification / production control device unit 142 includes a notification / production control device 143 and a mounting table 144, and the notification / production control device 143 is mounted on the mounting table 144.

  The notification / production control device 143 includes a notification / production control board that controls voice, lamp display, and control of the display control device in accordance with instructions from a main control device, which will be described later. It is accommodated in a substrate box 145 made of, for example.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a collective plate 150 is provided below the variable display unit 67 on the back surface of the game board 60. The collective board 150 is provided with a game ball collecting mechanism for collecting game balls won in various winning ports, a detection mechanism for detecting the entering of game balls into various winning ports, and the like.

  The game ball collecting mechanism will be described. The collective plate 150 is provided with a collecting passage corresponding to each of the various ball entering portions such as the general winning opening 61. These collection passages go down along the back surface of the game board 60 from these entrances, and define the fall path of the game balls. The collection paths meet near the lower end of the game board 60, and any game balls that have passed through the ball-entry portion such as the general winning opening 61 gather at the lower part of the game board 60 through the collection path. It becomes. The exit portion of each recovery passage is opened downward, and a discharge passage described later is provided on the front side (specifically, below the game board 60). The game balls gathered below the game board 60 by the collection passage are led out to the discharge passage. Similarly, the out port 68 leads to the discharge passage, and a game ball that has not won any prize opening is led out to the discharge passage through the out port 68.

  The detection mechanism will be described. The collective plate 150 is provided with detection sensors that individually correspond to various ball entering portions such as the general winning a prize opening 61. These various detection sensors are arranged in the middle of each collection passage that is connected to the ball entry portion such as the general winning opening 61, and the game ball falls in a state where the collection path of the game ball is defined in the collection passage. Detect passage. More specifically, each detection sensor detects a ball entering a ball entrance such as the general winning award 61 by passing a game ball through a detection area provided in the middle of each collection passage, Specifically, a magnetic sensor that grasps a change in a magnetic field that occurs when a game ball passes through the detection area is employed.

  These various detection sensors are electrically connected to a main control device unit 160 (specifically, a main control device) provided on the back side of the game board 60, and detection signals from these detection sensors are transmitted to the main control device. Output. Hereinafter, the main controller unit 160 and the configuration associated therewith will be described.

  The main controller unit 160 is mounted on the game board 60 so as to cover the collective plate 150 from the rear side, and includes a synthetic resin mounting base 161 and a main controller 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. It is configured. The main controller 162 includes a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that controls the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power source, and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be accommodated in a substrate box 163 made of, for example.

  The board box 163 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected so as not to be unsealed by a sealing portion as sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of sealing portions are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used for sealing processing.

  Any structure can be applied to the sealing part as long as the box base and the box cover are connected to each other so that they cannot be opened.However, the box base and the box cover can be connected by inserting a locking claw into the long hole constituting the sealing part. It is designed to be combined so that it cannot be opened. The sealing process by the sealing part prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation quickly and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. It is possible to perform the sealing process again later. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one of the plurality of sealing portions. When opening the board box 163 such as when a failure occurs in the housed main control board or when inspecting the main control board, the connecting part between the sealing part into which the locking claw is inserted and another sealing part is provided. Disconnect. As a result, the box base and the box cover of the substrate box 163 are separated, and the internal main control substrate can be taken out. Thereafter, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking claws are inserted into the long holes of the other sealing portions. If the history of opening the substrate box 163 is left in the substrate box 163, it can be easily found that the unauthorized opening has been performed by looking at the substrate box 163.

  A plurality of coupling pieces are provided on one short side portion of the substrate box 163 so as to protrude laterally. These coupling pieces have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces formed on the mounting base 161, and a sealing process is performed between the board box 163 and the mounting base 161 by the coupling pieces and the coupled pieces. Is called.

(Back pack unit 15)
Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is covered from behind by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201, and a payout mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage board, and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201.

  The back pack 201 is formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and as shown in FIG. 3, a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. And have. The protective cover 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 67.

  The base portion 211 is provided with an external terminal plate 213 at the upper right portion thereof. The external terminal board 213 is provided with various output terminals, and various signals are output to the management control device on the game hall side through these output terminals. The base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower retaining pins at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the retaining pins are inserted into bearing fittings 132 (specifically, bearing portions) provided on the inner frame 13. By doing so, the back pack unit 15 is supported rotatably with respect to the inner frame 13. In addition, a fastening tool for fastening with respect to a fastening hole provided in the inner frame 13 is provided at the rotating front end portion of the base portion 211, and the fastening tool is fitted into the fastening hole. A back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13.

  In the base portion 211, a payout mechanism portion 202 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 212. The payout mechanism 202 is provided with a tank 221 that is arranged at the top of the back pack 201 and that opens upward, and game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 221. The A tank rail that is gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected to the lower side of the tank 221, and a case rail extending in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail. A payout device 222 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail. The game balls paid out from the payout device 222 are supplied to the game ball distribution unit provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 222.

  The game ball distribution unit has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 222 to any one of the upper plate 33, the lower plate 34, and a discharge passage described later, and the inner opening is the main body side described above. The upper dish passage and the front door side upper dish path communicate with the upper dish 33, and the outer opening is formed so as to communicate with the main body side lower dish path and front door side lower dish path. .

  As shown in FIG. 3, the discharge passage board and the control device collective unit 204 are attached to the lower end portion of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end portion in the front-rear direction. In the discharge passage board 203, a discharge passage opened rearward is formed on a surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and an open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game ball to the island facility or the like of the game hall, and the game ball led to the discharge passage from the recovery passage described above passes through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Discharged.

  The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base on which a payout control device 181 and a power supply / launch control device 191 are mounted. The payout control device 181 and the power supply / launch control device 191 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 181 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

  In the payout control device 181, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 222 is accommodated in the board box, and a state return switch provided on the payout control board projects out of the board box. For example, when the state return switch is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout device 222, the ball jam is eliminated.

  The power supply / launch control device 191 includes a power supply / launch control board housed in a board box, and a predetermined power source required for various control devices is generated and output by the board, and a game ball is fired by a player. Control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the handle 41 is performed. Further, the power supply / launch control device 191 is provided with a RAM erase switch. This pachinko machine 10 has a function to store and store various data so that even if a power failure occurs, it maintains the state at the time of the power failure, and when it recovers from the power failure, it can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure. It has become. Therefore, for example, when the power is turned off in the normal procedure, as in the case of the game hall being closed, the state before the turn-off is stored and retained. However, if the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch, the RAM data is initialized. It has become.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the right-hand acted ball-entering portion 63 and the variable prize-winning devices 64 and 65 disposed on the right route is characteristic. Hereinafter, with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. FIG. 5 is a front view of the upper variable winning device 64, FIG. 6 is a front view of the pitching unit, FIG. 7 (a) is a perspective view of the right-hand actuating ball 63 viewed from the front side, and FIG. FIG. 8 is a schematic view showing the relationship between the passage length and the required passage time.

(Upper variable winning device 64)
The upper variable winning device 64 includes a housing 310 in which a ball passage 312 through which a game ball passes is formed, and the housing 310 bulges from the front of the game board 60 to the front of the game machine. It is attached to the game board 60. The housing 310 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and a game ball or the like flowing down the ball passage 312 through the outer portion of the housing 310 is visible.

  A portion of the housing 310 that bulges to the front side of the game board 60 is formed with an upper prize winning port 311 that constitutes the entrance portion of the ball passage 312. The upper prize winning opening 311 is opposed to the middle stream part (the part extending vertically) on the right route from the side of the gaming machine (right side). A shutter 315 is disposed so as to cover from the flow area side (right side).

  The shutter 315 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable in parallel with the front surface of the game board 60, and the shutter 315 is closed so as to prevent the game ball from flowing into the upper prize winning opening 311 by turning around the pivot support portion. The position is displaced to the open position that allows the game ball to flow into the upper prize winning port 311.

  A driving unit (specifically, a solenoid) for the shutter 315 is connected to the main controller 162 and operates based on a driving signal from the main controller 162. The shutter 315 is configured to stand by at a closed position when no drive signal is output from the main controller 162 (non-excited state).

  In a state where the shutter 315 is disposed at the open position (open state), approximately half of the flow area (flow path) in the midstream portion of the right route is cut by the shutter 315, and most of the game balls flowing down the right route are It is configured to flow into the upper variable winning device 64 (ball passage 312) through the upper prize winning port 311.

  The ball passage 312 branches into a first branch passage 313 and a second branch passage 314 at an intermediate position. A flow path switching member 316 capable of switching the flow-down destination of the game ball to the first branch path 313 and the second branch path 314 is disposed at this branch portion. A drive unit (specifically, a solenoid) for the flow path switching member 316 is connected to the main controller 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main controller 162. The flow path switching member 316 is configured to stand by at a projecting position projecting into the ball passage 312 when the drive signal is not output from the main control device 162 (non-excited state).

  In a state where the flow path switching member 316 is disposed at the protruding position, the flow path switching member 316 blocks the inlet portion of the second branch passage 314. In this state, the game balls that have reached the branch portion are prevented from flowing into the second branch passage 314, and the game balls flow into the first branch passage 313.

  When the drive unit drive signal for the flow path switching member 316 is output from the main control device 162, the flow path switching member 316 moves to a retracted position where the protrusion to the spherical path 312 is avoided, and the second branch path 314 The inlet part is opened. Thereby, the inflow destination of the game ball is changed. In this state, the game balls that have reached the branch portion are prevented from flowing into the first branch passage 313, and the game balls flow into the second branch passage 314.

  Here, the movement of the flow path switching member 316 is defined in advance by the type of jackpot result. Specifically, when a normal big hit result to be described later is obtained, the flow path switching member 316 moves to the retracted position as the shutter 315 moves from the closed position to the open position, and the flow path switching member 316 Immediately thereafter, it is defined to return to the protruding position. Specifically, the time required for the flow path switching member 316 to return to the protruding position is shorter than the time required for the game ball that has flowed into the upper prize winning opening 311 to reach the branch portion. For this reason, when a normal jackpot result is obtained, inflow into the second branch passage 314 is substantially avoided.

  On the other hand, when a probability variation big hit result to be described later is obtained, the flow path switching member 316 moves to the retracted position as the shutter 315 moves from the closed position to the open position, but thereafter the shutter 315 is closed. It is stipulated to wait at the protruding position until it returns to the position. For this reason, when the probable jackpot result is reached, most of the game balls that have flowed into the top prize winning port 311 flow into the second branch passage 314.

  An upstream side detection sensor 317 is disposed at a portion upstream of the branch portion in the ball passage 312, and more specifically, a portion downstream of the branch portion, specifically, the first branch passage 313 and the second branch passage 313. Downstream detection sensors 318 and 319 are arranged in the branch passage 314. The upstream side detection sensor 317 and the downstream side detection sensors 318 and 319 are connected to the main control device 162, and the main control device 162 is based on detection information (detection signal) from the upstream side detection sensor 317. The presence or absence of a prize is specified, and when a prize is generated, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Further, the remaining state of the game ball is monitored based on detection information (detection signals) from the upstream side detection sensor 317 and the downstream side detection sensors 318 and 319.

  In main controller 162 shown in the present embodiment, the ball enters second branch passage 314 during the opening / closing execution mode based on detection information (detection signal) from downstream detection sensor 318 attached to first branch passage 313. When it is specified that the occurrence has occurred, the lottery mode is switched from the low probability mode to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Although details will be described later, in the high probability mode, the probability of a jackpot result is higher than in the low probability mode, and the player can advantageously advance the game. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the second branch passage 314 is referred to as “advantageous ball entry portion 314”.

  Of the game balls that have been launched to the right route, most of the game balls that have passed through the upper variable prize-winning device 64 go to the ball entering unit 70 disposed on the downstream side of the upper variable prize-winning device 64 on the right route. Become. The ball entry unit 70 is formed by integrating the above-described right operation ball entry portion 63 and the lower variable prize winning device 65. Hereinafter, the ball entry unit 70 will be described with reference to FIG.

(Entry unit 70)
The ball entry unit 70 includes a housing 320 in which a ball passage 321 constituting a part of the right route (specifically, a downstream region) is formed, and the housing 320 bulges forward from the front surface of the game board 60. The game board 60 is fixed in a state. The ball passage 321 extends from the outside (right side) of the game area PE to the center side (left side). An inlet portion 321a of the incoming ball unit 70 (ball passage 321) is formed in the upper right portion of the bulging portion of the housing 320 so as to face upward, and an outlet portion of the incoming ball unit 70 (ball passage 321) is formed in the lower left portion. 321b is formed to face left.

  The outlet portion 321 b is located directly below the lower working ball entering portion 62, and the game ball that has flowed out from the outlet portion 321 b is guided below the lower working ball entering portion 62. Thereby, the entrance of the game ball that has passed through the ball passage 321 to the lower operation entrance portion 62 is avoided.

  Note that the housing 320 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and is configured so that the inside of the housing 320 (for example, a game ball or the like flowing down the ball passage 321) can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Incidentally, in order to emphasize the sense of unity of the right operation ball entering portion 63 and the lower variable winning device 65, the housing 320 may be made opaque and the internal structure may be difficult or impossible to see.

  The ball passage 321 has a passage width, a passage height, and the like so that a plurality of game balls cannot pass through the same portion at the same time, and is formed in a crank shape so that a step is formed in the middle in the passage direction. Specifically, the ball passage 321 constitutes an upstream portion of the ball passage 321 and forms a horizontally long upstream passage portion 322 that is inclined downward toward the center of the gaming machine, and a downstream portion of the ball passage 321 to constitute a gaming machine. A horizontally long downstream passage portion 324 that is inclined downward toward the center is provided so as to be shifted vertically and horizontally so that the former is on the upper side and the latter is on the lower side. 322 and the downstream passage portion 324 are connected by an intermediate passage portion 323 (corresponding to a “communication passage portion”) extending in the vertical direction.

  In the upstream passage portion 322, the right working ball entrance portion 63 is provided. Specifically, the right operation port 63a of the right operation entrance portion 63 is opened upward, and an upstream passage portion 322 is formed so as to cross over the right operation port 63a. As for the electric accessory 71 attached to the right operation ball entry portion 63, a shutter 331 that can be slid forward and backward (in the thickness direction of the game board 60), and an electric accessory driving portion 332 (solenoid) for the shutter 331, It has. The electric accessory driving unit 332 is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main control device 162. In a non-driving state (non-excited state) in which a drive signal is not output from the main control device 162, the shutter 331 is disposed at a closed position that covers the right working port 63a from above, and a drive signal is output to drive the electric accessory. When the part 332 is in a driving state (excited state), it moves (retreats) to an open position that does not cover the right working port 63a.

  Here, in the state where the shutter 331 is disposed at the closed position, the bottom of the upstream-side passage portion 322, that is, the rolling surface of the game ball is formed by the shutter 331. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7A, the housing 320 has an upstream bottom portion 322a that forms a bottom portion upstream of the right working port 63a in the passage direction of the upstream passage portion 322, and a right working port 63a. A downstream bottom portion 322b that forms a bottom portion further downstream is provided, and a rolling surface of the game ball is formed by the upstream bottom portion 322a, the downstream bottom portion 322b, and the shutter 331. In the following description, a region where a flow path is formed (complemented) by the shutter 331 in the upstream passage portion 322, that is, a region facing the right working port 63a across the shutter 331 in the upstream passage portion 322 is referred to as “first”. This is referred to as “one specific area SE1” (see FIG. 6).

  A game ball that has reached the first specific area SE1 in a state in which the shutter 331 is disposed at the open position and the upstream-side passage portion 322 (specifically, the rolling surface) is cut off is the passage direction of the upstream-side passage portion 322. It becomes difficult to move to the right working port 63a.

  In the present embodiment, the first specific area SE1 is devised to decelerate the game ball passing through the first specific area SE1 and increase the chance to win the right operation port 63a. Hereinafter, the device will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 6B, a path (flow path) through which the game ball passes is illustrated using a one-dot chain line.

  The front wall portion 335 and the rear wall portion 336 that define the passage of the upstream-side passage portion 322 in the housing 320 are provided with protrusions 335a and 336a that protrude toward the first specific region SE1. . The protrusions 335 a and 336 a extend vertically so as to be orthogonal to the passage direction of the upstream passage portion 322. In the following description, the protrusion 335a disposed on the front wall 335 is referred to as “front protrusion 335a”, and the protrusion 336a disposed on the rear wall 336 is referred to as “rear protrusion 336a”. ".

  The gap dimension D1 between the rear wall part 336 and the front protrusion part 335a is set to be larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball, and the gap dimension D2 between the front wall part 335 and the rear protrusion part 336a is also set. It is set to be larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. A plurality of (two in the present embodiment) front ridge portions 335a are arranged in the passage direction (guide direction) of the upstream passage portion 322 with a gap larger than the diameter D of the game ball. A plurality (two in the present embodiment) of the side protrusions 336a are also arranged in the passage direction (guide direction) of the upstream passage portion 322 with a gap larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. By arranging these front protrusions 335a and rear protrusions 336a alternately, the flow path of the game ball is designed to meander back and forth with respect to the passage direction of the upstream passage 322.

  Here, when the protrusion amount of the front protrusion portion 335a, the protrusion amount of the rear protrusion portion 336a, and the diameter D of the game ball are added, the passage width of the upstream passage portion 322 becomes larger. (D3 <D). This prevents the game ball from running through the first specific area SE1 so as to avoid a collision with the ridges 335a and 336a.

  About the game ball which passes the upstream channel | path part 322, it collides with the protrusion parts 335a and 336a. Due to such a collision, the moving speed of the game ball in the first specific area SE1 is reduced (decelerated). That is, the first specific area SE1 of the upstream passage portion 322 functions as a deceleration section for forcibly decelerating the game ball. By configuring the game ball that passes through the upstream passage portion 322 in this manner to be decelerated, the game ball passes through the first specific region SE1 as compared with the case where the protrusions 335a and 336a are not provided. The time required for is extended.

  Note that the protrusions 335a and 336a are disposed so as to be biased to positions close to the intermediate passage 323 in the first specific region SE1. Thus, the game ball is decelerated at a position immediately upstream of the intermediate passage portion 323.

  In the present embodiment, the degree of deceleration is defined as follows. That is, the time required for the game ball to pass through the first specific area SE1 is based on the sum (1.2 sec) of the variable display time and the fixed display time of the picture of the through gate display unit DS in the low frequency support mode. It is defined to be shorter and longer than the game ball firing period (0.6 sec). As will be described in detail later, when the game ball is continuously fired to the right route during the low frequency support mode, the game ball flowing down the right route passes through the right working entrance 63 and moves downward. In most cases, when the variable winning device 65 is reached and the right operation ball entering portion 63 is opened, at least one ball is generated.

  The game balls that have not flowed into the right operation port 63a continue to move along the ball passage 321 as they are, and most of them reach the downstream passage portion 324. Here, with reference to FIG. 6 again, the downstream-side passage portion 324 and the lower variable winning device 65 associated therewith will be described.

  The lower major prize opening 341 of the lower variable prize winning device 65 is opened upward, and a downstream passage portion 324 is formed so as to cross over the lower major prize opening 341. The lower variable winning device 65 includes a shutter 345 that is slidable back and forth (in the thickness direction of the game board 60), and a drive unit (solenoid) for the shutter 345. The drive unit for the shutter 345 is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main control device 162. In a non-driving state (non-excited state) in which a drive signal is not output from the main controller 162, the shutter 345 is disposed at a closed position that covers the lower large prize winning port 341 from above, and a drive signal is output to the drive unit. Is moved (retracted) to an open position that does not cover the lower large prize winning opening 341 by being in a driving state (excitation state).

  Here, in a state where the shutter 345 is disposed at the closed position, the shutter 345 forms a bottom portion of the downstream passage portion 324, that is, a rolling surface of the game ball. Specifically, the housing 320 is provided with a downstream bottom portion that forms a bottom portion on the downstream side of the lower large prize winning port 341 in the passage direction of the downstream passage portion 324, and a game ball is formed by the downstream bottom portion and the shutter 345. The rolling surface is formed. In the following description, a region where a flow path is formed (complemented) by the shutter 345 in the downstream passage portion 324, that is, a region facing the lower major prize winning port 341 across the shutter 345 in the downstream passage portion 324 is “ It is referred to as “second specific area SE2”.

  The game ball that has reached the second specific area SE2 under the situation where the shutter 345 is disposed at the open position and the downstream passage portion 324 (specifically, the rolling surface) is cut off is the passage direction of the downstream passage portion 324. It becomes difficult to move to the lower prize winning port 341.

  In addition, although the deceleration area which consists of protrusion part 375a, 376a (refer FIG. 8) is provided also in 2nd specific area | region SE2, the specific structure which concerns on the said deceleration area is the same as that of 1st specific area SE1. Therefore, the explanation is incorporated.

  The intermediate passage portion 323 described above extends upward from the upstream end portion of the shutter 345. The left-side passage wall surface forming the intermediate passage portion 323 is positioned on the extension of the upstream-side passage portion 322, and the game ball that has passed through the upstream-side passage portion 322 is directed by colliding with the left-side passage wall surface. And the intermediate passage 323 falls toward the shutter 345.

  An opening through which a game ball can pass is formed on the right passage wall surface forming the intermediate passage portion 323, and a part of the game ball that passes through the intermediate passage portion 323 flows into the opening. A discharge passage is formed between the right operating ball entering portion 63 and the lower variable winning device 65 so that the game ball flowing into the opening is discharged from the ball entering unit 70. A part of the game ball flowing down the ball passage 321 is discharged from the ball entering unit 70 through the opening → discharge passage before reaching the lower variable winning device 65 (shutter 345). Note that the game ball passing through the discharge passage is guided to the back side of the game board 60 as it is, so that the movement to the out port 68 is avoided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the relationship between the passage length of each part of the ball passage 321 and the time required for passing the game ball will be supplementarily described. FIG. 8 is a schematic view of the internal structure of the ball entering unit 70 as viewed from the front. In the following description, the passage length of the first specific area SE1 in the front view of the gaming machine is “passage length PL1”, the time required to pass through the first specific area SE1 is “required time T1”, The passage length of the second specific area SE2 is “path length PL3”, the time required to pass through the second specific area SE2 is “required time T3”, and the distance between the first specific area SE1 and the second specific area SE2 The passage length is referred to as “passage length PL2”, and the time required to pass between the first specific area SE1 and the second specific area SE2 is referred to as “required time T3”.

  Comparing the passage lengths PL1 to PL3, the length becomes longer in the order of passage length PL2 <passage length PL1 <passage length PL3. As already described, the passing path of the game ball is meandering in the first specific area SE1 and the second specific area SE2, but even if this meandering portion is taken into account, the path length PL2 <path length PL1 <path length It becomes longer in order of PL3.

  As will be described later in detail, the required time T1 in the first specific area SE1 is the minimum interval time (0.7 sec) when the right-hand actuated ball-pushing portion 63 is continuously opened in the low-frequency support mode. Longer than the minimum interval time (1.2 sec) in the case where the right-hand actuated ball entering portion 63 is continuously opened in the high-frequency support mode, the required time in the second specific area SE2 T3 is set so as to be longer than the minimum interval time (1.7 sec) when the lower variable prize-winning device 65 is continuously opened when the special win continues.

  For example, when the lower variable winning device 65 is in an open state, a game ball that avoids the right operation winning ball portion 63 is directed to the lower variable winning device 65. By reducing the distance between the right-hand actuated ball portion 63 and the lower variable winning device 65, the game ball avoiding the right-hand actuated ball portion 63 gives an impression that it immediately goes to the lower variable prize device 65. It has become easier. Thereby, the expectation of winning a prize to the lower variable winning device 65 can be preferably increased.

(Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 602 is mounted on a main control board 601 provided in the main controller 162. The MPU 602 includes a ROM 603 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 602 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 603 is executed. It is an element incorporating a RAM 604, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. Note that a part of the functions of the MPU 602, for example, the function of the ROM 603 and the function of the RAM 604 may be included as another element.

  The MPU 602 is provided with an input port and an output port. Connected to the input side of the MPU 602 are a power failure monitoring board 605, a payout control device 181, various detection sensors and the like provided in the main control device 162. The power failure monitoring board 605 is connected to a power supply / emission control device 191, and power is supplied to the MPU 602 via the power failure monitoring board 605. Further, as a part of various detection sensors, a detection sensor 391a for the general winning opening 61, a detection sensor 391b for the lower action entry part 62, a detection sensor 391c for the right action entry part 63, and an upper variable prize apparatus 64 Detection sensors 317 to 318, a detection sensor 391d for the lower variable winning device 65, and a detection sensor 391e for the through gate 66 are connected, and detection information from these various detection sensors 317 to 318 and 391a to 391e ( Based on the detection signal), the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a winning determination (entrance determination) or the like for each winning part. Further, the MPU 602 executes a big hit occurrence lottery based on winning in the lower working ball entering portion 62 (lower working port 62a) and the right working ball entering portion 63 (right working port 63a).

  On the output side of the MPU 602, a power failure monitoring board 605, a payout control device 181 and a notification / production control device 143 (specifically, a notification / production control board 651) are connected. For example, a payout ball command is output to the payout control device 181 based on a winning determination result to the winning-corresponding winning portion. In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referred to when a prize ball command is output. When the winning to the general winning opening 61 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output, and when the winning to the upper winning opening 311 is specified, 14 games are output. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the ball is output, and when a winning to the lower large prize opening 341 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and the lower operation opening 62a is output. When the winning is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output, and when the winning to the right operation port 63a is specified, the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is output. Is output.

  Various commands such as a change start command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the notification / production control device 143. In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referred to when these various commands are output. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each command is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as information of the predetermined number of bytes.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 602, an electric accessory driving unit 332 for driving the electric accessory 71 associated with the right operation ball entering unit 63, a variable winning driving unit 451 for driving the shutter 315 of the upper variable winning device 64, and an upper side. A flow path switching drive unit 452 that drives the flow path switching member 316 of the variable winning device 64, a variable winning drive unit 461 that drives the shutter 345 of the lower variable winning device 65, a main display unit 81, and the like are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 601, and the MPU 602 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 602 is configured to open and close the upper large prize winning opening 311 and the lower large prize winning opening 341, and the variable winning drive section 451 of the upper variable winning apparatus 64 and the variable winning drive section of the lower variable winning apparatus 65. Drive control 461 is executed. For example, in each game round, the display control of the lower working port display unit DL and the right working port display unit DR in the main display unit D of the main display unit 81 is executed in the MPU 602.

  Furthermore, an external terminal plate 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 602. The external terminal plate 213 is provided with a jackpot signal output terminal or the like as an output terminal for outputting a signal upon state transition. For example, when the game result is a jackpot result, the MPU 602 can output a jackpot signal to the management control device on the game hall side through the jackpot signal output terminal. Specifically, in a normal time, a LOW level signal is output from the jackpot signal output terminal, and when a jackpot result is obtained, an HI level signal is output. The output mode of this signal may be reversed.

  The power failure monitoring board 605 relays between the main control board 601 and the power / fire control device 191, and monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts that is the maximum voltage output from the power / fire control device 191. The payout control device 181 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 222 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

  The power supply / launch control device 191 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 601, the payout control device 181 and the like, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do.

  The power supply / launch control device 191 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 110, and the game ball launch mechanism 110 (specifically, the solenoid 111) is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. More specifically, an operation level detection sensor and a touch sensor provided on the game ball launch handle 41 are connected to the power source / launch control device 191. The operation level detection sensor is a sensor that detects an operation amount (rotation amount) of the game ball launch handle 41, and based on information from the operation level detection sensor, the game ball launch mechanism 110 emits a strength of the game ball (launch speed). ) Will be decided. The touch sensor is configured to output information when the player is touching the game ball launch handle 41, and the player touches the game ball launch handle 41 based on this information in the power / fire control device 191. It is the structure which can grasp | ascertain whether it is. When it is determined that the player is touching the game ball launch handle 41 based on information from the touch sensor and the operation level detection sensor determines that the game ball launch handle 41 is operated, the game ball is fired. Will be allowed.

  Information from the touch sensor is transmitted to the main control device 162, and thus to the notification / production control device 143 and the display control device 710, via the power supply / launch control device 191.

  The notification / production control device 143 includes a notification / production control board 651 on which an MPU 652 is mounted. The MPU 652 includes a ROM 653 storing various control programs and fixed value data, and a control program stored in the ROM 653. A RAM 654, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the above, is incorporated.

  The notification / production control device 143 drives and controls the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162 and controls the display control device 710. Is. Specifically, in the notification / production control device 143, based on various commands input from the main control device 162, the symbol variation display mode in the symbol display device 75 and the symbol stop display mode (for example, the symbol of the symbol to be finally stopped) are displayed. The type of combination) is determined, the presence / absence of reach, the content of reach production, and the like are determined, and the determined content is assigned to the command and transferred to the display control device 710.

  The display control device 710 includes a display control board on which an MPU is mounted. The MPU has a ROM storing various control programs and fixed value data, and various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM. RAM, a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM that stores image data, a video RAM that temporarily stores image data read from the character ROM, and the like are incorporated. Yes. In the MPU, display control of the variable display unit 67 (specifically, the symbol display device 75) is executed based on a command input from the notification / production control device 143.

  Here, the display content of the symbol display device 75 will be described. The display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is provided with a variable display area in which three symbol rows of left, middle, and right are displayed. On the display screen 75a, the symbols of each symbol row are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (for example, from top to bottom) with periodicity.

  Although details will be described later, in each variable display area, one symbol is stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and a total of three symbols are stopped and displayed. For example, if the display of variation stops in the order of left symbol sequence → right symbol sequence → middle symbol sequence and the variation display of all symbol sequences is completed with the predetermined symbol combination formed on the active line, the jackpot result or special hit result A moving image or the like indicating the transition to the special gaming state corresponding to is displayed.

  In view of the fact that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the left symbol row is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the right symbol row is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). Column), the middle symbol row can be referred to as the third symbol row (or the third symbol row).

  Incidentally, the mode of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 75 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary, the number of symbol columns, the direction of the symbol variable display in the symbol columns, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. For example, a plurality of symbol sequences may be set to be vertically arranged, and the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol sequence may be set to the horizontal direction.

  A hold display area is set at the bottom of the display screen 75a. In the hold display area, the hold number display for the upper working port displayed in a divided manner so that the same number of unit hold display areas as the maximum hold number when the game ball wins the lower working port 62a is arranged in the left-right direction. And the reserved number display area for the lower operating opening that is divided and displayed so that the unit reserved display areas of the same number as the maximum reserved number when the game ball wins the right operating opening 63a are arranged in the horizontal direction. It is configured.

  Specifically, when the game ball wins the lower operation port 62a, the maximum number of reservations is four, and the corresponding number of reservations for the lower operation port corresponds to the first unit reservation display region. The second unit hold display area, the third unit hold display area, and the fourth unit hold display area are set. In addition, when the game ball wins the right operation port 63a, the maximum number of reservations is four. Correspondingly, in the reservation number display region for the right operation port, the first unit reservation display region, the second unit A hold display area, a third unit hold display area, and a fourth unit hold display area are set.

  For example, when the number of holds when the game ball is won in the lower operation port 62a is 1, a predetermined hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area, and the game ball is displayed in the lower operation port 62a. When the number of holds when winning is four, a predetermined hold image is displayed in all of the first unit hold display area to the fourth unit hold display area.

(About various counters)
Next, a configuration related to the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

  The MPU 602 uses various counter information at the time of game to make a lottery transition to the special game state (opening / closing execution mode), setting the display of the main display unit 81 (main display unit D), setting the symbol display of the symbol display device 75, and the like. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the big hit or the special winning occurrence, the hit type counter C2 used for determining the type when the big hit result is obtained, and the symbol display Reach random number counter C3 used for the lottery of the reach display when the device 75 fluctuates and changes, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the display for the entrance portion of the main display unit 81 And a variation type counter CS for determining the variation display time of the symbol in the pattern and the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 75. It is set to be. Furthermore, the open random number counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 71 attached to the right operation ball entering portion 63 is used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 631 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 604.

  The RAM 604 includes a lower working port holding area Ra, a right working port holding area Rb, a lower working port holding area Ra, a first execution area AE1, and a right working port holding area Rb. A reserved ball storage area 632 including an area AE2 and a total reserved number storage area is provided. In the reserved ball storage area 632, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are time-sequentially matched to the winning history of the game balls to the lower operating port 62a or the right operating port 63a. It is designed to be stored.

  Specifically, each counter is configured such that the hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in the range of “0” to “599”, for example, and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 599). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial random number counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = “0” to “599”). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 62a or the right operation port 63a. More specifically, it is stored in the lower working port holding area Ra of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower working port 62a, and the right working port holding area Rb of the RAM 604 at the timing when the gaming ball wins the right working port 63a. Stored in

  The value of the random number for winning the big hit or the value of the random number for winning the special winning is stored in the result table storage area 621 as the result information storage unit 621 in the ROM 603 as a result table (result information group). Here, the contents of the success / failure table will be described with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. As the success / failure tables, there are provided a success / failure table for the lower working port 62a (see FIG. 11) and a success / failure table for the right working port 63a (see FIG. 12). In the lottery based on the entrance to the lower working port 62a Is referred to the success / failure table for the lower working port 62a, and in the lottery based on the ball entering the right working port 63a, the success / failure table for the right working port 63a is referred to.

(Failure table for lower working port)
In the success / failure table for the lower working port 62a that is referred to when the lottery mode is the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. 507 ". That is, among the values of the random number counter C1 of “0” to “599”, “7” and “507” correspond to the jackpot result, and the probability of the jackpot is 2/600. The random number corresponding to the special winning result is not provided in the low probability mode correspondence success / failure table for the lower working port 62a. Yes.

  In the success / failure table for the lower working port 62a that is referred to when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 11B, the random number values corresponding to the jackpot result are “7”, “ 107, “207”, “307”, “407”, and “507”. That is, “7”, “107”, “207”, “307”, “407”, “507” correspond to the jackpot result among the values of the hit random number counter C1 from “0” to “599”, The probability of winning a jackpot is 6/600. In the high probability mode correspondence success / failure table for the lower working port 62a, no random number value corresponding to the special winning result is provided, and the lottery result corresponds to the result of losing except for the random value that is the big winning result. Yes.

(Right-hand opening / failing table)
In the success / failure table for the right working port 63a that is referred to when the lottery mode is the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. 12A, the random number values corresponding to the jackpot result are “7” and “ 507 ". That is, among the values of the random number counter C1 of “0 to 599”, “7” and “507” correspond to the jackpot result, and the probability that the jackpot will be 2/600 is that the lower operation port 62a. The same as the success / failure table. However, in the success / failure table for the right working port 63a, “1”, “2”, “3”... “597”, “598”, “599” correspond to the special hit results, and the special hit results. The resulting probability is 593/600. In addition, except for the random number value that is the jackpot result and the random number value that is the special hit result, the lottery result is a result that the lottery result is a result of “4”, “104”, “204”, “404”, “504”. It is configured as follows.

  In the success / failure table for the right working port 63a that is referred to when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 12B, the random number values corresponding to the jackpot result are “7”, “ 107, “207”, “307”, “407”, and “507”. That is, “7”, “107”, “207”, “307”, “407”, “507” correspond to the jackpot result among the values of the hit random number counter C1 from “0” to “599”, The probability of winning a jackpot is 6/600, which is similar to the success / failure table for the lower working port 62a. However, in the success / failure table for the right operating port 63a, “1”, “2”, “3”... “597”, “598”, “599” correspond to the special hit results, The resulting probability is 593/600. It should be noted that “404” is configured so that the lottery result is an outlier result, except for the random number value that is the jackpot result and the random number value that is the special hit result.

  In this way, the probability of winning the jackpot result is the same regardless of whether the winning is made in either the lower working port 62a or the right working port 63a. However, when comparing the lower working port 62a and the right working port 63a, the right working port 63a is set to be more likely to have a special hit result. In other words, the right working port 63a is favored over the lower working port 62a when compared with a probability that some balls can be expected.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 10 again, the hit type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of “0” to “99”, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, “99”), returns to 0. Yes. The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 62a or the right operation port 63a. More specifically, it is stored in the lower working port holding area Ra of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower working port 62a, and the right working port holding area Rb of the RAM 604 at the timing when the gaming ball wins the right working port 63a. Stored in

  The game result distribution destination for the win type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area 622 as a distribution information group storage unit in the ROM 603. In the present embodiment, the type of the jackpot result is determined with reference to the hit type counter C2 and the distribution table. The jackpot results include 2R normal jackpot results, 8R regular jackpot results, 2R probability variation jackpot results, 6R probability variation jackpot results A, 6R probability variation jackpot results B, 6R probability variation jackpot results C, 6R probability variation jackpot results D, 6R probability variation jackpot results E, 8R probability variation jackpot result, 16R probability variation jackpot result A, and 16R probability variation jackpot result B are provided.

(Distribution table for lower working port)
As shown in FIG. 13 (a), in the lower working port distribution table, a total of 50 "0" to "49" out of the values of the hit type counter C2 from "0" to "99" are 8R normal big hits. A total of 10 "50" to "59" correspond to the 6R probability variation jackpot result A, and a total of 8 from "60" to "67" corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot result B. A total of 6 from “68” to “73” corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot result C, and a total of 4 from “74” to “77” corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot result D. A total of 2 from 78 "to" 79 "corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot result E, and a total of 18 from" 80 "to" 97 "corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot result A, from" 98 "to" 99 ”corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot result B in total.

(Right working port sorting table)
As shown in FIG. 13B, in the distribution table for the right working port, a total of 35 “0” to “34” out of the values of the hit type counter C2 from “0” to “99” are 2R normal big hits. A total of five "35" to "39" correspond to the 2R probability variation jackpot result, and a total of ten "40" to "49" corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot result A. A total of four from “50” to “53” corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot result B, and a total of three from “54” to “56” corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot result C. ”To“ 58 ”corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot result D,“ 59 ”corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot result E, and“ 60 ”to“ 95 ”corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot result A. A total of four "96" to "99" correspond to the 16R probability variation big hit result B. There.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 10 again, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 238) and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 62a or the right operation port 63a. More specifically, it is stored in the lower working port holding area Ra of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower working port 62a, and the right working port holding area Rb of the RAM 604 at the timing when the gaming ball wins the right working port 63a. Stored in Then, based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 603, it is determined whether or not to generate a reach display (reach state).

  Here, the reach display is provided with a symbol display device 75 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures), and changes in game times in which the game result is a game result corresponding to the open / close execution mode. In the gaming machine in which the stop display result after display can be a special display result, before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) in the symbol display device 75 is started, This means a display state for making the player think that the variable display state is likely to result in the special display result.

  In other words, a combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is established by stopping the symbols for some of the symbol sequences displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. This is a display state in which possible reach symbol combinations are displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

  More specifically, as a stage before the end of the symbol display, the combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is established on a preset active line in the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying possible combinations of reach symbols, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner by the final stop symbol sequence in a situation where the reach line is formed.

  The display contents on the display screen 75a will be described in more detail. First, when the symbol variation display is terminated in the right symbol column, and the symbol variation display is terminated in the left symbol column, the symbol hits one of the effective lines. Reach lines are formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the numbers that make up the combination, and reach is achieved by displaying the symbols in the middle symbol row in the situation where the reach lines are formed. Display. When a big hit occurs, the main symbols with numbers that make up the combination of winning symbols together with the main symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed on the reach line. Is terminated.

  In the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of symbols is performed on the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. There are those that produce an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 75a after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols. Further, when reach display is performed or before reach display, it is determined using the reach random number counter C3 or other counter whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character. May be.

  For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. The variation type counter CS is a symbol variation display time in the lower working port display portion DL and right working port display portion DR of the main display unit 81 (main display portion D), and a symbol variation display time in the symbol display device 75. Are used in the determination by the MPU 602. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the time of starting the variation display on the lower working port display unit DL and the right working port display unit DR (at the time of the variation start of the symbol by the symbol display device 75). The

  For example, the open random number counter C4 for the electric accessory 71 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 249, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The open random number counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric storage area 633 of the RAM 604 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 66. Then, at a predetermined timing, with reference to the stored value of the open random number counter C4 and the lottery table for support (a group of success / failure information) stored in the success / failure table storage area 621 of the ROM 603, the electric accessory 71 An open lottery (support lottery) is performed as to whether or not to control the open state. The probability of winning a support in the high frequency support mode (specifically 249/250) is higher than the probability of winning a support in the low frequency support mode (specifically 248/250). The mode is preferential.

(Various processes executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162)
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process that are executed when the MPU 602 in the main controller 162 advances the game at each game time will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 602 executes a main process activated when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). Description of these processes is omitted.

(Timer interrupt processing)
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically by the MPU 602 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors (for example, the detection sensors 317 to 319 and 391a to 391e) is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, the state of the detection sensor (detection information from the detection sensor) is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. For example, if it is determined that a prize has been generated for the lower operating port 62a, a winning detection flag for the lower operating port is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604, and it is determined that a prize has been generated for the right operating port 63a. In the case of winning, a winning detection flag for the right working port is stored in the various flag storage areas 635, and when it is determined that winning has occurred in the upper variable winning device 64, the various large flag winning areas are stored in the various flag storage areas 635. The winning detection flag for the advantageous ball portion is stored in various flag storage areas 635, and the lower variable winning device 65 is stored. When it is determined that a winning has been made, a winning detection flag for the lower major winning opening is stored in various flag storage areas 635.

  Thereafter, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

  In the subsequent step S103, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

  Thereafter, in step S104, a through winning process for winning through the through gate 66 is executed, and in a subsequent step S105, the operating port winning process in accordance with winning in the operating ports 62a and 63a is executed. Timer interrupt processing ends.

(Through winning process)
In the through winning process in step S104, it is first determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 66. When the game ball wins the through gate 66 and the stored bonus number SN is less than the upper limit (specifically, 4), the stored bonus number SN is incremented by 1 and updated in step S103. The value of the open random number counter C <b> 4 is stored in the first area of the free storage areas of the power storage area 633 of the RAM 604. Thereafter, the main winning process is terminated.

  If it is determined that the game ball has not won the through gate 66, or if it has been determined that the through gate 66 has been won, but the bonus reserve storage number SN has reached the upper limit, the value of the open random number counter C4 is set. The winning process is terminated without storing.

  In the through winning process, the display control process of the through-gate hold number display section SS of the main display unit 81 is executed. Specifically, the light emission control process is executed so that the same number of light emitters as the number of reserved items stored SN is turned on for the through gate reservation number display unit SS including four light emitters (LEDs).

(Prize processing for working port)
In the winning process for the operating opening, first, whether or not the game ball has won (starting winning) in the lower operating entrance 62 (lower operating opening 62a) is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 for the lower operating entrance. The determination is made based on whether or not a winning detection flag is stored. When it is determined that the winning detection flag is stored, that is, when a detection signal is received that the game ball has won a prize in the lower operation entry portion 62 (lower operation opening 62a), the payout control A prize ball command for causing the device 181 to pay out four game balls is set. Then, external signal setting processing is performed so that information indicating that a game ball has won a prize in the lower operation ball entry portion 62 (lower operation port 62a) is output to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that a winning has been made to the lower operating ball entering portion 62 (lower operating port 62a).

  Thereafter, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the reserved area Ra for the lower working port (starting reserved memory number) is updated (added by 1). Subsequently, an information acquisition process for storing each value of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is performed, and the winning process is completed.

  On the other hand, when the winning detection flag for the lower operating port is not stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 and the winning detection flag for the right operating port is stored, the payout control device 181 A prize ball command for paying out one game ball is set. The set prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 181 in the external output process of the normal process described later.

  Subsequently, an external signal setting process is performed so that information indicating that a game ball has won a prize in the right operation ball entry section 63 (right operation port 63a) is output to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that a winning has occurred in the right working ball entering portion 63 (right working port 63a).

  Thereafter, the value (starting hold storage number) stored in the hold number storage area of the hold area Rb for the right working port is updated (added by 1). Subsequently, an information acquisition process for storing each value of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is performed, and the winning process is completed.

  Note that if the game ball has not won any of the lower operation entrance portion 62 and the right operation entrance portion 63, the main winning process is terminated as it is.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing of steps S201 to S207 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S209 and S210 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S201, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence / absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 181. In addition, if a command for an effect such as a command corresponding to an effect for game times such as a change start command, a type command, a change end command, or a command corresponding to an effect for an opening / closing execution mode is set, it is notified. Transmit to the production control device 143. Further, output setting for the external terminal board 213 is performed according to information set in the external output buffer of the RAM 604.

  Next, in step S202, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

  In subsequent step S203, a game number control process for advancing the game of each game time is executed. In this game times control process, determination of success / failure of jackpot or the like and distribution determination of jackpot type, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 75, display for the operation port in the main display unit 81 (main display portion D) Display control of the parts DL, DR, etc. is performed.

  Thereafter, in step S204, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. Although details will be described later, the gaming state shifts to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, and the like by this gaming state transition processing.

  In the subsequent step S205, an electric power support process for driving and controlling the electric charge 71 attached to the right-hand actuating ball entering portion 63 is executed. In this electric power support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 71 is to be opened using information stored in the electric power storage area of the RAM 604. Display control of the gate display unit DS is performed.

  In a succeeding step S206, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a predetermined operation is performed on the condition that a launch permission signal output from the power supply / launch controller 191 is input based on the launch operation being performed on the game ball launch handle 41. The solenoid 111 of the game ball launching mechanism 110 is excited once in the firing period (0.6 sec in the present embodiment). Thereby, a game ball is launched toward the game area PE. That is, when an irregular hit such as a so-called stop hit is not performed, the launch of the game ball is repeated at a predetermined cycle on condition that the launch operation is performed.

  In a succeeding step S207, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is set in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed in the power failure monitoring board 605 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 605 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 602 and is erased in the next main processing.

  If the power failure flag is not set, the last process of the plurality of processes that are repeatedly executed is completed, so whether or not the next normal process execution timing has been reached in step S208, that is, the previous normal process It is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing. That is, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S209, and the variation type counter CS is updated in step S210.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random. The variation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S207 that the power failure flag has been set, the power interruption has occurred, so the power interruption processing from step S211 is executed. Specifically, the timer interrupt processing is prohibited in step S211, and then the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in step S212. After the access to the RAM 604 is prohibited in step S213, the power supply is completely shut off. The infinite loop is continued until the process cannot be executed.

(Game control process)
Here, with reference to the flowcharts of FIG. 16 to FIG. As shown in FIG. 16, in the game times control process shown in the present embodiment, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the special game state (opening / closing execution mode) is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening / closing execution mode flag (opening / closing execution state information) is stored (stored) in the opening / closing execution mode flag storage area (opening / closing execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. To do. The opening / closing execution mode flag is stored when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in a gaming state transition process described later, and is erased when the opening / closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S301, the game turn control process is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S301, a game turn control process (game action control corresponding to the lower action opening) for the game turn related to winning in the lower action entry part 62 (lower action opening 62a) in step S302. Processing and control processing for the lower operation port) and game time control processing for game times related to winning in the right operation ball entry portion 63 (right operation port 63a) (right operation port corresponding game time control) in step S303 After executing the process, the control process for the right working port), the game times control process is terminated. The basic flow is common to these two control processes. Hereinafter, the control process for the lower working port will be described first with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18, and then, for the right working port, focusing on the differences from the control process for the lower working port with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. The control process will be described.

(Control processing for lower working port)
As shown in FIG. 17, in the lower working port control process, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not a game is being played on the lower working port 62a. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the lower operation port display portion DL of the main display unit 81 is in a variable display to a fixed display, that is, whether or not a game for one game is being executed. This determination is made by storing (storing) a game-in-progress flag (in-game information) for the lower working port in a game-in-progress flag storage area (variable display information storage unit) in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. This is done by determining whether or not. The lower game opening game rotation flag is stored when the variable display is started in the lower operation opening display section DL, and is erased when the display is stopped and the final display is finished.

  If the game is not being played, a negative determination is made in step S401, and the process proceeds to step S402. In step S402, it is determined whether or not the game relating to the right operation port 63a is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the right working port display portion DR of the main display unit 81 is in a variable display to a fixed display, that is, whether or not a game for one game is being executed. This determination is made by storing (storing) the game running flag for the right working port (variable display information) in the game running flag storage area (variable display information storage unit) in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. This is done by determining whether or not. The game in-game flag for the right working port is stored when the variable display is started in the right working port display section DR, and the design corresponding to the lottery result (game result) is stopped and the confirmation display is finished. It is erased when you do.

  If a positive determination is made in step S402, the process proceeds to step S403. In step S403, it is determined whether or not it is time to stop and display a picture corresponding to the big hit result or the special win result in the game times related to the right operation port 63a. If an affirmative determination is made in step S403, the lower working port control process is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S403 or step S402, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, referring to the total number-of-holds storage area of the hold-ball storage area 632, the number of the hold information stored on the hold is the number of hold information for the lower working port CRN (specifically, the number of the hold information related to the lower work port 62a). It is determined whether or not (number) is “0”. When the lower working port reserved memory number CRN is “0”, the game number control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the lower working port reserved storage number CRN is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, data setting processing is performed.

  In the data setting process of the lower working port 62a, first, the lower working port reserved storage number CRN is decremented by one. After that, the data stored in the first area of the lower working port holding area Ra is moved to the first execution area AE1 (see FIG. 10), and the data stored in the storage area of the lower working port holding area Ra is shifted. Execute the process.

  This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, and the data in the first area is cleared and the second area → the first area, The data in each area is shifted such as the third area → second area and the fourth area → third area. Then, one LED that is lit is turned off in the reserved number display section for the lower working port. In this turn-off process, contrary to the turn-on process that is executed when the hold information is added, the LEDs of the hold number display portion SL for the lower working port are turned off sequentially from the lower side.

  After the data setting process described in detail above is performed, in step S406, the variation for the lower working port for starting the display of the variation in the pattern on the display unit DL for the lower working port and the display of the variation in the pattern on the symbol display device 75. After executing the start process (lower working port variation start process), the game times control process is terminated. Here, with reference to FIG. 18, the lower start opening variation start process in step S406 will be described.

(Fluctuation start processing for lower working port)
In the lower working port variation start process, first, at step S501, a success / failure determination process is executed. In the success / failure determination process, the success / failure determination information among the information stored in the first execution area AE1, that is, the numerical information acquired from the winning random number counter C1 is referred to the jackpot value described above with reference to the lower operation opening / failure table. It is determined whether or not the information matches. If the determination result in step S501 is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S502, and the process proceeds to step S503.

  In step S503, a type determination process is executed. In the type determination process, the information for type determination among the information stored in the first execution area AE1, that is, the numerical information acquired from the hit type counter C2 is grasped. In addition, referring to the sorting table stored in the sorting table storage area 622 of the ROM 603, the above-described type determination information corresponds to the information group corresponding to the 8R normal jackpot result and the 6R probability variation jackpot result A. Information group, information group corresponding to 6R probability variation jackpot result B, information group corresponding to 6R probability variation jackpot result C, information group corresponding to 6R probability variation jackpot result D, information group corresponding to 6R probability variation jackpot result E, 16R probability variation jackpot The information group corresponding to the result A and the information group corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result B are specified.

  In step S504, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. More specifically, the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 603 is a picture that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display portion D (lower operation port display portion DL) of the main display unit 81 in the game time. And the specified information is stored in the RAM 604. A plurality of pictures to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit D are set in the jackpot result stop result table. In step S504, information indicating the picture corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 604. In step S504, the current game result is an 8R normal jackpot result, a 6R probability variation jackpot result A, a 6R probability variation jackpot result B, a 6R probability variation jackpot result C, a 6R probability variation jackpot result D, a 6R probability variation jackpot result D, a 16R probability variation jackpot result. Information for specifying in the MPU 602 whether the result A or the 16R probability variation jackpot result B is stored in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. Specifically, an 8R normal flag is stored in the case of an 8R normal jackpot result, a 6R probability variable A flag is stored in the case of a 6R probability variable jackpot result A, and 6R in the case of a 6R probability variable jackpot result B. The probability variation B flag is stored. If the result is 6R probability variation jackpot result C, the 6R probability variation C flag is stored. If the result is 6R probability variation jackpot result D, the 6R probability variation D flag is stored, and the result is 6R probability variation jackpot result E. In this case, the 6R probability variation E flag is stored, the 16R probability variation big hit result A is stored, the 16R probability variation A flag is stored, and the 16R probability variation big hit result B is stored, the 16R probability variation B flag is stored.

  After executing the setting process in step S504, the process proceeds to step S505. In step S505, it is determined whether or not the game turn related to the right operation port 63a is being executed. If a positive determination is made in step S505, the process proceeds to step S506. In step S506, the forced end flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. When the game times (pattern change display) related to the right operation port 63a are being executed, the game times (pattern change display) related to the right operation port 63a are forcibly interrupted based on this forced end flag. Will be terminated. More specifically, when the game times related to the lower operation port 62a correspond to the jackpot result, the game times related to the right operation port 63a can be executed beyond the timing at which the final display in the game time is performed. In this case, the game times related to the right operation port 63a are shortened, and the game times related to the right operation port 63a are ended together with the end of the game times related to the lower operation port 62a. In such a case, the pattern that is stopped and displayed in the game times related to the right operation port 63a corresponds to the result of the removal.

  Returning to the description of step S502, if the determination result in step S501 is an outlier result, a negative determination is made in step S502, and the process proceeds to step S507. In step S507, a stop result setting process for a detachment result is executed.

  Specifically, the pattern which is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit D (lower operation port display unit DL) of the main display unit 81 in the game round relating to the start of the change this time is stored in the ROM 603 in advance. The result is specified from the result stop result table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604.

  After performing the processes of steps S506 and S507, or when a negative determination is made in step S505, the process proceeds to step S508. In step S508, a variable display time (display duration) setting process is executed. Details of this setting process will be described later.

  After executing the variable display time setting process in step S508, a variable start command and a type command are set in step S509. The change start command includes information on the change display time. Here, as described above, the fluctuation display time obtained by referring to the non-reach occurrence fluctuation display time table is different from the fluctuation display time obtained by referring to the reach occurrence fluctuation display time table. Even if the start command does not include information on the presence or absence of reach, the notification / production control device 143, which is the control device on the sub-side, can identify the presence or absence of reach from the information on the variable display time. . In this regard, it can be said that the change start command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change start command may include information directly indicating whether or not reach has occurred.

  After executing the setting process in step S509, the process proceeds to step S510, and after the variable display of the lower working port display portion DL in the main display unit 81 is started, the lower working port variation start process is terminated. In the process of step S510, the game operation flag for the lower operation port is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. As a result, it is possible to specify that the game times (for example, change display) related to the lower operation port 62a are being executed in the subsequent processing. In the present embodiment, the display of the design on the first working port display unit D1 and the design change display on the design display device 75 are started in accordance with the lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the variable display of symbols is started before the lottery.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 17 again, if an affirmative determination is made in step S401, that is, if it is determined that a game is being played on the lower operation port 62a, the process proceeds to step S407. In step S407, it is determined whether or not it is time to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the special winning result in the game times related to the right operation port 63a. If a negative determination is made in step S407, the process proceeds to step S408. In step S408, it is determined whether or not it is time to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result in the game times related to the right operation port 63a. If a negative determination is made in step S407 and step S408, the process proceeds to step S409.

  In step S409, it is determined whether it is the timing when the variable display time set in step S508 has elapsed. When a negative determination is made in step S409, the fluctuation display process is executed in step S410, and then the lower working port control process is terminated. In the variation display process in step S410, the pattern is variably displayed by performing a process of turning on / off each LED constituting the lower working port display unit DL.

  If a positive determination is made in step S409, the process proceeds to step S412. In step S412, a variation end process is executed. In the change end process, display control of the main display unit 81 is performed so that the lower working port display unit DL stops and displays the picture in a predetermined manner. That is, for example, a fixed display of the pattern corresponding to the lottery result (game result) is executed. Note that the lower game opening game turning flag stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 is erased when the confirmation display ends.

  After setting the change end command in the subsequent step S413, the game times control process is ended. The change end command set in step S413 is transmitted to the notification / production control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The notification / production control device 143 executes a process for ending the production in the game times based on the reception of the change end command. Further, the change end command is transmitted to the display control device 710 via the notification / production control device 143, and the display control device 710 receives the change end command to respond to the game result of the game time, etc. The combination of the symbols that have been displayed is confirmed (final stop display) on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. In addition, it is good also as a structure which terminates the effect for game rotations independently by the alerting / production control device 143 or the display control device 710 without transmitting the change end command.

  If an affirmative determination is made in either step S407 or step S408, a stop picture rewriting process is executed in step S410, and after the processes in steps S412 and S413 are executed, the lower working port Control process is terminated. In the stop result rewriting process, first, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to the special hit result. When the special hit result is not supported, rewriting of the stop pattern (the pattern corresponding to the disconnection result) determined in the lower working port variation start process is avoided. On the other hand, if the current game result corresponds to the special hit result, the stop pattern (the pattern corresponding to the special hit result) determined in the lower start opening variation start process corresponds to the outlier result. Rewrite to the pattern you want.

  Next, with reference to FIG.19 and FIG.20, the control process for right working ports is demonstrated.

(Control processing for right working port)
As shown in FIG. 19, in the control process for the right working port, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the game relating to the right working port 63a is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the right working port display portion DR of the main display unit 81 is in a variable display to a fixed display, that is, whether or not a game for one game is being executed. This determination is made by storing (storing) the game running flag for the right working port (variable display information) in the game running flag storage area (variable display information storage unit) in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. This is done by determining whether or not. The game in-game flag for the right working port is stored when the variable display is started on the right working port display section DR, and is erased when the display is stopped and the final display is finished.

  If the game is not being played, a negative determination is made in step S601 and the process proceeds to step S602. In step S602, it is determined whether or not the game relating to the lower operation port 62a is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the lower operation port display portion DL of the main display unit 81 is in a variable display to a fixed display, that is, whether or not a game for one game is being executed.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S602, the process proceeds to step S603. In step S603, it is determined whether or not it is time to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result in the game times related to the lower operation port 62a. If an affirmative determination is made in step S603, the right working port control process is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S603, or if a negative determination is made in step S602, the process proceeds to step S604. In step S604, referring to the total number-of-holds storage area of the hold-ball storage area 632, the number of hold information stored in the hold is the right-hand-port hold storage number CRN (specifically, the hold-information stored in the right-action port 63a. It is determined whether or not (number) is “0”. If the right working port reserved memory number CRN is “0”, the game times control process is terminated. On the other hand, if the right working port reserved storage number CRN is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, data setting processing is performed.

  In the data setting process for the right working port 63a, the right working port reserved storage number CRN is first decremented by one. Thereafter, the data stored in the first area of the right working port holding area Rb is moved to the second execution area AE2 (see FIG. 10), and the data stored in the storage area of the right working port holding area Rb is shifted. Execute the process.

  This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, and the data in the first area is cleared and the second area → the first area, The data in each area is shifted such as the third area → second area and the fourth area → third area. Then, one LED that is lit is turned off in the reserved number display section for the right working port. In this turn-off process, contrary to the turn-on process that is executed when the hold information is added, the LED of the hold lamp portion for the right working port is turned off in order from the lower side.

  After performing the data setting process described in detail above, the right working port for starting the pattern variation display on the main display unit 81 (main display unit D) and the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 75 in step S606. After executing the fluctuation start process for the right operation (variation start process for the right working port), the game times control process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the fluctuation | variation start process for right operation ports of step S606 is demonstrated.

(Fluctuation start processing for right working port)
In the right working port variation start process, first, in step S701, a success / failure determination process is executed. In the success / failure determination process, with reference to the right / left operation opening / failure table, the information for determination of success / failure among various information stored in the second execution area AE2, that is, the numerical information related to the hit random number counter C1 is the above-described jackpot value. It is determined whether or not the information matches. If the determination result in step S701 is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S702 and the process proceeds to step S703.

  In step S703, a type determination process is executed. In the type determination process, information for type determination among various pieces of information stored in the second execution area AE2, that is, numerical information acquired from the hit type counter C2, and the distribution stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603 With reference to the table, the above-described information for type determination is an information group corresponding to the 2R normal jackpot result, an information group corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot result, an information group corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result A, 6R probability variation jackpot Information group corresponding to result B, information group corresponding to 6R probability variation jackpot result C, information group corresponding to 6R probability variation jackpot result D, information group corresponding to 6R probability variation jackpot result E, information corresponding to 16R probability variation jackpot result A Group and the information group corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result B are specified.

  In step S704, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. More specifically, the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 603 is a picture that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display portion D (right operation port display portion DR) of the main display unit 81 in the game time. And the specified information is stored in the RAM 604. In the jackpot result stop result table, a plurality of pictures to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit D are set. In step S704, information indicating the picture corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 604. In step S704, the current game result is a 2R normal jackpot result, a 2R probability variation jackpot result, a 6R probability variation jackpot result A, a 6R probability variation jackpot result B, a 6R probability variation jackpot result C, a 6R probability variation jackpot result D, a 6R probability variation jackpot result. E, information for specifying by the MPU 602 whether the 16R probability variation jackpot result A or 16R probability variation jackpot result B is stored in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. Specifically, a 2R normal flag is stored in the case of 2R normal jackpot result, a 2R probability variable flag is stored in the case of 2R probability variable jackpot result, and a 6R probability change A in the case of 6R probability variable jackpot result A. A flag is stored. When the 6R probability variation jackpot result B is obtained, the 6R probability variation B flag is stored, when the 6R probability variation jackpot result C is stored, the 6R probability variation C flag is stored, and when the 6R probability variation jackpot result D is obtained. Stores the 6R probability variation D flag, stores the 6R probability variation E flag when the 6R probability variation jackpot result E, stores the 16R probability variation A flag when the 16R probability variation jackpot result A, and stores the 16R probability variation jackpot result B If it is, the 16R probability variation B flag is stored.

  After executing the setting process of step S704, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether or not the game turn related to the lower operation port 62a is being executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S705, the process proceeds to step S706. In step S706, the forced end flag is stored in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. When the game times (pattern change display) related to the lower operation port 62a are being executed, the game times (pattern change display) related to the lower operation port 62a are forcibly executed on the way based on this forced end flag. Will be terminated. More specifically, when the game times related to the right operation port 63a corresponds to the jackpot result, and the game times related to the lower operation port 62a beyond the timing at which the confirmation display in the game time is performed (corresponding to the outage result) ) Can be executed, the game times related to the lower operation port 62a are shortened, and the game times related to the lower operation port 62a are ended together with the end of the game times related to the right operation port 63a. In such a case, the pattern that is stopped and displayed in the game times related to the lower operation port 62a corresponds to the result of the removal.

  Returning to the description of step S702, if the determination result in step S701 is a special winning result, a negative determination is made in step S702 and an affirmative determination is made in step S707, and the flow proceeds to step S708.

  In step S708, a special hit result stop result setting process is executed. Specifically, a special hit result stop result stored in advance in the ROM 603 for a picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display portion D (right operation port display portion DR) of the main display unit 81 in the game time. The information is specified from the table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604. In the stop result table for the special hit result, a plurality of pictures to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit D are set. In step S703, information indicating the picture corresponding to the special hit result is stored in the RAM 604. If the current game result is a special hit result, the special hit flag is stored in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604.

  After executing the process of step S707, the processes of steps S704 and S705 described above are executed.

  If the determination result in step S701 is an outlier result, a negative determination is made in step S702 and step S707, and the process proceeds to step S709. In step S709, a stop result setting process for a detachment result is executed. Specifically, the pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit D (right operation port display unit DR) of the main display unit 81 in the game time related to the start of the current fluctuation is stored in the ROM 603 in advance. The result is specified from the result stop result table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604.

  After performing the process of step S706 or step S709, or when a negative determination is made in step S705, the process proceeds to step S710. In step S710, a variable display time (display duration) setting process is executed. Details of the processing for setting the variable display time will be described later.

  After executing the variable display time setting process in step S710, a variable start command and a type command are set in step S711. The change start command includes information on the change display time. Here, as described above, the fluctuation display time obtained by referring to the non-reach occurrence fluctuation display time table is different from the fluctuation display time obtained by referring to the reach occurrence fluctuation display time table. Even if the start command does not include information on the presence or absence of reach, the notification / production control device 143, which is the control device on the sub-side, can identify the presence or absence of reach from the information on the variable display time. . In this regard, it can be said that the change start command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change start command may include information directly indicating whether or not reach has occurred. By the way, in the present embodiment, the display on the second working port display unit D2 and the display on the symbol display device 75 are displayed in accordance with the lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the variable display of symbols is started before the lottery.

  After performing the setting process of step S711, the process proceeds to step S712, and after starting the fluctuation display of the display part DR for the right working port in the main display unit 81, the fluctuation starting process for the right working port is ended. In the process of step S712, a game running flag for the right working port is stored in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is possible to specify that the game times (for example, change display) related to the right operation port 63a are being executed.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 19 again, if an affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game is being performed on the right operation port 63a, the process proceeds to step S608. In step S608, it is determined whether or not it is time to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result in the game times related to the lower operation port 62a. If a negative determination is made in step S608, the process proceeds to step S609.

  In step S609, it is determined whether it is the timing when the variable display time has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S609, the fluctuation display process is executed in step S610, and then the right working port control process is terminated. In the variable display process of step S610, the pattern is displayed in a variable manner by performing a process of turning on / off each LED constituting the right working port display section DR.

  If affirmative stabilization is obtained in step S609, the process proceeds to step S612. In step S612, change end processing is executed. In the variation end process, display control of the main display unit 81 is performed so that the pattern is stopped and displayed on the right working port display unit DR in a predetermined manner.

  After setting the change end command in the subsequent step S613, the game times control process is ended. The variation end command set in step S613 is transmitted to the notification / production control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The notification / production control device 143 executes a process for ending the production in the game times based on the reception of the change end command. Further, the change end command is transmitted to the display control device 710 via the notification / production control device 143, and the display control device 710 receives the change end command to respond to the game result of the game time, etc. The combination of the symbols that have been displayed is confirmed (final stop display) on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. In addition, it is good also as a structure which terminates the effect for game rotations independently by the alerting / production control device 143 or the display control device 710 without transmitting the change end command.

  Returning to the description of step S608, if an affirmative determination is made in step S608, the process proceeds to step S611. That is, if it is the timing to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result in the game times related to the lower operation port 62a, the process proceeds to step S611. In step S611, a renewal process of the stop result is performed.

  In the stop result rewriting process, first, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to the special hit result. When the special hit result is not supported, rewriting of the stop pattern (the pattern corresponding to the missed result) determined in the right working port variation start process is avoided. On the other hand, if the current game result corresponds to the special hit result, the stop pattern (the pattern corresponding to the special hit result) determined in the variation starting process for the right working port is handled as the outlier result. Rewrite to the pattern you want. After performing the process of step S611, after performing each process of said step S612 and step S613, this right operation port control process is complete | finished.

(Game state transition process)
Next, the gaming state transition processing in step S204 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. As already described, in the present embodiment, a normal game state in which a game progresses based on a ball entering the operation ports 62a and 63a, and a special game state in which the variable winning devices 64 and 65 are opened (open / close execution mode). ) And are provided. For the normal gaming state, the first normal gaming state in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode by the electric accessory 71 is the low frequency support mode, and the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode by the electric accessory 71 is the high frequency. The second normal gaming state that becomes the support mode, the third normal gaming state in which the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode by the electric accessory 71 is the low-frequency support mode, and the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support by the electric accessory 71 The mode is composed of a fourth normal gaming state in which the high-frequency support mode is set, and the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state are switched through a special gaming state corresponding to the jackpot result.

  In the game state transition process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the game round (specifically, a confirmation display) is completed. If it is not the timing at which the game round is completed, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If the game round has ended, more specifically, if the preset stop display time (determined display time) has elapsed since the end of the variable display, the process proceeds to step S803, and this time It is determined whether or not the game results of the game times (results of the above-mentioned lottery lottery) correspond to the transition to the special game state (open / close execution mode). Specifically, the above-mentioned 8R normal flag, 2R normal flag, 2R probability change flag, 6R probability change A flag, 6R probability change B flag, 6R probability change C flag, 6R probability change D flag, 6R probability change E flag, 16R probability change A are stored in the RAM 604. It is determined whether any one of the flag and the 16R probability variation B flag is stored. If none of the above flags is stored, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If any of the above flags is stored, start processing of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S804. In the start process, first, an opening standby time (waiting time for start) for causing the variable prize device 65 to wait without opening the upper prize winning port 311 of the variable prize device 65 for opening in the opening / closing execution mode. Set. Specifically, opening waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM 603 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604.

  The opening standby time (opening time) in the present embodiment differs depending on the type of winning. Specifically, the waiting time for opening in the case of a jackpot result is 5 sec, whereas the waiting time for opening in the case of a special hit result is a shorter time, specifically 8 msec. It has become.

  In a succeeding step S805, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the jackpot result. When an affirmative determination is made in step S805, the process proceeds to step S806, and a value corresponding to the current jackpot result is set in the round number counter RC provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604. Specifically, when the current jackpot result is a 2R jackpot result, “2” is set in the round number counter RC, and when the current jackpot result is a 6R jackpot result, “6” is set in the round number counter RC. Is set to “8” in the round number counter RC when the current jackpot result is an 8R jackpot result, and “16” is set in the round number counter RC when the current jackpot result is a 16R jackpot result. "Is set. The round number counter RC is decremented every time a round progresses, and when the value of the round number counter RC becomes “0”, the current special gaming state ends.

  In the subsequent step S807, if the high frequency support mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604, the high frequency support mode flag is deleted. As a result, the support mode is maintained in the low frequency support mode during the special gaming state corresponding to the jackpot result.

  Returning to the description of step S805, if a negative determination is made in step S805, that is, if the special gaming state is triggered by the special winning result, the process proceeds to step S808. In step S808, the second winning mode flag is set in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. Thereafter, in step S809, “1” is set in the round number counter. In the subsequent processing, based on the fact that the second winning mode flag is set, it is determined that the current special gaming state corresponds to the special winning result.

  After executing the process of step S807 or step S809, the process proceeds to step S810. In step S810, an opening command setting process is performed. The set opening command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 143 and the display control device 710 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The notification / production control device 143 determines the content of the production corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the decided production is executed. The contents of the effect include a display mode in the symbol display device 75, and the determined display mode is output from the notification / effect control device 143 to the display control device 710 as a display content command. In the display control device 710, based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification / production control device 143, the display corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode, for example, the display content corresponding to the jackpot The display control of the symbol display device 75 is executed so that the moving image display of the character or the like, the background image, etc. are switched.

  After executing the opening command setting process in step S810, the external signal setting process is executed in step S811, and the gaming state transition process ends. In the external signal setting process in step S811, it is determined whether or not any of the various jackpot flags and special hit flags is stored in the RAM 604. If any of the flags is stored, the game hall side A signal indicating that a big hit or special hit has occurred is output to the management control device (Hall Computer HC). By receiving this external signal, the management control device recognizes that it has shifted to the special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode).

  Returning to the description of step S801, if the opening / closing execution mode is in effect, an affirmative determination is made in step S801, and the flow proceeds to step S812. In step S812, it is determined whether or not the opening standby time has elapsed. If the opening standby time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, in step S813, a special winning opening / closing process is executed.

  Here, the special winning opening and closing process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

(Big prize opening and closing process)
As shown in FIG. 22, in the special winning opening / closing process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the second winning mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. If a negative determination is made in step S901, the process proceeds to step S902, and the first opening / closing process is executed. The first opening / closing process is a process executed when the special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) corresponding to the jackpot result.

(First opening / closing process)
As shown in FIG. 23, in the first opening / closing process, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311) is being opened. Specifically, the determination is performed based on the driving state of the variable winning driving unit 451 of the upper variable winning device 64. If the upper prize winning opening 311 is not open, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not the value of the round number counter RC is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, the first opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1003, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC1 provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 is “0”. The timer counter TC1 is a counter that is referred to when grasping the opening time or interval time (interval time between rounds) of the top prize winning opening 311 and the like each time timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14) is executed. The value is subtracted by “1”. If a negative determination is made in step S1003, the first opening / closing process is terminated.

  When the value of the round number counter RC is not “0” and the value of the timer counter TC1 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1004 and the opening process of the upper variable winning device 64 (upper prize winning port 311) is executed. To do. Specifically, the variable prize driving unit 451 is set in a driving state so as to open the upper grand prize opening 311.

  Then, the process of step S1005-step S1006 is performed as a closing condition setting process (opening time setting process) corresponding to the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311). Specifically, “15000” (corresponding to 30 sec) is set in the timer counter TC1 in step S1005, and “9” is set in the winning counter PC in the subsequent step S1006.

  In a succeeding step S1007, it is determined whether or not it is the first round (first round) in the current special gaming state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1007, the operation proceeds to step S1008. In step S1008, it is determined whether or not the current special gaming state corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1008, a probability changing flow path switching process is executed in step S1009. In the probability changing flow path switching process, a drive signal is output to the flow path switching drive section 452, the flow path switching member 316 is moved from the protruding position to the retracted position, and a duration for continuing to output the drive signal is set. . About this continuation time, it is the same length as the maximum opening time of the upper prize winning opening 311. For this reason, when game balls are continuously being fired to the right route, most of the winning balls are awarded to the advantageous pitching portion 314, and the transition to the high probability mode is confirmed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1008, a normal flow path switching process is executed in step S1010. In the normal flow path switching process, similarly to the probability changing flow path switching process, a drive signal is output to the flow path switching drive section 452 to move the flow path switching member 316 from the protruding position to the retracted position. Set the duration to continue the output of. About this continuation time, it is shorter than the maximum opening time of the upper prize winning opening 311. More specifically, a time shorter than the time required for the game ball that has flowed into the upper prize winning opening 311 to reach the advantageous ball entry 314 (specifically, the detection area of the detection sensor 319) is set. For this reason, even when game balls are continuously being fired to the right route, winning to the advantageous pitching portion 314 is basically avoided.

  After the flow path switching process is executed in steps S1009 and S1010, or when a negative determination is made in step S1007, the process proceeds to step S1011. In step S1011, an opening command indicating that the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311) has been opened is set, and the first opening / closing process ends. The set release command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (see FIG. 15). The notification / production control device 143 determines the content of the production corresponding to the release based on the received release command, and controls various devices so that the content of the decided production is executed.

  Returning to the description of step S1001, if it is determined in step S1001 that the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311) is open, the process proceeds to step S1012. In step S1012, it is determined whether it is time to return the flow path switching member 316 to the protruding position. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the duration set in steps S1009 and S1010 has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1012, output of the drive signal to the flow path switching drive unit 452 is stopped in step S1013, and the flow path switching member 316 is returned to the protruding position.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1012, or after the return processing in step S1013 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1014. In step S1014, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC1 is “0”. If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not “0”, the process advances to step S1015 to determine whether or not a game ball has won a prize at the upper prize winning port 311 from the upstream detection sensor 317 disposed in the upper variable winning device 64. This is determined based on the detection information (detection signal).

  If a winning has occurred, a winning command output process is executed in step S1016. The winning command is output to the notification / production control device 143, and the notification / production control device 143 changes the display on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 based on the winning command.

  After executing the command output process in step S1016, the process proceeds to step S1017. In step S1017, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1, and in the succeeding step S1018, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is “0”. finish.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1018, that is, when the value of the winning counter PC is “0”, or when an affirmative determination is made in step S1014 (that is, the value of the timer counter TC1 is determined to be “0”). Case) means that the condition for closing the special prize opening is established. In this case, in step S1019, the variable winning drive unit 451 is set in a non-driven state so as to close the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311).

  In a succeeding step S1020, it is determined whether or not the flow path switching member 316 is disposed at the retracted position. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1020, output of the drive signal to the flow path switching drive unit 452 is stopped in step S1021, and the flow path switching member 316 is returned to the protruding position.

  After executing the return process of step S1021 or when a negative determination is made in step S1020, the process proceeds to step S1022, and the update process of the round number counter RC is executed. Specifically, when the value of the round number counter RC is not “0”, the round number counter RC is decremented by 1 and when the value of the round number counter RC is “0”, the round number counter RC The value of “0” is maintained as “0”.

  Thereafter, in step S1023, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated round number counter RC is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S1023, the process proceeds to step S1024, and “1000” (corresponding to 2.0 sec) is set in the timer counter TC1.

  After executing the process of step S1024, a close command is set in step S1025, and the first opening / closing process is terminated. The set closing command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The notification / production control device 143 determines the content of the production corresponding to the closure command based on the received closure command, and controls various devices so that the content of the decided production is executed.

  Returning to the description of step S1023, when it is determined in step S1023 that the value of the round number counter RC is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1026. In step S1026, an ending start process is executed. In the start process, an ending waiting time (5 sec in the present embodiment) is set for waiting without starting the next game round for ending in the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, ending waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM 603 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604.

  Thereafter, after setting an ending command in step S1027, the first opening / closing process is terminated. The set ending command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 15).

  Returning to the description of FIG. 22, when an affirmative determination is made in step S <b> 901, the second opening / closing process of step S <b> 903 is executed. Hereinafter, the second opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Second opening and closing process)
In the second opening / closing process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning port 341) is being opened. Specifically, the determination is performed based on the driving state of the variable winning driving unit 461 of the lower variable winning device 65. If the lower major prize opening 341 is not open, the lower variable prize winning device 65 (lower major prize opening 341) is opened in step S1102. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 461 is set in a driving state so as to open the lower large winning opening 341.

  Thereafter, the processing of steps S1103 to S1104 is executed as the closing condition setting processing (opening setting processing) corresponding to the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning opening 341). Specifically, in step S1103, “400” (corresponding to 0.8 sec) is set in the timer counter TC1, and in step S1104, “9” is set in the winning counter PC.

  Returning to step S1101, if it is determined in step S1101 that the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large prize opening 341) is open, the process proceeds to step S1105, and the value of the timer counter TC1 is “0”. It is determined whether or not. If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1106, and whether or not a game ball has won a prize at the lower major prize opening 341 is detected from the ball detection sensor disposed in the lower variable prize winning device 65. The determination is based on the detection signal.

  If a winning has occurred, a winning command output process is executed in step S1107. The winning command is output to the notification / production control device 143, and the notification / production control device 143 changes the display on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 based on the winning command.

  After executing the command output process in step S1107, the process proceeds to step S1108. In step S1108, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1. In subsequent step S1109, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is “0”. If not, the second opening / closing process is terminated. To do.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1109, that is, when the value of the winning counter PC is “0”, or when an affirmative determination is made in step S1105 (that is, the value of the timer counter TC1 is determined to be “0”). Case) means that the condition for closing the special prize opening is established. In this case, in step S1110, the variable winning drive unit 461 is brought into a non-driven state so as to close the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning opening 341).

  In subsequent step S1111, an ending start process is executed. In the start process, an ending waiting time (0.2 sec in the present embodiment) for waiting without starting the next game round is set for the ending in the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, ending waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM 603 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604.

  Then, after setting an ending command in step S1112, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The set ending command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 15).

  Returning to the description of FIG. 21 again, after executing the special winning opening / closing process in step S813, the process proceeds to step S814. In step S814, it is determined whether or not the round number counter RC is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S814, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S814, the process proceeds to step S815. In step S815, it is determined whether the ending standby time has elapsed. If the waiting time for ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value of the round number counter RC is “0” and the waiting time for ending has elapsed, in step S816, after executing the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, End the state transition process. Here, with reference to FIG. 25, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode will be described.

(Transition processing at the end of opening / closing execution mode)
In the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, first, it is determined whether or not the current special gaming state corresponds to the first winning mode. If it corresponds to the first winning mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 and the process proceeds to step S1202. In step S1202, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the advantageous ball portion 314 during the current special game state. If the entry into the advantageous entry portion 314 has occurred, a high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 in step S1203. Thereby, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode in the subsequent normal gaming state.

  After executing the process of step S1203 or when making a negative determination in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether or not the current special game state corresponds to the transition to the high frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, the high frequency support mode flag is set in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 in step S1205, and the number of games provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 in the subsequent step S1206. A value corresponding to the current jackpot result is set in the counter. The game number counter is decremented each time the game number is executed, and when the value of the game number counter becomes “0”, the high frequency support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, for example, in the case of the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state, when the result is a 16R probability variation big hit result based on a ball entering the right operation port 63a. The configuration is such that the transition to the high frequency support mode is avoided.

  After performing the process of step S1206 or when making a negative determination in steps S1201 and S1204, the process proceeds to step S1207. In step S1207, various flags for the special gaming state (for example, a winning mode flag, a big hit flag, etc.) stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 are erased, and the transition process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28, the electronic combination support process executed in step S205 of the normal process (see FIG. 15) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the power combination support process, FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram comparing the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, and FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the power role opening / closing process.

(Telephone support processing)
In the electronic combination support process, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not support is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a supporting flag is stored in a supporting flag storage area provided in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. The in-support flag is a flag that is stored when the electric accessory 71 attached to the right operation port 63a is switched to the open state, and is deleted when the electric accessory 71 is returned to the closed state.

  If no supporting flag is stored, the process advances to step S1302 to determine whether or not a support winning flag is stored in a support winning flag storage area provided in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. The support winning flag is a flag that is stored when an open lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 71 is in an open state is won, and is deleted when a supporting flag is stored.

  If the support winning flag is not stored, the process advances to step S1303 to determine whether the value of the timer counter TC2 provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 is “0”. If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not “0”, the main role support process is terminated.

  If the value of the timer counter TC2 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1304, and it is determined whether it is the end timing of the pattern change display on the through gate display unit DS. If it is the end timing of the variable display, in step S1305, the out-of-line display is set and “250” (corresponding to 0.5 sec) is set in the timer counter TC2, and then the main role support processing is ended. . By setting the out-of-display, the out-of-display display is stopped in the state where the out-of-display is stopped and displayed, and the out-of-pattern display is continued for 0.5 sec (FIG. 27). reference).

  When the value of the timer counter TC2 is “0” and it is not the end timing of the variable display, the process proceeds to step S1306, and it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory reserved storage number SN is greater than “0”. When the value of the stored item reservation memory number SN is “0”, the main character support process is terminated as it is. If the value of the reserved item storage number SN is larger than “0”, it is determined in step S1307 whether or not the support mode is the high-frequency support mode.

  If it is in the high frequency support mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1307, and the flow advances to step S1308. In step S1308, it is determined by lottery (open lottery) whether or not support by the electric accessory 71 is performed. More specifically, the value stored in the accessory holding ball storage area of the power combination storage area 633 is shifted, and the value of the open random number counter C4 shifted to the execution area and the result table storage area 621 of the ROM 603 are stored. The open lottery is performed with reference to the lottery table for the high frequency support mode. Simultaneously with the open lottery, “100” (corresponding to 0.2 sec) is set to the timer counter TC2 with reference to the variable display time table corresponding to the high frequency support mode stored in the ROM 603. The timer counter TC2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is activated. Thereafter, until the value of the timer counter TC2 becomes “0”, that is, for 0.2 sec, the variation display of the picture on the through gate display unit DS is continued (see FIG. 27).

  In the subsequent step S1309, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in step S1308 is a winning result (support winning). If the support is not won, the processing for the main role support is terminated. In the case of support winning, a support winning flag is set in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 in step S1310, and the main role supporting process is terminated.

  If it is in the low frequency support mode, a negative determination is made in step S1307, and the process proceeds to step S1311. In step S1311, it is determined by lottery (open lottery) whether or not support by the electric accessory 71 is performed. More specifically, the value stored in the accessory holding ball storage area of the power combination storage area 633 is shifted, and the value of the open random number counter C4 shifted to the execution area and the result table storage area 621 of the ROM 603 are stored. The open lottery is performed with reference to the low-frequency support mode lottery table. At the same time as the open lottery, “350” (corresponding to 0.7 sec) is set in the timer counter TC2 with reference to the variable display time table corresponding to the low frequency support mode stored in the ROM 603. Thereafter, until the value of the timer counter TC2 becomes “0”, that is, for 0.7 sec, the variation display of the picture on the through gate display unit DS is continued (see FIG. 27).

  In subsequent step S1312, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in step S1311 is a winning result (support winning). If the support is not won, the processing for the main role support is terminated. In the case of support winning, in step S1313, a support winning flag is set in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604, and the main role support processing is terminated.

  The probability of winning a support in the high frequency support mode (specifically 249/250) is higher than the probability of winning a support in the low frequency support mode (specifically 248/250). The mode is preferential.

  Returning to the description of step S1302 in FIG. 26, when the support winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604, an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, and the process proceeds to step S1314, where the value of the timer counter TC2 is set. It is determined whether or not it is “0”. If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not “0”, since the variation display of the picture on the through gate display unit DS is being performed, the main role support process is terminated as it is. If the value of the timer counter TC2 is “0”, a win display is set in step S1315. As a result, the display of the variation of the pattern in the accessory display unit 44 is terminated in a state where the winning display is stopped. In the subsequent step S1316, a flag being supported is set in the various flag storage area 635, and the support winning flag stored in the various flag storage area 635 is erased.

  Returning to the description of step S1301, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, that is, if a support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, the process proceeds to step S1317 to open / close the electric accessory 71. After executing the electronic combination opening / closing process for controlling, the electronic combination support process is terminated. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 28, the power combination opening / closing process will be described.

(Electronic opening and closing process)
In the electric combination opening / closing process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the electric combination 71 is being opened. Whether or not the electric accessory 71 is open is determined based on whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 332 is in a driving state. If the electric accessory 71 is opened, the process proceeds to step S1402, and the number of winnings after the electric accessory 71 is opened for the attached right working port 63a reaches the upper limit (“10” in this embodiment). It is determined whether or not. If a negative determination is made in step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403 to determine whether or not the value of the timer counter TC2 is “0”.

  If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not “0”, the main utility opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the timer counter TC2 is “0”, or if it is determined in step S1402 that the number of winnings has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S1404. In step S1404, a closing process for switching (returning) the electric accessory 71 to the closed state is performed. Thereafter, in step S1405, the supporting flag stored in the various flag storage areas 635 is deleted, and the main role opening / closing process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of step S1401, if the electric accessory 71 is not open, a negative determination is made in step S1401, and the flow proceeds to step S1406. In step S1406, it is determined whether or not the timer counter TC2 is “0”. If the timer counter TC2 is not “0”, the main utility opening / closing process is terminated. If the timer counter TC2 is “0”, an opening process for switching the electric accessory 71 to the open state is executed in step S1407.

  Thereafter, in step S1408, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. If it is in the high frequency support mode, “2850” (corresponding to 5.7 sec) is set in the timer counter TC2 in step S1409, and then the main function opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is in the low frequency support mode, “40” (corresponding to 0.08 sec) is set in the timer counter TC2 in step S1410, and then the main function opening / closing process is terminated (see FIG. 27).

(Relationship between gaming state and variable display time)
As already described, in the present embodiment, the hold information is acquired based on the ball entering the lower operation port 62a and the right operation port 63a, and the pattern and the pattern in the game times are acquired based on the acquired hold information. The variable display to the fixed display are executed. Here, the variable display time of the symbols and symbols is set according to the gaming state. 29 to 31, the configuration relating to the setting of the fluctuation display time and the like (the fluctuation display time setting process in the lower working port fluctuation starting process (see FIG. 18) and the fluctuation in the upper working port fluctuation starting process) The display time setting process (see FIG. 19)) will be supplementarily described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a variation display time setting process (a variation display time setting process for the lower working port) in the variation starting process for the lower working port. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a variation display time setting process for the right working port. 31 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state and the variable display time.

(Fluctuation display time setting process for lower working port)
As shown in FIG. 29, in the variable display time setting process for the lower working port, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the first normal gaming state is compatible with the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the first normal gaming state setting process is executed in step S1502, and then the variable display time setting process is terminated.

  In the first normal game state setting process, a table corresponding to the current game time is selected from the various normal game state variable display time tables stored in the ROM 603 variable display time table storage area 623. Then, the variable display time is set according to the number of pieces of hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the lower working port in the hold ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604, the result of the lottery determination, and the presence or absence of reach.

  As for the variable display time, when the jackpot result and the outlier result are compared, the former is likely to be longer than the latter, and in the case of the outlier result and reach display does not occur (completely off) In the case of (1), the larger the number of stored hold information, the shorter the information. FIG. 31A1 illustrates a variable display time when the game is completely out in the first normal gaming state. For example, when the number of stored hold information is “0” or “1”, any of “12, 13, 14 sec” is set as the variable display time, and the stored hold information When the number is “2”, any of “7, 8, 9 sec” is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored hold information is “3” or “4” Any of “3, 4, 5 sec” is set as the fluctuation display time. In the first normal gaming state, the symbol fixed display time on the lower working port display portion DL and the symbol fixed display time on the symbol display device 75 are set to “0.5 sec”.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 29, if a negative determination is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1503. In step S1503, it is determined whether or not the second normal gaming state is compatible with the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, the second normal gaming state setting process is executed in step S1504, and then the variable display time setting process is terminated.

  In the second normal game state setting process, the table corresponding to the current game time is selected from the various variable display time tables for the second normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. To set the variable display time.

  In the second normal gaming state, unlike the first normal gaming state, the number of selection candidates for the variable display time is limited to one regardless of the various conditions such as the number of stored hold information and the result of the lottery determination. ing. Specifically, in any second game state, the game display is configured such that the variable display time is “0.5 sec” and the final display time is “0.5 sec” (FIG. 31 ( a2)), and the variable display time is shorter than in the first normal gaming state.

  Although the details will be described later, in the second normal gaming state, by playing a game ball to the right route formed in the game area PE, it is advantageous for the player as compared with the case of aiming at the left route. It will go on. The game ball launched to the right route wins the right operation port 63a, and the game proceeds mainly based on the hold information related to the right operation port 63a. Under such circumstances, there is a possibility that the player will be confused when the game times corresponding to the lower operation port 62a, which is less advantageous than the right operation port 63a, are interrupted. In the present embodiment, in consideration of such circumstances, after the transition to the second normal gaming state, the game times corresponding to the lower operation port 62a are quickly digested, thereby suppressing the occurrence of the above disadvantages. ing.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1503 of FIG. 29, the process proceeds to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether or not the third normal gaming state corresponds to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1505, the third normal gaming state setting process is executed in step S1506, and then the variable display time setting process ends.

  In the third normal gaming state setting process, a table corresponding to the current game time is selected from the various variable display time tables for the third normal gaming state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. To set the variable display time.

  In the third normal gaming state, unlike the first normal gaming state, the number of selection candidates for the variable display time is limited to one regardless of various conditions such as the number of stored hold information and the result of the lottery determination. ing. Specifically, in the third normal gaming state, the variable display time is “0.5 sec” and the final display time is “0.5 sec” for any game times (FIG. 31 ( a3)).

  When a negative determination is made in step S1505 of FIG. 29, that is, in the case of the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1507, and the fourth normal gaming state setting process is performed. After the execution, this variation display time setting process is terminated.

  In the fourth normal game state setting process, the table corresponding to the current game time is selected from the various variable display time tables for the fourth normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. To set the variable display time.

  In the fourth normal gaming state, unlike the first normal gaming state, the number of selection candidates for the variable display time is limited to one regardless of various conditions such as the number of stored hold information and the result of the lottery determination. ing. Specifically, in the fourth normal gaming state, for any game times, the variable display time is “0.5 sec” and the final display time is “0.5 sec” (FIG. 31 ( a4)).

(Fluctuation display time setting process for right working port)
As shown in FIG. 30, in the variation display time setting process for the right working port, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the first normal gaming state is compatible with the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, the first normal gaming state setting process is executed in step S1602, and then the variation display time setting process ends.

  In the first normal game state setting process, a table corresponding to the current game time is selected from the various normal game state variable display time tables stored in the ROM 603 variable display time table storage area 623. And set the variable display time. The variation display time table referred to in the variation display time setting process for the right working port is a table different from the variation display time table referred to in the variation display time setting process for the lower operation port.

  In the first normal gaming state, regardless of various conditions such as the number of holding information stored in the right working port holding area Rb in the holding ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604, the result of winning / failing lottery, the presence / absence of reach, etc. The number of selection candidates for the variable display time is limited to one. Specifically, in the first normal gaming state, the variable display time is “600 sec” and the fixed display time is “1 sec” for any game times (see FIG. 31 (b1)). . Although the game ball fired to the right route in the first normal gaming state can win the right operation port 63a, the number of prize balls that can be acquired by winning the right operation port 63a is "1" and the right operation It is necessary to wait for 600 seconds before a lottery result based on winning in the mouth 63a is obtained. Thereby, the act of launching a game ball aiming at the right route in the first normal gaming state and trying to advance the game advantageously is suppressed.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 30, if a negative determination is made in step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, it is determined whether or not the second normal gaming state is compatible with the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1603, the second normal gaming state setting process is executed in step S1604, and then the present variation display time setting process is terminated.

  In the second normal game state setting process, the table corresponding to the current game time is selected from the various variable display time tables for the second normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. To set the variable display time.

  Regarding the variable display time in the second normal gaming state, when the jackpot result is compared with the special hit result and the off result, the former is likely to be longer than the latter. In particular, in the case of a detachment result and no reach display occurs (in the case of complete detachment), the variable display time is shortened as the number of stored hold information increases. In addition, in the case of a special hit result, a reach display is not generated as in the case of complete losing. In this case, the variable display time is shortened as the number of stored hold information increases. ing.

  In FIG. 31 (b2), the variable display time is shown in the case of a special hit or complete loss in the first normal gaming state. For example, when the number of stored hold information is “0”, “13 sec” is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored hold information is “1”. “8 sec” is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored hold information is “2”, “4 sec” is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored hold information is “3”. "Or" 4 "," 1 sec "is set as the variable display time. In the second normal gaming state, the symbol fixed display time on the right working port display section DR and the symbol fixed display time on the symbol display device 75 are unified to be “1 sec”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1603 of FIG. 30, the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, it is determined whether or not the third normal gaming state corresponds to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1605, the third normal gaming state setting process is executed in step S1606, and then the present variation display time setting process is terminated.

  In the third normal gaming state setting process, a table corresponding to the current game time is selected from the various variable display time tables for the third normal gaming state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. To set the variable display time.

  Regarding the variable display time in the third normal gaming state, when the jackpot result is compared with the special hit result and the off result, the former is likely to be longer than the latter. In particular, in the case of a detachment result and no reach display occurs (in the case of complete detachment), the variable display time is shortened as the number of stored hold information increases. In addition, in the case of a special hit result, a reach display is not generated as in the case of complete losing. In this case, the variable display time is shortened as the number of stored hold information increases. ing.

  In FIG. 31 (b3), the variable display time is shown in the case of a special hit or complete loss in the third normal gaming state. For example, when the number of stored hold information is “0” to “2”, “4 sec” is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored hold information is “3” to “2”. In the case of “4”, “0.5 sec” is set as the variable display time. In the third normal gaming state, the symbol fixed display time on the right working port display section DR and the symbol fixed display time on the symbol display device 75 are unified to be “1 sec”.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1605 of FIG. 30, that is, in the case of the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1607, and the fourth normal gaming state setting process is performed. After the execution, this variation display time setting process is terminated.

  In the fourth normal game state setting process, the table corresponding to the current game time is selected from the various variable display time tables for the fourth normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. To set the variable display time.

  Regarding the variable display time in the fourth normal gaming state, when the jackpot result is compared with the special hit result and the off result, the former is likely to be longer than the latter. In particular, in the case of a detachment result and no reach display occurs (in the case of complete detachment), the variable display time is shortened as the number of stored hold information increases. In addition, in the case of a special hit result, a reach display is not generated as in the case of complete losing. In this case, the variable display time is shortened as the number of stored hold information increases. ing.

  FIG. 31 (b4) shows the variable display time when the game is completely out in the first normal gaming state. For example, when the number of stored hold information is “0”, “13 sec” is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored hold information is “1”. “8 sec” is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored hold information is “2”, “4 sec” is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored hold information is “3”. "Or" 4 "," 2.5 sec "is set as the variable display time. In the second normal gaming state, the symbol fixed display time on the right working port display section DR and the symbol fixed display time on the symbol display device 75 are unified to be “1 sec”.

  In the present embodiment, diversification of games is realized by switching from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state. In particular, when shifting to the third normal game state through the second normal game state, the hurdle depends on the number of games in which the high-frequency support mode is continued (hereinafter referred to as “short-time number”). Yes. Hereinafter, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 32, the relationship between the type of jackpot result and the number of time reductions will be described.

(Time reduction times)
If an 8R normal jackpot result is achieved based on a winning at the lower operating port 62a, the number of times shortened is “50” times regardless of whether or not the above-mentioned advantageous pitching portion 314 has entered and the gaming state at the time of winning. Is set. As described above, in the special game state (opening / closing execution mode) corresponding to the 8R normal jackpot result, the game ball that has flowed into the top prize winning port 311 is advantageously opened, although the advantageous ball portion 314 is temporarily opened. Prior to reaching the ball portion 314, the advantageous incoming ball portion 314 is closed, so that the entrance into the advantageous incoming ball portion 314 is substantially avoided.

  If the 6R probability variation jackpot result A is based on the winning at the lower operating port 62a, the number of time reductions is “100” regardless of whether or not the player has entered the advantageous pitching portion 314 and the gaming state at the time of winning. Times are set. If the 6R probability variable big hit result B is reached, “70” times is set as the number of time reductions regardless of whether or not the player has entered the advantageous ball portion 314 and the gaming state at the time of winning. When the 6R probability variation jackpot result C is reached, “50” times are set as the number of time reductions regardless of whether or not the player has entered the advantageous ball portion 314 and the gaming state at the time of winning. When the 6R probability variation jackpot result D is reached, “30” times are set as the number of time reductions regardless of whether or not the player has entered the advantageous entering ball portion 314 and the gaming state at the time of winning. When the 6R probability variable big hit result E is reached, “10” times are set as the number of time reductions regardless of the presence or absence of the entry into the advantageous entry portion 314 and the game state at the time of winning.

  As described above, in the special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result A to 6R probability variation jackpot result E, when the game ball is continuously fired toward the right route, Is configured so that the ball enters the favorable ball portion 314 in most of them, and the transition to the high-probability mode is avoided in spite of the result of the probable big hit. .

  If the 16R probability variation jackpot result A or the 16R probability variation jackpot result B is based on the winning at the lower operating port 62a, regardless of whether or not the above-mentioned advantageous pitching portion 314 has entered and the gaming state at the time of winning, “0” times is set as the number of time reductions. In other words, in these jackpot results, after the special game state (opening / closing execution mode) ends, the normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is not shifted. Specifically, when a ball enters the advantageous ball portion 314, the player enters the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and the ball enters the advantageous ball portion 314. If not, the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode is entered.

  When a 2R normal jackpot result is obtained based on a winning at the right operating port 63a, the number of time reductions is “50” times regardless of whether or not the player has entered the advantageous pitching portion 314 and the gaming state at the time of winning. Is set. As described above, in the special game state (opening / closing execution mode) corresponding to the 2R normal jackpot result, the game ball that has flowed into the top prize winning port 311 with the advantageous ball portion 314 being temporarily opened is advantageously inserted. Prior to reaching the ball portion 314, the advantageous incoming ball portion 314 is closed, so that the incoming ball to the advantageous incoming ball portion 314 is substantially avoided.

  If the result is a 2R probability variation jackpot based on winning at the right operating port 63a, “50” times will be set as the number of time reductions regardless of whether or not the player has entered the advantageous ball portion 314 and the gaming state at the time of winning. Is set.

  In the case where the entrance to the advantageous entry portion 314 has not occurred in spite of the 6R probability variation jackpot result A based on the winning at the right operating port 63a, “100” times are set as the number of time reductions. The When the 6R probability variable big hit result A is obtained and the entrance into the advantageous ball entering portion 314 is generated, the number of time reductions set according to the gaming state at the time of the 6R probability variable big hit result A is different. When the 6R probability variation jackpot result A is obtained during the first normal gaming state, “1000” times are set as the number of time reductions, and the 6R probability variation jackpot result A is obtained during the second normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state. In this case, “100” times are set as the number of time reductions.

  When the 6R probability variation jackpot result B is based on the winning at the right operating port 63a, the number of times is set in accordance with the presence / absence of entering the advantageous entering portion 314 and the game state at the time of winning. Specifically, in the first normal gaming state, in the case where the entry to the advantageous entry portion 314 has not occurred despite the 6R probability variation jackpot result B, “100” times is set as the number of time reductions. In the second normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state, when the 6R probability variation big hit result B has been reached but no ball has entered the advantageous ball portion 314, 70 "times are set. On the other hand, in the first normal gaming state, when the 6R probability variation big hit result B is obtained and a ball enters the advantageous ball entering portion 314, “1000” times are set as the number of time reductions, and the second normal gaming state When the 6R probability variation big hit result B is obtained in the fourth normal gaming state and the entrance to the advantageous entry portion 314 occurs, “70 times” is set as the number of time reductions.

  When the 6R probability variation jackpot result C is based on the winning at the right operating port 63a, the number of times is set in accordance with the presence / absence of entering the advantageous entering portion 314 and the gaming state at the time of winning. Specifically, in the first normal gaming state, in the case where the entry into the advantageous entry portion 314 has not occurred despite the 6R probability variation jackpot result C, “100” times is set as the number of time reductions. In the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state, when the 6R probability variation big hit result C is not entered but the ball has entered the advantageous ball portion 314, 50 "times are set. On the other hand, in the first normal gaming state, when the 6R probability variation jackpot result C is obtained and the entrance to the advantageous entering ball portion 314 occurs, “1000” times are set as the number of time reductions, and the second normal gaming state When the 6R probability variation big hit result C is obtained in the fourth normal gaming state and the entrance into the advantageous entry portion 314 occurs, “50 times” is set as the number of time reductions.

  When the 6R probability variation jackpot result D is based on the winning at the right operating port 63a, the number of times is set according to the presence / absence of entering the advantageous entering portion 314 and the gaming state at the time of winning. Specifically, in the first normal gaming state, even if the 6R probability variation jackpot result D has been reached but no ball has entered the advantageous ball portion 314, the number of time reductions is “100” times. In the second normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state, when the 6R probability variation big hit result D is not entered but the ball has not entered the advantageous pitching portion 314, the number of time reductions is “ 30 "times are set. On the other hand, in the first normal gaming state, when the 6R probability variation jackpot result D is obtained and the entrance to the advantageous ball entering portion 314 occurs, “1000” times are set as the number of time reductions, and the second normal gaming state When the 6R probability variation big hit result D is obtained in the fourth normal gaming state and the entrance into the advantageous entry portion 314 occurs, “30 times” is set as the number of time reductions.

  When the 6R probability variation jackpot result E is based on the winning at the right operation port 63a, the number of times is set according to the presence / absence of entering the advantageous entering portion 314 and the gaming state at the time of winning. Specifically, in the first normal gaming state, in the event that the 6R probability variation jackpot result E has not been entered into the advantageous entry part 314, “100” times is set as the number of time reductions. In the second normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state, when the 6R probability variation big hit result E is not entered but the entrance to the advantageous entrance part 314 does not occur, 10 "times are set. On the other hand, in the first normal gaming state, when the 6R probability variation jackpot result E is obtained and a ball enters the advantageous ball portion 314, “1000” times are set as the number of time reductions, and the second normal gaming state When the 6R probability variation big hit result E is obtained in the fourth normal gaming state and the entrance to the advantageous entry portion 314 occurs, “10 times” is set as the number of time reductions.

  If the 16R probability variation jackpot result A is based on the winning at the right operating port 63a, the number of times is set according to the presence / absence of the entry to the advantageous entry portion 314 and the gaming state at the time of winning. Specifically, in the first normal gaming state, in the case where the entry to the advantageous entry portion 314 has not occurred despite the 16R probability variation jackpot result A, “100” times is set as the number of time reductions. It is set and shifts to the high frequency support mode (shifts to the fourth normal gaming state). In the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state, when the 6R probability variation big hit result A is not entered but the ball has not entered the advantageous ball portion 314, the number of time reduction is “0” times. Is set and the high-frequency support mode is not shifted (the first normal gaming state is shifted). On the other hand, in the first normal gaming state, when the result is 16R probability variation jackpot result A and the entry to the advantageous entry portion 314 occurs, “1000” times are set as the number of time reductions, and the high frequency support mode is entered. Transition (transition to the second normal gaming state). In the 2nd normal gaming state to the 4th normal gaming state, when the result is 16R probability variation big hit result A and the entrance to the advantageous entry portion 314 occurs, “0” times are set as the number of time reductions, and the high frequency support mode No transition is made (transition to the second normal gaming state).

  If the result is a 16R probability variation jackpot result B based on a winning at the right operating port 63a, “0” is set as the number of time reductions regardless of whether or not the advantageous entering portion 314 has entered and the gaming state at the time of winning. Times are set. Specifically, if no entry to the advantageous entry part 314 occurs, the game enters the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and the entry into the advantageous entry part 314 When the occurrence occurs, the process shifts to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the special game state (opening / closing execution mode) to be shifted when the jackpot result is obtained is the first winning mode and the second winning mode in which the variable winning device to be opened and the opening / closing mode are different. Broadly divided. When the jackpot result is reached, the game shifts to a special game state corresponding to the first winning mode. In the special game state corresponding to the first winning mode (hereinafter referred to as the first special game state), the upper variable winning device 64 is set as an opening object, and a predetermined opening time (specifically 30 sec) has elapsed or a predetermined number (specifically, details). Nine) occurrences of the ball are repeated as one round, and the release is repeated up to a plurality of rounds. On the other hand, when a special winning result is obtained, the game shifts to a special game letter corresponding to the second winning mode. In the special game state corresponding to the second winning mode (hereinafter referred to as the second special game state), the lower variable winning device 65 is set as an opening object, and a predetermined opening time (specifically 0.8 sec) has elapsed or a predetermined number The second special game state ends when any of the nine (specifically nine) entry occurrences is established. Thus, the first special gaming state is set so that the winning frequency is relatively high, and the second special gaming state is set so that the winning frequency is relatively low. A difference is provided.

(Game flow)
Next, a basic game flow will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing the flow of the game.

  In the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, a big win lottery is executed by winning a prize to the lower operation port 62a arranged in the gaming area PE (left route). The first normal gaming state is set so that the player's advantage is lower than that of other normal gaming states.

  When various jackpot results are obtained in the first normal gaming state, the state shifts to the first special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode). In the first special game state, the advantageous pitching portion 314 is released according to the type of the jackpot result. When the entrance into the advantageous entrance portion 314 occurs during the first special game state, the lottery mode after the end of the first special game state becomes the high probability mode. In the case where no entry into the advantageous entry portion 314 occurs during the first special game state, the lottery mode after the end of the first special game state becomes the low probability mode.

  Specifically, when the first special gaming state this time is triggered by the 8R normal jackpot result or the 2R normal jackpot result, the entry into the advantageous entrance portion 314 is substantially avoided. Therefore, the gaming state after the end of the first special gaming state is the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The fourth normal gaming state is maintained until the number of game times executed in the fourth normal game state reaches a specified number (50 times in the present embodiment), and the executed game number reaches the specified number. A transition is made to the first normal gaming state set so that the player's advantage is lower than that of the fourth normal gaming state. Regarding the fourth normal game state, although the upper limit is set in the number of games, the game can be advanced while suppressing the decrease of the holding ball by the support of the electric accessory 71. Further, since it is possible to expect to enter the right operating port 63a which is favored so that the distribution of the jackpot result is advantageous to the player, the second normal game state and the third normal game state which are more advantageous than the fourth normal game state are expected. An opportunity to enter the gaming state.

  As already described, when winning to the right operation port 63a occurs, a special winning result is obtained in most of the lotteries based on the winnings. That is, in the fourth normal gaming state, a special winning result is obtained in almost all game times, and the game state shifts to the second special game state in each game time. When the state shifts to the second special game state, the lower variable winning device 65 is opened, but most of the game balls launched to the right route win the right operation port 63a and enter from the game area PE. As a result, the winning to the lower variable winning device 65 is suppressed. Hereinafter, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 34, the movement of the game ball in the fourth normal gaming state will be described.

  In the fourth normal gaming state, the opening time of the electric accessory 71 is increased from 0.08 sec to 5.7 sec, thereby increasing the number of winnings to the right operation port 63a. Then, by reducing the fluctuation display time of the through gate display section DS from 0.7 sec to 0.2 sec, the time (first interval time) during which the electric accessory 71 is maintained in the closed state is shortened, and the right operation is performed. The number of game balls passing through the mouth 63a is reduced. As a result, most of the game balls launched to the right route enter the right operation port 63a.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34 (a) → FIG. 34 (b) → FIG. 34 (c), the shutter 331 of the electric accessory 71 is closed when the game ball passes through the through gate 66. To the open position, the upstream passage portion 322 is cut off. As a result, the game ball passing through the upstream passage portion 322 flows into the right operation port 63a. Here, since the time required for the game ball to pass on the shutter 331 (the first specific area SE1) is set to be slightly longer than the first interval time, the direction toward the right route is set. When the game balls are continuously fired, most of the game balls flow into the right operation port 63a, and the movement toward the lower variable winning device 65 is avoided.

  The number of prize balls to be paid out by winning in the lower variable prize winning device 65 (the lower university winning opening 341) is “10”, and the prize is paid out by winning in the right working ball entering portion 63 (right operating slot 63a). The number of spheres is more than “1”. However, as described above, most of the game balls fired to the right route win the right operation port 63a, and the prize ball by winning the lower large prize port 341 becomes rare. Therefore, in the fourth normal gaming state, the game can be progressed while suppressing the decrease of the ball, but it is substantially difficult to increase the ball.

  In the present embodiment, the launch interval time when the game ball is continuously fired to the right route in the fourth normal gaming state is “0.6 sec”, and the closing time of the electric accessory 71 is approximately “ 0.7 sec ”, the opening time of the electric accessory 71 is“ 5.7 sec ”, the required time for the game times is“ 2 sec ”, and the required time for the second special gaming state is“ 0.8 sec ”. For the above reasons, when the game ball is continuously fired to the right route in the fourth normal gaming state, the winning exceeding the holding upper limit of the right operating port 63a, that is, the over winning winning in which the holding information is not newly acquired. Will occur frequently. Even in this case, since the winning ball based on winning in the right working port 63a is secured, the decrease speed of the holding ball is obviously slowed down.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 33, if the current first special gaming state is triggered by the 6R probability variation jackpot result A to 6R probability variation jackpot result E or the 2R probability variation jackpot result, the game ball is continuously fired toward the right route. As long as this is done, the entry into the advantageous entry portion 314 occurs. For this reason, in most cases, the gaming state after the end of the first special gaming state is the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode.

  In the second normal game state, the second normal game state is maintained and executed until the number of game times executed in the second normal game state reaches a specified number (10 to 100 in this embodiment). When the number of game times reached the specified number, the game state shifts to a third normal game state that is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state.

  During the second normal game state, a game time counter is displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 as information corresponding to the number of remaining games until the above specified number is reached. The displayed game times counter is displayed as a countdown every time the game times progresses, and a display effect corresponding to the transition to the third normal gaming state when the specified number is reached and the remaining number becomes “0” Will be executed. This clearly indicates the transition to the third normal gaming state.

  Similarly to the fourth normal game state, the second normal game state corresponds to the high-frequency support mode, and the game can be advanced while suppressing the decrease of the holding ball by the support of the electric accessory 71. At this time, although the lower variable prize-winning device 65 is opened by winning at the right operating port 63a, most of the game balls launched to the right route win the right operating port 63a and go downstream of the right operating port 63a. The arrival at the arranged lower variable prize-winning device 65 is suppressed. For this reason, it is substantially difficult to increase the number of balls in the second normal gaming state as in the fourth normal gaming state. Refer to FIG. 34 for the flow of the game ball in the second normal game state.

  In the second normal gaming state, when the number of holding information (holding number) is “3” to “4”, the variable display time is “1 sec”, and the variable display time in the fourth normal gaming state ( Shorter than “2.5 sec”). By shortening the variable display time in this way, the second normal game state is differentiated so that the progress speed of the game is faster than the fourth normal game state.

  When the number of game times digested without a jackpot result in the second normal gaming state reaches a specified number, the support mode is switched from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, unlike the high frequency support mode, the upper limit of game times is not set in the high probability mode. For this reason, when the prescribed number is reached, the state shifts to the third normal gaming state compatible with the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

  As already described, when winning to the right operation port 63a occurs, a special winning result is obtained in most of the lotteries based on the winnings. That is, in the third normal gaming state, a special winning result is obtained in almost all game times, and the game state shifts to the second special game state in each game time. This is the same as the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state.

  However, when the state shifts to the second special gaming state, the lower variable prize-winning device 65 is opened, but a part of the game balls launched to the right route passes through the right operation port 63a and goes down. The game proceeds to the side variable winning device 65, and the number of possessed balls starts to increase due to winning in the lower variable winning device 65. Hereinafter, the movement of the game ball in the third normal game state will be described with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS.

  The third normal gaming state corresponds to the low-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 71 is shortened from “5.7 sec” to “0.08 sec”, and the variable display of the through gate display section DS is displayed. The time is extended from “0.2 sec” to “0.7 sec”. That is, the period in which the electric accessory 71 is in the closed state is lengthened, and the period in which the electric accessory 71 is in the open state is shortened. Here, as described above, the shutter 331 is maintained in the closed state by the sum “1.2 sec” of the pattern change display time “0.7 sec” and the final display time “0.5 sec” in the through-gate display section DS. That is, a substantial interval time (hereinafter referred to as a second interval time). The second interval time is set to be longer than the time required for the game ball to pass above the shutter 331 (first specific area SE1). For this reason, a part of the game balls launched to the right route passes through the right operation port 63a and goes to the lower variable winning device 65. That is, the number of winnings to the right operation port 63a decreases, and the number of game balls passing through the right operation port 63a increases. As a result, the number of winnings at the Shimodai winning opening 341 increases.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35 (a) → FIG. 35 (b) → FIG. 35 (c), the shutter 331 of the electric accessory 71 is closed when the game ball passes through the through gate 66. To the open position, the upstream passage portion 322 is cut off. As a result, the game ball passing through the upstream passage portion 322 flows into the right operation port 63a. When a winning to the right operation port 63a occurs, most of the lottery results become a special winning result, and the lower variable winning device 65 is opened.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (d) → FIG. 36 (e), when the game ball passing through the right operation port 63a wins the lower variable winning device 65, “10” prize balls are paid out. The number of winning balls that are paid out by winning at the lower variable winning device 65 (lower university winning port 341) is “1” as the number of winning balls paid out by winning at the right operating ball entering portion 63 (right operating port 63a). "It's more than pieces. Thereby, a holding ball will increase.

  Here, the time required for the passage of the first specific area SE1 is longer than the game ball firing period “0.6 sec”, and the electric accessory 71 is changed from the open state to the closed state to the open state. The interval time is “1.2 sec”. The time “0.08 sec” for which the electric accessory 71 is maintained in the open state is longer than the time required for the game ball placed on the shutter 331 to pass through the right operation port 63a. For this reason, when game balls are continuously being fired to the right route, a winning of 1 is generated at the right operating port 63a every time the electric accessory 71 is opened, and the ball reaches the ball entering unit 70. Approximately half of the game balls will win the right operation port 63a.

  Further, in the third normal gaming state, when the number of stored hold information (holding number) is “3” to “4”, the variation display time of the picture on the right working port display portion DR is 0.5 sec. Yes, the final display time is 1 sec, and the ending time at the end of the second special gaming state is 0.2 sec. That is, when the transition to the second special gaming state is continued, the interval time required for the lower variable prize-winning device 65 to change from the accepting state to the non-accepting state to the accepting state is “1.7 sec”. The time required for the game ball that has reached the lower variable winning device 65 to pass through the second specific area SE2 is longer than the interval time. For this reason, most of the game balls that have reached the lower variable winning device 65 out of the game balls that have passed through the right operation port 63a will win the lower large winning port 341 (FIG. 36 (e), FIG. 36 (f)). In general, although some decimation may occur, approximately one out of every two game balls that have been fired to the right route and have reached the entrance unit 70 will enter the right operating hole 63a, and about one out of every two will enter the lower grand prize opening. A configuration for winning 341 is realized.

  In the third normal gaming state, the number of winnings and the winning rate at the right operating port 63a does not reach the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state, but the ball entering the right operating port 63a is constantly The game progresses so that the number (holding number) of the holding information relating to the right operation port 63a changes from “3” to “4”. However, strictly speaking, in the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state, the number of winnings is increased so as to greatly exceed the upper limit of the holding number, whereas in the third normal gaming state, the number of holdings is The winnings are only slightly higher than the upper limit. However, in view of the fact that the holding information is not newly acquired when a winning exceeding the upper limit occurs, the actual change in the number of holdings is not affected by the difference in the number of winnings or the winning rate. In other words, in the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state, a winning is likely to occur by exceeding the upper limit of the number of holdings, and there is a winning in which no holding information is acquired compared to the third normal gaming state. Differentiated to increase.

  Here, the condition for shifting from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state is to digest the upper limit (specified number of times or short times) of gaming times set when shifting to the second normal gaming state. However, the upper limit differs depending on the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition to the second normal gaming state. For example, “50” times is set as the upper limit in the 2R probability variation jackpot result, “100” times is set as the upper limit in the 6R probability variation jackpot result A, “70” times is set as the upper limit in the 6R probability variation jackpot result B, and 6R. In the probability variation jackpot result C, “50” is set as the upper limit, in the 6R probability variation jackpot result D, “30” is set as the upper limit, and in the 6R probability variation jackpot result E, “10” is set as the upper limit. That is, 6R probability variation jackpot result A <6R probability variation jackpot result B <6R probability variation jackpot result C, 2R probability variation jackpot result <6R probability variation jackpot result D <6R probability variation jackpot result E in this order increases the probability of transition to the third normal gaming state. It is configured as follows. Thus, diversification of games is realized by providing a difference in the transition hurdle to the third normal gaming state.

  When a big hit result is obtained in the third normal gaming state, the state shifts to the first special gaming state. If the current first special gaming state is triggered by the 16R probability variation jackpot result A or the 16R probability variation jackpot result B, after the first special gaming state ends, it immediately returns to the third normal gaming state and has An opportunity to increase the ball. On the other hand, if the current third normal gaming state is triggered by either the 2R probability variation jackpot result or the 6R probability variation jackpot result A to the 6R probability variation jackpot result E, after the first special gaming state ends. The game is played with the aim of shifting to the second normal gaming state and then shifting again to the third normal gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, there is still a chance to return to the third normal gaming state in any of the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state, but the second normal gaming state has passed. When a return to the third normal gaming state is taken into account, a difference is provided so that the return is easier in the second normal gaming state than in the fourth normal gaming state.

  As described above in detail, the pachinko machine 10 shown in the present embodiment is configured to generate two states with different ways of increasing the holding ball, and it is advantageous for the player by combining these two modes of increase. The game progress is suppressed from becoming monotonous in the game state. Here, with reference to FIG. 37, the relationship between the flow of the game and the holding ball in the pachinko machine 10 will be supplementarily described.

  When the game ball is being fired to the left route in the first normal game state, the number of possessed balls decreases as the game progresses. In this way, when the investment continues, the jackpot result is obtained, and when the game shifts to the first special gaming state, the number of held balls greatly increases due to frequent winning of the upper variable winning device 64. Specifically, the first special game state is configured such that substantially nine balls can be generated during the round game. Since 14 game balls are paid out by one winning, 126 game balls can be obtained in one round. Since this round game is repeated a plurality of times after an interval time of 2 sec, it becomes an opportunity to acquire a large amount of game balls at a time.

  In the first round in the first special game state, the advantageous ball portion 314 is released. When a ball enters the advantageous ball portion 314 in this round, the game proceeds to the second normal game state after the first special game state. In the second normal gaming state, the support mode of the electric accessory 71 becomes the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, most of the game balls fired to the right route win the right operation port 63a, but the number of prize balls paid out by winning to the right operation port 63a is one. In view of the fact that a part of the game balls launched to the right route are discharged from the game area PE without winning any of the winning ball-corresponding entrance parts, the ball is held even in the second normal game state. Will gradually decrease. However, since the winning ball can be obtained by winning the right operation port 63a, the rate of decrease of the holding ball compared with the first normal gaming state becomes slow.

  As already described, when the game times that have been digested without reaching the jackpot result after the transition to the second normal gaming state reaches the above upper limit, the state shifts to the third normal gaming state. In the third normal gaming state, although the high probability mode is maintained, the support mode is switched to the low frequency support mode, and the number of game balls passing through the right operation port 63a increases. And most of the game balls that have passed through the right operation port 63a will win the lower grand prize winning port 341. As described above, about half of the game balls that have reached the winning unit 70 are directed to the lower variable winning device 65 and become the second special gaming state, and the lower variable winning device 65 enters the receiving state. Approximately one prize will be generated at a time. Since the number of prize balls to be paid out by winning the lower variable prize winning device 65 is 10, the number of possessed balls increases by 10 each time the state shifts to the second special game state. In other words, approximately 10 balls are added for each game. In view of such circumstances, when shifting to the third normal gaming state, it is possible that the transition to the third special gaming state will be repeated as a special winning result until the next jackpot result is reached. It will be a chance to increase the number of balls.

(Time reduction)
As described in detail above, when the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode is shifted to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the right operation ball entering portion 63 is passed. The number of game balls to be played increases, and these game balls enter the lower variable winning device 65, and a lot of prize balls are paid out. As a result, the player's holding ball starts to increase. The third normal gaming state is continued until a jackpot result (normal jackpot result or probability variation jackpot result) is reached during the third normal gaming state.

  A special hit result is repeatedly obtained until the third normal gaming state is ended as a big hit result, and each time a transition to the second special gaming state is made, there is an opportunity to greatly increase the number of possessed balls. For this reason, it is assumed that in the third normal game state, attention to the game is further increased and the player's willingness to play is increased as compared with the second normal game state in which an increase in the number of possessed balls is not expected. In the present embodiment, by changing the game progress rhythm in accordance with such a change in the game state, a device has been devised to further enhance the player's sense of exaltation in accordance with the increase in the advantage. One of them. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 31 again, a supplementary description will be given of the configuration relating to the rhythm change of the game progress. As described above, FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time and the fixed display time set in the game times corresponding to the missed result (specifically, the completely missed result not corresponding to reach display) or the special hit result.

  The variation display time of the pattern in the lower working port display DL provided in the main display unit 81 is the same in the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state (FIGS. 31A2 and 31A3). )reference). On the other hand, a difference is provided with respect to the change display time of the pattern in the right working port display unit DR so that the third normal gaming state is shorter than the second normal gaming state.

  Specifically, in the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state, most of the lottery results based on the ball entering the right operation port 63a are the special winning result or the losing result. As shown in FIG. 31 (b2), in the second normal gaming state, when the number of holds on the right operation port 63a is “0”, the variable display time corresponding to the special hit result or the missed result is “13 sec”. When the number of holds is “1”, the variable display time corresponding to the special hit result or the missed result is “8 sec”, and when the number of holds is “2”, the variable display time corresponding to the special hit result or the missed result Becomes “4 sec”, and when the number of holds is “3” to “4”, the variable display time corresponding to the special hit result or the missed result becomes “1 sec”. On the other hand, in the third normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 31 (b3), when the number of holdings related to the right operation port 63a is “0” to “2”, a special hit result or a missed result is obtained. The corresponding variable display time is “4 sec”, and when the number of holds is “3” to “4”, the variable display time corresponding to the special hit result or the missed result is “0.5 sec”.

  As described above, in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the game ball launched to the right route enters the right operation port 63a and avoids entering the lower operation port 62a. Then, under the situation where the game balls are continuously being fired to the right route, the number of holdings related to the right operation port 63a is near the upper limit (“3” to “3”) in both the second normal game state and the third normal game state. “4”) makes a transition and the ball is constantly generated. For this reason, when the game ball is continuously fired to the right route, in the second normal gaming state, the variation display time in most game times (the gaming machine related to the right operation port 63a) is “1 sec”. In the third normal gaming state, the fluctuation display time in most gaming times (game times related to the right operation port 63a) is “0.5 sec”.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 38, the flow of the game in each game state will be described. FIG. 38A is a timing chart showing the flow of the game in the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and FIG. 38B is a third normal game corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the game in a state. In FIG. 38 (a), as the game progresses, the number of holds for the right operating port 63a changes from "3" to "4" and a special winning result is obtained at each game time related to the right operating port 63a. The case where the second normal gaming state and the second special gaming state are looped is illustrated. In FIG. 38 (b), as the game progresses, the number of holds for the right operating port 63a changes from "3" to "4", and a special hit result is obtained at each game time related to the right operating port 63a. The case where the third normal gaming state and the second special gaming state are looped is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (a), in the second normal gaming state, after the change display (1 sec) of the right working port display section DR is executed, the final display (1 sec) of the pattern corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. At the time of completion (completion), the state shifts to the second special game state. Thereby, the lower variable winning device 65 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Although the lower variable winning device 65 is maintained in the open state for “0.8 sec”, most of the game balls flowing down the right route flow into the right operation port 63a and go to the lower variable winning device 65. Will be substantially avoided. At the timing when the lower variable winning device 65 returns to the closed state and the ending time (0.2 sec) in the second special gaming state has elapsed, the change display of the right working port display portion DR is started again. Thereafter, the game progresses in such a manner that the above-described series of steps are repeated until the result is a short-time digest or a jackpot result.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (b), in the third normal gaming state, after the change display (0.5 sec) of the right working port display section DR is executed, the final display of the pattern corresponding to the lottery result (1 sec) ) Is finished (completed), the state shifts to the second special game state, and the lower variable winning device 65 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Then, as in the case of passing through the second normal gaming state, the lower variable winning device 65 is maintained in the open state for “0.8 sec”. Most of the game balls that flow down the right route flow into the right operation port 63a, but a part of the game balls pass through the right operation ball entry portion 63 and go to the lower variable winning device 65. Each time those game balls are awarded to the lower variable winning device 65, a lot of prize balls are paid out. At the timing when the lower variable prize-winning device 65 returns to the closed state and the ending time (0.2 sec) has elapsed, the change display of the right working port display portion DR is started again. Until the transition to the special game state, the game proceeds in such a manner that the above-described series of flow is repeated.

  In the third normal gaming state, after the change display of the picture is started on the display part DR for the right working port, the change of the picture in the display part DR for the right working port is again performed after the confirmation display → the second special gaming state. The interval time (2.5 sec) until the display is started is the fixed display → second special gaming state after the display of the variation of the picture is started in the right working port display section DR in the second normal gaming state. The interval time (3 sec) until the change display of the pattern on the right working port display section DR is started again is shorter. That is, in the third normal game state, the game progress speed slightly increases as compared to the second normal game state.

  In the third normal gaming state, a ball enters the lower variable winning device 65, and thus attention to the second special gaming state is increased. Therefore, the second special game state is more conspicuous than the second normal game state in which a ball entering the lower variable winning device 65 is substantially avoided. When going back and forth between the normal gaming state and the second special gaming state, there is a high possibility that the player will have the impression that the game progress is slowed by the conspicuous second special gaming state. There is concern that this will hinder the player's feeling of uplifting. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, in the third normal gaming state, it is possible to make it difficult to give such an impression by increasing the progress speed of the game compared to the second normal gaming state. The transition to the normal gaming state can favorably exert the effect of enhancing the player's feeling of uplifting.

  In addition, when the lower variable winning device 65 is continuously switched to the open state in the third normal gaming state, the interval time (1.7 sec) for which the lower variable winning device 65 is maintained in the closed state is the second When the lower variable winning device 65 is continuously switched to the open state in the normal gaming state, the lower variable winning device 65 is shorter than the interval time (2.2 sec) for which the lower variable winning device 65 is maintained in the closed state. The possibility that the game ball that has reached the winning device 65 passes through the lower variable winning device 65 is reduced. Thus, by shortening the interval time for waiting for release, it is possible to strengthen the impression that the game is accelerating while suppressing a significant change in time.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the right operating port can be switched to the low-frequency support mode / high-frequency support mode by switching the support mode for the electric accessory 71 attached to the right-side operation ball entry portion 63. It is possible to make a difference in the frequency of entering the ball 63a. In consideration of such circumstances, it is considered that the high-frequency support mode in which the pitching frequency is high is preferably configured to shorten the fluctuation display time in order to achieve smooth game progression. However, as described above, when the high-frequency support mode is compared with the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is preferentially advantageous in that many award balls can be obtained based on the entrance to the right operation port 63a. Although there is a limit on the number of hold information acquired based on the entry, a storage upper limit is set in the hold information, and both the first normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state always exceed the storage upper limit. There is no difference in the point that such a ball occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above-described speeding-up of the game progress is realized by deliberately reducing the variable display time in the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode.

  In the third normal gaming state, differentiation from the second normal gaming state is achieved in that an increase in the player's ball can be expected by repeating the transition to the second special gaming state. In the third normal game state, it is possible to emphasize the lightness of the game by looping the third normal game state / the second special game state with a good rhythm. Here, in the present embodiment, the game times related to the lower operation port 62a and the game times related to the right operation port 63a can proceed simultaneously (performed in parallel), and FIG. As shown, there is no special winning result in the game times related to the lower operating port 62a. In other words, if the game times related to the lower operation port 62a are executed in spite of the transition to the third normal gaming state, the above-described lightness in the third normal gaming state cannot be transmitted well to the player, or it is useless. There is a possibility of giving the impression that the game has progressed as if it had been lost. One of the features of the present embodiment is that the device is devised in consideration of such circumstances. The outline of the device will be described below with reference to FIG.

  As already described, during the first special game state, neither the game times related to the lower operation port 62a nor the game times related to the right operation port 63a is advanced. For this reason, when it becomes a probabilistic big hit result in the hold information related to the lower operation port 62a during the first normal game state and a transition to the second normal game state is made, the lower operation port 62a acquired during the first normal game state. May be carried over to the second normal gaming state.

  In the second normal gaming state, the number of time reductions is basically set to be “10 times” to “100 times”. Each short time is subtracted by executing the game times related to the lower operating port 62a or the game times related to the right operating port 63a, and the second normal gaming state is continued until the short time number becomes "0". In this case, the first special gaming state is shifted to the third normal gaming state without going through. In the present embodiment, the short time set in the second normal game state is the third normal game even if the hold information relating to the lower operation port 62a remains when the second normal game state is entered. It is defined that all the hold information can be digested before transition to the state (during the second normal gaming state). In this way, by avoiding carryover of the hold information to the third normal game state, the game proceeds based on the hold information related to the right operation port 63a after the transition to the third normal game state. . Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41, a specific configuration for realizing such a function will be supplementarily described. FIG. 40 illustrates a case where the number of holdings related to the right operation port 63a is “0” at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state, and FIG. 41 illustrates the right operation port 63a at the time of transition to the second normal game state. The case where the number of such reservations has reached the upper limit (“4”) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 40, when the number of holdings related to the lower operating port 62a has reached the storage upper limit (“4”) at the timing of shifting to the second normal gaming state through the first special gaming state, (2) In the normal game state, the game times related to the lower operation port 62a are executed for the upper limit of memory (4 times). In the second normal gaming state, regardless of the number of suspensions related to the lower operation opening 62a, the pattern change display time on the lower operation opening display portion DL is "0.5 sec" and the final display time is "0.5 sec". ing. Therefore, the time required for executing the above-mentioned upper limit game times is (variable display time: 0.5 sec + determined display time: 0.5 sec) × memory upper limit: 4 = 4 sec.

  Since the route advantageous to the player is changed from the left route to the right route in accordance with the transition to the first special gaming state, the holding information related to the right operation port 63a is acquired by launching the game ball to the right route. Will be. However, during the first special game state, the upper variable prize-winning device 64 disposed on the upstream side of the right operation port 63a is switched to the open state, and the flow of game balls toward the right operation entry portion 63 is hindered. For this reason, even during the first special game state, the right operation entrance portion 63 is switched to the open state, but most of the game balls do not reach the right operation entrance portion 63 and enter the right operation port 63a. Is suppressed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 40, when the first special gaming state ends and the state shifts to the second normal gaming state, a ball enters the right working port 63a, and accordingly, a picture is displayed on the right working port display section DR. Fluctuation display has been started. At this transition timing, since the number of reservations related to the right working port 63a is “0”, the variation display time in the right working port display section DR is “13 sec”. Most of the game times related to the right operating port 63a have a special winning result, but there is at least “13 sec” before the confirmation display corresponding to the special winning result is executed in the right operating port 63a. . About this time, it is longer than the time required for digesting all the holding | maintenance information which concerns on the lower operating port 62a mentioned above. Therefore, all of the hold information related to the lower operating port 62a is digested until the display of the variation of the pattern in the right operating port display section DR is completed, that is, before the time-shortage digestion that becomes a trigger for the transition to the third normal gaming state. The Rukoto. Then, the minimum number of short time times set is larger than the upper limit number (specifically, the upper limit number + 1) of the hold information related to the lower operation port 62a. Therefore, it does not shift to the third normal gaming state with the holding information relating to the lower operation port 62a remaining.

  Here, as described above, most of the game balls fired to the game ball to the right route during the first special game state enter the upper variable prize-winning device 64, but some of the game balls are the upper variable prize-winning device. 64 passes through and enters the right working port 63a. Most of the first special gaming state that is passed when the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state is a jackpot result with a relatively small number of rounds (for example, a 6R probability variation jackpot result), and the right-hand actuated landing part 63 Although the number of flowing game balls is suppressed, it is impossible to deny the possibility that the number of holdings related to the right operation port 63a will reach the upper limit of memory during the first special game state due to an accidental bias or the like. And in the display part DR for right working ports, it sets so that the variation display time of a pattern may become short, so that there are many reservation numbers concerning the right working port 63a. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31, when the number of holds is “4”, the variable display time is shortened to “1 sec”. For this reason, unlike the example shown in FIG. 40, it is impossible to digest all the hold information related to the lower operating port 62a in one game cycle related to the right operating port 63a. However, even in such a case, all the hold information related to the lower operation port 62a is digested before the transition to the third normal gaming state. Hereinafter, the basis for this will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 41, the number of suspensions related to the lower operation port 62a reaches the storage upper limit (“4”) at the timing when the first special gaming state is entered and the second normal gaming state is reached. In this case, after the transition to the second normal gaming state, the gaming times related to the lower operation port 62a are executed for the upper limit of storage (four times). In the second normal gaming state, regardless of the number of suspensions related to the lower operation opening 62a, the pattern change display time on the lower operation opening display portion DL is "0.5 sec" and the final display time is "0.5 sec". ing. For this reason, the time required to execute the above-mentioned upper limit game times is (variable display time: 0.5 sec + confirmed display time 0.5 sec) × memory upper limit: 4 = 4 sec.

  When the number of reserves related to the right operating port 63a has reached the upper limit (“4”) at the timing of transition to the second normal gaming state, the display for the right operating port at the timing of transition to the second normal gaming state The change display of the pattern in the part DR is started. The variation display time set in this variation display is “1 sec”. Since this hold information corresponds to the special hit result, after the transition to the second normal gaming state, the change display time (1 sec) and the fixed display time (1 sec) of the pattern on the display portion DR for the right working port have elapsed. At this time, the state shifts to the second special game state. In other words, the number of hold information related to the lower operation port 62a that is digested before the transition to the second special game state is two, and there are two hold information related to the lower operation port 62a even after the end of the second special game state. Will remain.

  The time required for the second special gaming state is “1 sec”, which is the sum of the time (0.8 sec) for which the lower variable winning device 65 is kept open and the ending time (0.2 sec). However, during this time, neither the game times related to the lower operating port 62a nor the game times related to the right operating port 63a will progress, and at the timing when the second special game state ends and the game returns to the second normal game state. Thus, the game times related to the lower operation port 62a and the game times related to the right operation port 63a are started simultaneously.

  Here, even during the second special game state, the main destination of the game ball launched to the right route is the right operation port 63a. For this reason, when the launch of the game ball toward the right route is continued, a ball enters the right operation port 63a during the second special game state, and the number of holds related to the right operation port 63a is increased. The memory limit may be reached again. In the example shown in FIG. 41, the number of holdings relating to the right operating port 63a has reached the upper limit of memory during the second special gaming state, and is executed by the right operating port display unit DR after returning to the second normal gaming state. The change display time of the picture is “1 sec”.

  In the game times related to the lower operation port 62a, the variable display time is set to be “0.5 sec” regardless of the number of remaining holds. For this reason, the 3rd time and 4th game time which concern on the lower action port 62a are complete | finished during the 2nd game time which concerns on the right action port 63a. That is, even if the game times related to the right operation port 63a are digested in the shortest time, all the game times related to the lower operation port 62a are performed while the game times related to the right operation port 63a are executed twice. It will be digested. And the sum (6 times) of the game times (4 times) related to the lower operating port 62a and the game times (2 times) related to the right operating port 63a is the minimum value of the number of short times set in the second normal game state. Since the number is less than (10 times), all the hold information related to the lower operation port 62a is digested before the time-shortage digestion that becomes a trigger for the transition to the third normal gaming state.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, as long as the game ball is fired to the right route during the second normal gaming state, all the hold information related to the lower operation port 62a is transferred to the third normal gaming state. Once digested, at least in the third normal gaming state, the game can be progressed only by the game times related to the right operation port 63a.

  In order to realize such a function, the minimum value of the number of time reductions can be set to 6 instead of 10.

  As described in detail above, the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state is made through the first special gaming state, but from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state. Since it is configured to shift directly, when the progress speed of the game is accelerated during the transition from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state, the difference can be highlighted. In such a configuration, the change can be easily understood without excessively increasing the difference in the display time of the pattern change between the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to secure an opportunity to visually check the variable display of the pattern by suppressing the display time of the pattern from being extremely shortened by the configuration in which the progress speed of the game is changed.

  If the right operation entrance portion 63 is configured to be openable and closable, the entrance frequency of game balls can be increased according to the situation. By combining such a configuration with a configuration in which the display time of the variation of the picture in the working port display unit is shortened as the number of stored hold information increases, it is possible to suitably increase the progress speed of the game. Here, the variable display time when the storage number of the hold information has reached the storage upper limit as a target for shortening the period accompanying the transition from the second normal gaming state advantageous to the player to the further advantageous third normal gaming state. If it is set as the structure included, the progress speed of a game can be made high in the condition where the entrance to the right operation entrance part 63 occurs frequently. Therefore, the effect of raising the progress speed of the game with the transition from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state can be suitably exhibited.

  In the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the fixed display time of the pattern on the right working port display unit DR is common, and the variable display time of the pattern is long and short before and after switching of the game state with respect to the fixed display time. If it is set as the structure made to differ, it will become possible for the player who pays attention to a pattern to compare the length of the variable display time based on the same reference | standard (common fixed display time). Thereby, it can be communicated to the player that the progress speed of the game is increasing.

  In addition, the effect by time shortening can be exhibited suitably by shortening the fluctuation display time of a pattern about the right action port 63a which becomes the main entrance destination in the third normal gaming state. For the lower working port 62a that is not the main entry destination, the refreshing time is changed by changing the game progress speed by making the pattern change display time the same in the second normal game state and the third normal game state. It is possible to suppress the improvement of the image from becoming a factor that excessively complicates the display control process of the pattern.

  In the configuration shown in the present embodiment, an increase in the number of balls can be expected by repeating the transition to the second special game state in the third normal game state. Here, the pace of transition to the second special game state depends on the digestion speed of the game times. As described above, in the third normal gaming state, by increasing the digestion speed from the second normal gaming state, the increase speed of the ball is changed (faster) without excessively complicating various structures provided in the game area or the like. ).

  In addition, when the transition to the second special game state frequently occurs in the third normal game state, the progress of the game may be delayed by securing the execution time of the second special game state. This can be a factor that prevents an increase in the progress speed of the game in the three normal gaming states. Therefore, if a special winning result is obtained in the second normal gaming state, the display of the variation display time of the pattern is shortened, so that even if the transition to the second special gaming state is repeated, The progress speed can be increased to improve the refreshing feeling of the game.

  In the first normal gaming state, when the probability variation jackpot result is obtained and the second normal gaming state is entered, the number of times that can be executed in the second normal gaming state is the number of times reduced (corresponding to the “reference number”). Is set. Then, when the number of game times executed in the second normal game state reaches the set short time number, the state shifts to the third normal game state. Here, the number of time reductions is defined so that all of the special information related to the first ingress portion can be digested during the second normal gaming state. For this reason, when the second normal gaming state is changed to the third normal gaming state without a jackpot result, all the hold information related to the lower operating port 62a is consumed during the second normal gaming state. The carry-over to the third normal gaming state is avoided. That is, in the third normal gaming state, the game times proceed based on the hold information related to the right operation port 63a. Thus, by suppressing the intervention of the game times related to the lower operation port 62a, it is possible to advance the game in the third normal gaming state with a good rhythm. In particular, in the lottery based on the right operating port 63a, in the configuration that is more preferential than the lottery based on the lower operating port 62a, the hold information related to the lower operating port 62a must be digested before shifting to the third normal gaming state. Thus, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's superiority in the third normal gaming state.

(Entrance validity period)
As for the right operation entrance portion 63 shown in the present embodiment, the entrance portion (right operation port 63a) is enlarged in order to increase the entrance frequency of game balls. Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 42, the lateral dimension of the right operating port 63a is set to be twice the diameter dimension of the gaming ball so that a plurality of gaming balls can pass through the right operating port 63a at the same time. Is also formed to be larger. The game balls that have entered the right operation port 63a are guided to a collection passage provided behind the game board 60 through a single entry passage narrowed so that a plurality of game balls cannot pass simultaneously. . The detection sensor 391d is disposed at a midway position in the entrance path as an entrance detection means for detecting a game ball entering the right operation port 63a. That is, any game ball that has entered the right operation port 63a passes through the detection sensor 391d (specifically, the detection area DE) and travels toward the collection passage.

  Here, when the right operation port 63a is enlarged and the game ball receiving range in the right operation port 63a is expanded, the game ball that has flowed into the right operation port 63a is detected in the detection region because of the above-described passage structure or the like. Some time lag occurs before passing DE. Considering such a time lag, the effective time of the detection sensor 391d according to the time required for the game ball flowing into the right operation port 63a to reach the detection area DE, more specifically, the detection sensor 391 in the main controller 162. The time allowed for reading (accepting) information from is extended (see FIG. 27). In other words, even after the right-hand actuated ball entering portion 63 is switched to the closed state, the detection of the game ball is effective until the required time elapses, and the game ball that has entered immediately before switching to the closed state is included in the detection target. By doing so, it is suppressed that a privilege cannot be obtained in spite of having entered the right operation port 63a, which is a factor that reduces the player's willingness to play.

  Note that the disposition of the detection sensor 391d away from the right operation port 63a is not only preferable for restricting a plurality of game balls from passing through the detection area DE at a time in order to ensure detection accuracy, but also an illegal tool. It is also preferable to suppress unauthorized access to the detection sensor 391d using the above.

  In the present embodiment, by using the effective time of the detection sensor 391d for the right working port 63a, the variation display and the fixed display of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS are executed, so that the right working entrance unit 63 is One of the features is that the extension of the interval time maintained in the closed state is suppressed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 43, the relationship between the valid time and the picture display in the through gate display section DS will be described. FIG. 43A is a timing chart illustrating the flow of games in the low frequency support mode, and FIG. 43B is a timing chart illustrating the flow of gaming machines in the high frequency support mode.

  In the low-frequency support mode, the time during which the right-hand actuated entrance portion 63 is maintained in the open state is “0.08 sec”. This opening time is a time sufficient for the game ball located on the shutter 331 disposed in the closed position to pass through the right operation port 63a when the game ball falls due to the displacement of the shutter 331 to the open position. Is set to The detection sensor 391d is validated at the timing when the right working ball entering portion 63 is switched to the open state, and is activated for "0.7 sec" even after the right working ball entering portion 63 is switched to the closed state. Maintained.

  Here, in the through gate display part DS, while the right action ball entry part 63 is in the open state, even if the electric power hold is stored, the display of the variation of the pattern is not executed. The change display of the pattern is started at the timing when the right operation ball entering portion 63 is switched to the closed state. That is, the display of the variation of the picture is started under the condition that the detection sensor 391d is activated.

  During the low frequency support mode, since the display variation time of the pattern on the through gate display section DS is “0.7 sec”, the definite display is started at the timing when the valid time has elapsed.

  The fixed display time of the picture in the through gate display section DS is “0.5 sec”. In the example of FIG. 43 (a), the case where the support lottery is won is illustrated, and the right operation ball entering portion 63 is switched from the closed state to the open state at the timing when the fixed display time has elapsed. In this way, when the right-hand actuated entrance portion 63 is repeatedly switched to the open state, the interval time maintained in the closed state is the variation display time of the pattern in the through gate display portion DS (the effective time of the detection sensor 391d). (Overtime: 0.7 sec) and the fixed display time (0.5 sec) of the pattern in the through gate display section DS (1.2 sec). As described above, the required time (1 sec) required for the game ball rolling on the shutter 331 to pass through the first specific area SE1 is shorter than the interval time. That is, during the low frequency support mode, a part of the game balls that have reached the right working ball entering portion 63 pass through the right working ball entering portion 63 and go to the lower variable winning device 65.

  In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the through display of the through gate display unit DS is preceded during the effective time of the detection sensor 391d, a certain amount of entry to the right operation entry unit 63 is ensured while some of the entry is made. There is a technical significance of encouraging the game ball to enter the lower variable winning device 65 side.

  On the other hand, in the high-frequency support mode, the time during which the right-hand actuated ball entering portion 63 is maintained in the open state is longer than that in the low-frequency support mode, and is expanded to “5.7 sec”. The detection sensor 391d is validated at the timing when the right working ball entering portion 63 is switched to the open state, and is activated for "0.7 sec" even after the right working ball entering portion 63 is switched to the closed state. Maintained. This time is the same as the low frequency support mode.

  Here, in the through-gate display section DS, as in the low frequency support mode, while the right-hand actuated entrance section 63 is in the open state, even if the electric role hold is stored. The variation display of the pattern is started at the timing when the variation display of the pattern is not executed and the right operation ball entering section 63 is switched to the closed state. That is, the change display of the pattern is started under the condition that the detection sensor 391d is activated.

  During the high-frequency support mode, the pattern change display time on the through-gate display section DS is shortened to “0.2 sec”. The fixed display time of the pattern in the through-gate display section DS is “0.5 sec”, and the sum of the variable display time and the fixed display time (0.7 sec) is equal to the overtime (0.7 sec) of the effective time. It will be the same length. In the example of FIG. 43 (b), the case where the support lottery is won is illustrated, and the right operation ball entering portion 63 is switched from the closed state to the open state at the timing when the fixed display time has elapsed. In this way, when the right-hand actuated entrance portion 63 is repeatedly switched to the open state, the interval time maintained in the closed state is the change display time of the pattern in the through-gate display portion DS and the through-gate display portion DS. This is the sum (0.7 sec) of the determined display time of the pattern in FIG. 1, that is, the effective time of the detection sensor 391d, and thus the state in which the detection sensor 391d is substantially enabled is continued.

  As described above, the required time (1 sec) required for the game ball rolling on the shutter 331 to pass through the first specific area SE1 is longer than the interval time. That is, during the high-frequency support mode, most of the game balls that have reached the right-hand actuated entrance section 63 are prevented from entering the right-hand actuated entrance section 63 and heading toward the lower variable prize-winning device 65. Yes.

  The second normal gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode has a configuration in which almost no balls are entered into the lower variable winning device 65 so as to be differentiated from the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. Yes. In this way, by avoiding entering the lower variable winning device 65, an increase in the number of possessed balls in the second normal gaming state is suppressed. In the present embodiment, the effective time of the detection sensor 391d is used to execute the display and change display of the picture of the through-gate display unit DS, thereby promptly entering the right-hand action at the timing when the effective time has passed. The part 63 is configured to switch to the open state. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the interval time during which the right operation ball entering portion 63 is maintained in the closed state so as to be shorter than the time required for the game ball to pass through the first specific area SE1.

  As shown in the present embodiment, in the configuration in which the right-hand actuated ball entering portion 63 is frequently switched to the open state in both the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, the effective time of the detection sensor 391d is used. By executing the change display and the confirmation display of the picture on the through gate display section DS, it is possible to contribute to the smooth progress of the game.

  In the case where the right operation ball entry portion 63 is switched from the open state to the closed state, the state where the ball entry is effective is maintained for a predetermined time even after switching to the closed state. Thereby, for example, a game ball that has flowed into the right operation port 63a at the same time as switching to the closed state can be set as a privilege grant target. This is preferable in order to avoid becoming a factor that lowers the player's willingness to play, such as being unable to obtain a privilege that should originally be obtained. Here, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, when the electric power hold is stored until the right operation ball entering portion 63 is switched to the closed state, the through gate display is not performed without waiting for the expiration of the effective time. The change display of the picture in the part DS is started. As described above, when the display of the variation of the pattern is started during the effective time and the effective time and the variation display time are at least partially overlapped, the right-hand actuated ball entering portion 63 is opened, closed, and opened. It is possible to prevent the picture variation display time and the fixed display time of the pattern from becoming extremely short when the game is rapidly advanced by switching to the above. This is preferable for improving the degree of attention to the game.

  Note that setting the effective time based on the time required for the game ball to move from the right operation port 63a to the detection area DE makes the effective time excessively long in order to ensure the profit of the player. Can be suppressed. This is a preferable configuration in order to suppress fraud related to the right-hand actuating ball entering portion 63 while ensuring the player's profit.

  In the configuration in which the electric role hold is acquired based on the passing of the game ball through the through gate 66, the electric role hold is acquired and stored before the right-hand actuated ball entering portion 63 is switched from the open state to the closed state. However, there may be a case in which the electronic role holding is acquired and stored after switching to the closed state. Therefore, after the switching of the right-hand actuating ball 63 to the closed state, when a new power reservation is acquired during the effective time, the change display of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS is displayed during the effective time. By adopting a configuration that starts, for example, it is possible to contribute to smoother game progress as compared with a configuration that waits for the expiration of an effective time and starts display of a variation of a picture.

  In the present embodiment, information indicating the third normal gaming state to be transferred when the game has progressed without a jackpot result in the second normal gaming state and the remaining games until the transition to the third normal gaming state is made. Information such as the number of times is displayed on the symbol display device 75 (display screen 75a). Hereinafter, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 44, a supplementary description will be given of the electrical configuration related to the display of the various types of information described above.

(Notification / production control device 143 and display control device 710)
An MPU 602 is mounted on the notification / production control board 651 of the notification / production control device 143. The MPU 602 is a ROM 603 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 602 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 603 is executed. The RAM 604 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 603 and the RAM 604 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 602, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 602 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 602, and receives the game turn control commands (game turn control information) such as the change start command, the type command, and the change end command described above from the main control device 162. . Also, a hold display control command (hold display control information) such as a shift command and a hold command, and an open / close execution mode command (open / close execution mode information) such as an opening command and an ending command are received.

  As described above, the lamp units 26 to 28, the speaker unit 29, and the display control device 710 provided on the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 602. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification / production control device 143 are transmitted to the display control device 710 while maintaining the information form as it is.

  The display control device 710 includes a display control board 711 on which an MPU 712, which is an element in which a program ROM 713 and a work RAM 714 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 715, a character ROM 716, and a video RAM 717 are mounted. It has. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 713 and the work RAM 714 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 712, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 712 of the display control device 710 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification / production control device 143 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 715 (specifically Execute internal command generation for VDP 715. More specifically, the MPU 712 executes a process for specifying a variable display pattern of each game time in the symbol display device 75 based on a command transmitted from the notification / production control device 143 and a process related to a hold notice described later. And the drawing process for the VDP 715 is executed corresponding to the processing result. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75.

  The program ROM 713 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 712 and fixed value data, and JPEG format image data for a background image is also stored and held. The work RAM 714 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like that are used when the MPU 712 executes various programs. These work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM 714.

  The VDP 715 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 75. Since the VDP 715 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 715 should be called a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 715 adjusts the timings of the MPU 712, the video RAM 717, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 717 from the character ROM 716 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 75.

  The character ROM 716 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 75. The character ROM 716 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

  It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 716 and share the image data and the like with each character ROM 716. Further, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 713 is stored in the character ROM 716.

  The video RAM 717 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 75, and the display content of the symbol display device 75 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 717.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 45 to FIG. 47, the configuration related to the symbol variation display and the content of the variation display will be supplementarily described. 45 is a schematic diagram for explaining display contents on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, FIG. 46 is a schematic diagram showing an overview of display in the first normal gaming state, and FIG. 47 (a) is a second normal gaming state. And the schematic which shows the outline | summary of the display in a 4th normal game state, FIG.47 (b) is the schematic which shows the outline | summary of the display in a 3rd normal game state. In FIG. 46 and the like, for convenience of explanation, the variable display area of the symbol is partitioned and displayed by a two-dot chain line (virtual line).

  The character ROM 716 of the display control device 710 includes nine types of main symbol data indicating numbers “1” to “9”, and decorations such as characters imitating numbers “1” to “9” and fish. Nine types of sub-symbol data (see FIGS. 45A to 45I) are stored in advance.

  The variable display area provided on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is roughly divided into a first variable display area ME1, a second variable display area ME2, and a third variable display area ME3. The first variable display area ME1 is arranged at the upper left of the display screen 75a, the second variable display area ME2 is arranged at the upper right of the display screen 75a, and the third variable display area ME3 is arranged at the center of the display screen 75a. Has been avoided.

  In the first variation display area ME1, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of the main symbols arranged in a predetermined order, and the symbols in each symbol row are variably displayed so as to scroll periodically in a predetermined direction (specifically, from top to bottom). The first variation display area ME1 is linked to the pattern display in the lower working port display unit DL of the main display unit D, and at the timing when the variation display of the pattern is started in the lower working port display unit DL. The symbol variation display ends (decision display starts) at the timing when the symbol variation display is started and when the symbol variation display ends (timing when the confirmation display starts). And a game result is alert | reported to a player by the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result concerning the lower operation opening 62a being stopped and displayed (refer FIG. 46). In the present embodiment, the combination of the main symbols of the same number is stopped when the jackpot result is reached, and at least one number of the three symbol rows is displayed when the result is a missed result or a special hit result. A combination of main symbols different from the numbers in the other symbol columns is stopped and displayed.

  In the second variation display area ME2, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of the main symbols arranged in a predetermined order, and the symbols in each symbol row are variably displayed so as to scroll periodically in a predetermined direction (specifically, from top to bottom). The second variation display area ME2 is linked to the pattern display in the right working port display unit DR of the main display unit D, and at the timing when the variation display of the pattern is started in the right working port display unit DR. Thus, the symbol variation display is finished (the confirmation display is started) at the timing when the symbol variation display is started and the symbol variation display is finished (the timing when the confirmation display is started). And a game result is alert | reported to a player by the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result concerning the right action port 63a being stopped and displayed (refer FIG. 47). In the present embodiment, for example, when a jackpot result is obtained, a combination of main symbols having the same number is stopped and displayed, and when a result of losing or a special hit result is obtained, at least one number of three symbol rows is displayed. A combination of main symbols different from the numbers in the other symbol columns is stopped and displayed.

  In the third variation display area ME3, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of sub symbols arranged in a predetermined order, and the symbols in each symbol row are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from top to bottom) with periodicity. For the third variation display area ME3, the symbol display in the lower working port display portion DL and the right working port display portion DR (the symbol display in the first variation display region ME1 and the second variation display region ME2). ), The symbol variation display is started at the timing when the symbol variation display is started on the lower actuation port display unit DL or the right actuation port display unit DR, and the pattern variation display is ended. At the timing (timing at which confirmation display is started), the symbol variation display is terminated (confirmation display is started). Then, the combination of sub-symbols of the same number corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed, so that the player is notified of the game result (see FIGS. 46 and 47 (a)). In the present embodiment, except for some exceptions described later, when a jackpot result is obtained, the combination of sub-symbols with the same number is stopped and displayed, and when the result is a missed result or a special hit result, three A combination of main symbols in which at least one number in the symbol sequence is different from the numbers in other symbol sequences is stopped and displayed.

  The main symbol displayed in the first variation display area ME1 and the second variation display area ME2 is simpler than the sub-design displayed in the third variation display area ME3. For this reason, it is easy to ensure discrimination power even if the size of the symbol is reduced. In view of such circumstances, the first variable display area ME1 and the second variable display area ME2 are smaller than the third variable display area ME3.

  For the variable display areas ME1 to ME3, display / non-display of symbols is switched according to the gaming state. Here, with reference to FIG. 46 to FIG. 48, the relationship between the gaming state and the variable display area to be subjected to symbol display will be described. FIG. 48 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state and the display / non-display of symbols in each variable display area. Yes.

  As already described, in the first normal gaming state, a difference is provided so that it is advantageous for the player to launch the game ball to the left route compared to the right route. For this reason, when trying to advance a game to a game even a little, it is assumed that the main launch destination of the game ball is the left route. The game ball fired to the left route enters the former of the lower working port 62a and the right working port 63a, and avoids entering the latter. Therefore, in the first normal game state, the game proceeds mainly based on the ball entering the lower operation port 62a. In this first normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 46, symbols are displayed in the first variation display area ME1 and the third variation display area ME3, and the symbols in the second variation display area ME2 will be described later. It is hidden with the exception of. The display of the sub symbol in the third variable display area ME3 is synchronized (linked) with the display of the main symbol in the first variable display area ME1. That is, in the first normal gaming state, the third variation display area ME3 is synchronized (interlocked) with the display of the pattern on the lower working port display portion DL.

  Specifically, the main symbol variation display in the first variation display region ME1 and the sub symbol variation display in the third variation display region ME3 at the timing when the variation display of the pattern is started on the lower working port display unit DL. And the main symbol in the first variation display area ME1 and the sub symbol in the third variation display area ME3 are stopped and displayed at the timing when the pattern is stopped and displayed on the lower working port display unit DL. The symbol combinations that are stopped and displayed in the first variation display area ME1 and the third variation display area ME3 are symbol combinations corresponding to the lottery result relating to the lower operation port 62a.

  In addition, when the game turn which concerns on the right action port 63a is performed in a 1st normal game state, the pattern is variably displayed-determined on the display part DR for the right action port of the main display part D. In the display screen 75a, symbols are displayed in the second variation display area ME2 only during this period. That is, in the second variation display area ME2, main symbol variation display to finalization display is executed in response to the pattern variation display to finalization display in the right working port display section DR, and the lottery result relating to the right actuation port 63a is clearly indicated. However, when the game times related to the right operation port 63a are not progressing, the display of the main symbol in the second variation display area ME2 is avoided. In the first normal gaming state, the state in which the symbols are displayed in the first variation display area ME1 and the third variation display area ME3 is maintained even when the game turn related to the lower operation port 62a is not progressing. However, the second variation display area ME2 is different in that such a resident function is not provided.

  Incidentally, in the first normal gaming state, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the symbols in the second variation display area ME2 are kept undisplayed even when the game times related to the right operation port 63a are executed. is there.

  As already described, the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state are different from each other so that it is advantageous for the player to fire the game ball to the right route compared to the left route. For this reason, when trying to advance a game to a game even a little, it is assumed that the main launch destination of the game ball is the right route. The game ball fired to the right route enters the latter among the lower working port 62a to the right working port 63a, and the entering into the latter is avoided. Therefore, in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the game proceeds mainly based on the ball entering the right operation port 63a. In these second normal game state to fourth normal game state, as shown in FIG. 47A, symbols are displayed in the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3, and the first variable display area. The symbols in ME1 are not displayed except for some exceptions described later. The display of the sub symbol in the third variation display area ME3 is synchronized (linked) with the display of the main symbol in the second variation display area ME2. That is, in the second normal gaming state, the third variation display area ME3 is synchronized (interlocked) with the display of the pattern on the right working port display unit DR.

  Specifically, the main symbol variation display in the second variation display region ME2 and the sub symbol variation display in the third variation display region ME3 at the timing when the variation display of the pattern is started in the right working port display unit DR. And the main symbol in the second variation display area ME2 and the sub-design in the third variation display area ME3 are stopped and displayed at the timing when the pattern is stopped and displayed on the right working port display section DR. The symbol combinations that are stopped and displayed in the second variation display area ME2 and the third variation display area ME3 are symbol combinations corresponding to the lottery result relating to the right operation port 63a.

  When the game times related to the lower operation port 62a are executed in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the lower operation port display unit DL of the main display unit D. Confirmed display. In the display screen 75a, symbols are displayed in the first variation display area ME1 only during this period. That is, in the first variation display area ME1, the main symbol variation display to finalization display is executed in response to the pattern variation display to finalization display in the lower actuation port display unit DL, and the lottery result relating to the lower actuation port 62a is clearly shown. However, when the game times related to the lower operation port 62a are not progressing, the display of the main symbol in the first variation display area ME1 is avoided. In the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state, symbols are displayed in the second variation display area ME2 and the third variation display area ME3 even when the game turn related to the right operation port 63a is not progressing. However, the first variation display area ME1 is different in that such a resident function is not provided.

  Incidentally, in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, even when the game turn related to the lower operation port 62a is executed, the symbols in the second variable display area ME2 are maintained in the non-display state. It is also possible.

  In the present embodiment, the variable display area used in the fourth normal gaming state is shared with the variable display area used in the second normal gaming state, and the variable display mode in the variable display area is also shared. ing. Furthermore, other displays on the display screen 75a are also shared in both normal gaming states. Accordingly, it is difficult to visually identify whether the state is the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state from the display content in the variable display area. As described above, it is difficult to distinguish the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state, so even if the fourth normal gaming state is more disadvantageous than the second normal gaming state, It is possible to give the player an expectation that it may shift to a gaming state.

  The display mode of the display screen 75a in the fourth normal gaming state may be distinguished from the display mode of the display screen 75a in the second normal gaming state to clearly indicate which normal gaming state it is. .

  The third normal game state is a game state that assumes that the game proceeds mainly based on the ball entering the right operation port 63a as in the second normal game state. In this second normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), symbols are displayed in the second variation display area ME2 of the display screen 75a, and the symbols in the first variation display area ME1 will be described later. It is hidden with the exception of. Further, in the third variation display area ME3, a character image imitating a fairy is displayed instead of the sub-pattern described above, and the lottery result relating to the right operation port 63a is notified by the movement of the character or the like. ing. Specifically, in the case of the jackpot result, the character image imitating a fairy becomes an transformed image, and in the case of the special hit result, the effect displayed so as to surround the character emits a rainbow color, and in the case of a miss result The effect is hidden. Thus, the display in the third variable display area ME3 is synchronized with the display of the main symbol in the second variable display area ME2. In other words, in the third normal gaming state, the third variation display area ME3 is synchronized with the display of the picture on the right working port display section DR.

  For example, the main symbol variation display in the second variation display region ME2 and the character image operation in the third variation display region ME3 are started at the timing when the variation display of the pattern is started in the right working port display unit DR. The main symbol in the second variation display area ME2 is stopped and displayed at the timing when the pattern is stopped and displayed on the right working port display section DR, and the character image or the like in the third variation display area ME3 displays the lottery result. Switch to The symbol combination stopped and displayed in the second variation display area ME2 becomes a symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result related to the right operation port 63a, and the character display in the third variation display region ME3 also corresponds to the lottery result related to the right operation port 63a. Corresponding display. That is, in the third normal gaming state, the second variation display area ME2 and the third variation display area ME3 are interlocked (see FIG. 48).

  In addition, when the game turn which concerns on the lower operation port 62a is performed in a 3rd normal game state, the pattern is fluctuate | varied-displayed-determined by the display part DL for lower operation ports of the main display part D. FIG. In the display screen 75a, symbols are displayed in the first variation display area ME1 only during this period. That is, in the first variation display area ME1, the main symbol variation display to finalization display is executed in response to the pattern variation display to finalization display in the lower actuation port display unit DL, and the lottery result relating to the lower actuation port 62a is clearly shown. However, when the game times related to the lower operation port 62a are not progressing, the display of the main symbol in the first variation display area ME1 is avoided. In the second normal gaming state, even when the game turn related to the right operation port 63a is not progressing, there is a state in which symbols and character images are displayed in the second variation display area ME2 and the third variation display area ME3. Although maintained, the first variation display area ME1 is different in that such a resident function is not provided.

  It should be noted that the mode of the symbol variation display in the symbol display device 75 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. Can be appropriately changed.

  As already explained, when the number of games executed in the second normal gaming state reaches the reference number, that is, the shortest number of times set at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state, Furthermore, it shifts to the third normal gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, one feature is that information suggesting the transition to the third normal gaming state is displayed during the second normal gaming state.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47A, in the upper part of the display screen 75a (specifically, between the first variation display area ME1 and the second variation display area ME2), the third normal gaming state is entered. The remaining number display area CE in which the counter image CF, which is information indicating the number of remaining games until the transition, is displayed, and the target image, which is information indicating the gaming state (for example, the third normal gaming state) that can be shifted by using the reference number of times. An information display area IE including a transition destination display area TE in which TF is displayed is provided.

  The counter image CF displayed in the remaining number display area CE displays the number of remaining games until the transition to the third normal gaming state with numbers “0” to “100”. In the example shown in FIG. 47 (a), the value indicated by the counter image CF (hereinafter referred to as the counter value) is “100”, and it is necessary to digest 100 gaming times to shift to the third normal gaming state. The effect is shown. The counter value is subtracted and displayed as the game time is consumed, and after the counter value becomes “0”, the counter image CF is not displayed in accordance with the transition to the third normal gaming state.

  The target image TF displayed in the transfer destination display area TE is composed of characters “SUPER RUSH”, which is the name of the third normal gaming state. In this target image TF, as an image that gives the player an impression that the transition to the third normal gaming state is hindered, a constrained image LF made up of a plurality of constraining patterns imitating chains wrapped around the target image TF Comes with. Although details will be described later, the target image TF is enlarged as the number of game times digested increases, and the restricted image LF is enlarged in accordance with the enlargement of the target. Then, the number of constraint pictures constituting the constraint image LF decreases with this enlargement. This suggests that the player is approaching the third normal gaming state.

  Here, a display control process (hereinafter referred to as an information display control process) of the information display area IE executed by the notification / production control device 143 will be described. The information display control process is a process executed as part of the regular process in the MPU 602 of the notification / production control device 143.

(Information display control processing)
As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 49, in the information display control process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not it is the first special gaming state corresponding to the transition to the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state. To do. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, the process proceeds to step S1702, and a special gaming state display control process is executed.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 50, in the special gaming state display control process, it is first determined in step S1801 whether or not ending is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S1801, the process proceeds to step S1802. In step S1802, it is determined whether it is ending start timing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which an ending command is received from main controller 162. If a negative determination is made in step S1802, the display control process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1802, processing proceeds to step S1803. In step S1803, a migration information display process is executed. Specifically, a transition information display command is output to the display control device 710 and a sound effect for starting display of transition information is output from the speaker unit 29. The display control device 710 displays the above-described target image TF, restraint image LF, and counter image CF at the center of the display screen 75a based on the transition information display command. At this timing, the counter value of the counter image CF is scroll-displayed (see FIGS. 51A to 51B), and the reference number (remaining number of games) set in accordance with the transition to the second normal gaming state is set. It is hidden.

  Returning to the description of step S1801, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, the process proceeds to step S1804. In step S1804, it is determined whether or not it is the timing after the variable display of the counter value is ended and the remaining number of games is confirmed and displayed. If a negative determination is made in step S1804, the process proceeds to step S1805. In step S1805, it is determined whether or not it is time to confirm the remaining number of games. If a negative determination is made in step S1805, the display control process is terminated as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S1805, the process proceeds to step S1806.

  In step S1806, a fixed display process is executed. Specifically, a confirmation display command is output to the display control device 710 and a sound effect for confirmation display of the remaining number of games (initial value) is output from the speaker unit 29. The display control device 710 stops the counter value during scroll display based on the reception of the confirmation display command. Specifically, the same value as the standard number of times that the high-frequency support mode is continued in the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state of the transition destination is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 51 (b) → (c)). . In addition, in FIG.51 (b), the case where the reference frequency is 100 times is illustrated.

  In the subsequent step S1807, the remaining number counter provided in the various counter areas 675 of the RAM 654 is set to the same value as the reference number. The value of the remaining number counter is updated (subtracted) every time the game time is started in the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state, and the value of the counter image CF is the same as the value of the remaining number counter. It is updated (subtracted) to be a value.

  Returning to the description of step S1804, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1805, that is, if the remaining number of games has been finalized, the process proceeds to step S1808. In step S1808, it is determined whether or not it is time to reduce and display the target image TF displayed at the center of the display screen 75a in the information display area IE at the top of the display screen 75a. If a negative determination is made in step S1808, the present display control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1808, the process proceeds to step S1809, the reduced display process is executed, and the present display control process ends.

  In the reduced display processing in step S 1809, a reduced display command is output to the display control device 710 and a sound effect for reduced display is output from the speaker unit 29. Based on the reception of the reduced display command, the display control device 710 moves the target image TF, restraint image LF, and counter image CF being displayed at the center of the display screen 75a to the upper part of the display screen 75a and the target image TF. Then, the restraint image LF and the counter image CF are reduced and displayed in accordance with the information display area IE described above. As a result, the overlap between the target image TF and the like and the third variable display area ME3 is eliminated, and the symbol display is resumed in the third variable display area ME3 (see FIGS. 51C to 51D). At this timing, the symbol display is resumed also in the second variation display area ME2, and the preparation for transition to the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state is completed.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 49 again, if a negative determination is made in step S1701, the process proceeds to step S1703. In step S1703, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state. If it is not in any normal gaming state, the information display control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1703, the process proceeds to step S1704, and after executing the normal gaming state display control process, the information display control process is terminated.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 52, in the normal gaming state display control process, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not it is a timing to start symbol variation display. Specifically, a variation start command related to the lower working port display unit DL (lower working port 62a) or a variation starting command related to the right working port display unit DR (right working port 63a) is received from the main controller 162. It is determined whether it is timing. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, the process proceeds to step S1902, and the value of the remaining number counter provided in the various counter areas 675 of the RAM 654 is updated (subtracted by 1).

  After executing the process of step S1902, or when a negative determination is made in step S1901, the display control process (target display control process) of the target image TF and the constrained image LF is executed in subsequent step S1903, and step S1904 is executed. After executing the display control processing (counter display control processing) of the counter image CF, the display control processing is terminated. First, the target display control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the target control process, FIG. 54A is a schematic diagram illustrating the relationship between the number of games, the size of the target image TF, and the number of constrained pictures, and FIG. 54B is the destination display area TE. FIG.

(Target display control processing)
In the target display control process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the current game time corresponds to the jackpot result. If a negative determination is made in step S2001, the process proceeds to step S2002. In step S2002, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the variable display. Specifically, the change start command related to the lower working port display unit DL (lower operation port 62a) or the change start command related to the right working port display unit DR (right operation port 63a) is received from the main control device 162. It is determined whether it is timing.

  If a positive determination is made in step S2002, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining number counter in the various counter areas 675 is the first predetermined number. The ROM 653 stores a first predetermined number setting table indicating a correspondence relationship between each reference number and the first predetermined number set at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state. The first predetermined number of times is set with reference to the reference number of times and the first predetermined number of times setting table when shifting to the normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state.

  For example, when the reference number is 100 times, the first predetermined number is defined to be 70 times, 50 times, 30 times, 10 times, and 0 times (see FIG. 54A). Is set to be 50, 30, 10, 5, and 0, and when the reference number is 50, the first predetermined number is set to 70 times. Is 30 times, 10 times, 5 times, 3 times, 0 times, and when the reference number is 30, the first predetermined number is 10, 5, 3, 1 In the case where the reference number is 10, the first predetermined number is specified to be 5, 3, 2, 1, 0.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2003, the target display control process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S2003, the process proceeds to step S2004. In step S2004, enlargement display processing of the target image TF and the constraint image LF is executed. Specifically, an enlarged display command is output to the display control device 710 and a sound effect for enlarged display is output from the speaker unit 29. Based on the reception of the enlarged display command, the display control device 710 enlarges the target image TF and the restraint image LF being displayed, and partially hides each restraint pattern constituting the restraint image LF. As a result, the number of constraining patterns decreases as the target image TF is enlarged.

  For example, when the set reference number is 100 times, the size of the target image TF is “1/30” of the third variation display area ME3 and the restraint picture until the started game number reaches 30 times. Becomes “8” (display level 1 (LV1)), and the size of the target image TF becomes the third size when the number of started game times reaches 30 times (when the remaining number of game times becomes 70). The variable display area ME3 is changed from “1/30” to “1/25”, the number of restrained patterns is changed from “8” to “7” (display level 2 (LV2)), and the number of game games started reaches 50 times. (When the remaining number of games is 50), the size of the target image TF is changed from “1/25” to “1/20” of the third variable display area ME3, and the number of restrained pictures is “7”. To “6” (display level 3 (LV3)) When the number of game times reaches 70 (when the remaining number of games reaches 30), the size of the target image TF changes from “1/25” to “1/20” of the third variable display area ME3, and When the number of restrained pictures is changed from “6” to “5” (display level 4 (LV4)) and the number of game starts started reaches 90 (when the number of remaining games reaches 10), the target image TF The size of the game changes from “1/20” to “1/15” in the third variation display area ME3 and the number of restrained pictures changes from “5” to “4” (display level 5 (LV5)). When the number of times reaches 100 (when the remaining number of games becomes 0), the size of the target image TF is changed from “1/10” to “1/2” of the third variable display area ME3, and the restraint picture Is changed from “4” to “3” (display level 6 (LV6)).

  When the set reference number is 70, the size of the target image TF is “1/30” of the third variation display area ME3 and the number of restraint patterns until the started game number reaches 20. Becomes “8” (display level 1 (LV1)), and when the number of game starts started reaches 20 (when the remaining number of games reaches 50), the size of the target image TF is displayed in a third variation display. When “1/30” is changed to “1/25” in the area ME3 and the number of restrained patterns is changed from “8” to “7” (display level 2 (LV2)). (When the remaining number of games reaches 30), the size of the target image TF is changed from “1/25” to “1/20” in the third variable display area ME3, and the number of restrained pictures is changed from “7” to “ 6 ”(display level 3 (LV3)) When the number reaches 60 (when the remaining number of games reaches 10), the size of the target image TF is changed from “1/25” to “1/20” of the third variation display area ME3, and the number of restrained patterns Is changed from “6” to “5” (display level 4 (LV4)), and the size of the target image TF is increased when the number of started game times reaches 65 times (when the remaining number of game times becomes 5). The third variation display area ME3 is changed from “1/20” to “1/15”, the number of restrained patterns is changed from “5” to “4” (display level 5 (LV5)), and the number of game games started is 70 times. The target image TF size is changed from “1/10” to “1/2” of the third variation display area ME3 and the number of restrained pictures is “ 4 "to" 3 "(display level 6 (LV6)).

  When the set reference number is 50, the size of the target image TF is “1/30” of the third variation display area ME3 and the number of restrained patterns until the started game number reaches 20. Becomes “8” (display level 1 (LV1)), and when the number of game starts started reaches 20 (when the remaining number of games reaches 30), the size of the target image TF is displayed in the third variation display. When “1/30” is changed from “1/30” to “1/25” in the area ME3 and the number of restrained patterns is changed from “8” to “7” (display level 2 (LV2)), and the number of game times started reaches 40 times. (When the remaining number of games is 10), the size of the target image TF is changed from “1/25” to “1/20” in the third variable display area ME3, and the number of restrained pictures is changed from “7” to “ 6 ”(display level 3 (LV3)) When the number reaches 45 times (when the remaining number of games reaches 5), the size of the target image TF is changed from “1/25” to “1/20” in the third variation display area ME3, and the number of restrained pictures Is changed from “6” to “5” (display level 4 (LV4)), and the size of the target image TF is increased when the number of started game times reaches 67 times (when the remaining number of game times becomes 3). The third variation display area ME3 is changed from “1/20” to “1/15”, the number of restrained patterns is changed from “5” to “4” (display level 5 (LV5)), and the number of game games started is 50 times. (When the remaining number of games is 0), the size of the target image TF is changed from “1/10” to “1/2” of the third variation display area ME3, and the number of restrained pictures is “ 4 "to" 3 "(display level 6 (LV6)).

  In the case where the set reference number is 30, the size of the target image TF is “1/30” of the third variation display area ME3 and the number of constrained patterns until the started game number reaches 20. Becomes “8” (display level 1 (LV1)), and when the number of game starts started reaches 20 (when the number of remaining games reaches 10), the size of the target image TF is displayed in a third variation display. When “1/30” is changed to “1/25” in the area ME3 and the number of restrained patterns is changed from “8” to “7” (display level 2 (LV2)), and the number of game games started reaches 25 times. (When the remaining number of games is 5), the size of the target image TF is changed from “1/25” to “1/20” in the third variable display area ME3, and the number of restrained pictures is changed from “7” to “ 6 ”(display level 3 (LV3)) When the number reaches 7 (when the remaining number of games is 3), the size of the target image TF is changed from “1/25” to “1/20” in the third variation display area ME3, and the number of restrained pictures Is changed from “6” to “5” (display level 4 (LV4)), and the size of the target image TF is increased when the number of started game times reaches 29 times (when the remaining number of game times becomes 1). The third variation display area ME3 is changed from “1/20” to “1/15”, the number of restrained patterns is changed from “5” to “4” (display level 5 (LV5)), and the number of game times started is 30 times. The target image TF size is changed from “1/10” to “1/2” of the third variation display area ME3 and the number of restrained pictures is “ 4 "to" 3 "(display level 6 (LV6)).

  When the set reference number is 10, the size of the target image TF is “1/30” of the third variation display area ME3 and the number of restrained pictures until the started game number reaches 5. Becomes “8” (display level 1 (LV1)), and the size of the target image TF is displayed in the third variation display when the number of started game times reaches 5 times (when the remaining number of game times becomes 5). When “1/30” is changed to “1/25” in the area ME3 and the number of restrained patterns is changed from “8” to “7” (display level 2 (LV2)), and the number of game times started reaches 7 times. When the remaining number of games is three, the size of the target image TF is changed from “1/25” to “1/20” in the third variable display area ME3, and the number of restrained pictures is changed from “7” to “ 6 ”(display level 3 (LV3)), and the number of games started has reached 8 When the number of remaining games is two (2), the size of the target image TF is changed from “1/25” to “1/20” of the third variable display area ME3, and the number of restrained pictures is “6”. Is changed to “5” (display level 4 (LV4)), and the size of the target image TF is displayed in the third variation display when the number of started game times reaches 9 times (when the remaining number of game times becomes 1). When “1/20” is changed to “1/15” in the area ME3 and the number of restrained patterns is changed from “5” to “4” (display level 5 (LV5)), and the number of game times started reaches 10 times. When the remaining number of games is 0, the size of the target image TF is changed from “1/10” to “1/2” of the third variable display area ME3, and the number of restrained pictures is changed from “4” to “ 3 ”(display level 6 (LV6)).

  When the display level is LV1 to LV5, the transition destination display area TE (information display area IE) is separated from the third variable display area ME3, but the transition level display area is changed to LV6. TE (information display area IE) is expanded to a position including at least a part of a range in which the third variable display area ME3 is formed on the display screen 75a (see FIG. 54B). This is a device for directing the player's attention to the target image TF and the counter image CF.

  When the reference number is 100 times, the first predetermined number is specified to be 70 times, 50 times, 30 times, 10 times, 0 times, and when the reference number is 70 times, the first number is specified. It is specified that the predetermined number of times is 50 times, 30 times, 10 times, and 0 times. When the reference number of times is 50 times, the first predetermined number of times is specified to be 30, 10, and 0 times. When the reference number is 30, the first predetermined number is specified to be 10 times and 0 times. When the reference number is 10, the first predetermined number is specified to be 0. It is also possible to do. In such a configuration, the initial display level when the reference number is 70 is LV2, the initial display level is 50 when the reference number is 50, and the initial display level is 30 when the reference number is 30. The initial display level when the display level is LV4 and the reference number is 10 is LV5, and the step-up of the enlarged display is partially shortened.

  Returning to the description of step S2002 in FIG. 53, if a negative determination is made in step S2002, that is, if it is not the start timing of the variable display, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, it is determined whether or not it is the timing for shifting to the final display. Specifically, a change end command related to the lower working port display unit DL (lower operation port 62a) or a change end command related to the right operation port display unit DR (right operation port 63a) is received from the main controller 162. It is determined whether it is timing. If a negative determination is made in step S2005, the display control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2005, the process proceeds to step S2006.

  In step S2006, it is determined whether or not the current game number is the last game number (game number reaching the reference number) in which the remaining number counter value is “0” in the second normal game state or the fourth normal game state. judge. If a negative determination is made in step S2006, the display control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2006, that is, if it is the timing at which the final display is started in the final game round, the process proceeds to step S2007.

  In step S2007, target image maximum display processing is executed. Specifically, a maximum display command is output to the display control device 710 and a sound effect for maximum display is output from the speaker unit 29. Based on the reception of the maximum display command, the display control device 710 erases all the restraint images LF being displayed and enlarges and displays the target image TF at the center of the display screen 75a (see FIG. 54B). As a result, the player is notified of the transition from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state. Note that the maximized target image TF occupies almost the entire area of the third variable display area ME3. Although details will be described later, the symbol display in the third variation display area ME3 is not executed in the last game round. By maximizing the target image TF and occupying almost the entire area of the third variation display area ME3, it is possible to suppress a sense of discomfort with respect to the fact that no symbol is displayed in the third variation display area ME3.

  Returning to the description of step S2001, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, that is, if the game time corresponds to the jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S2008. In step S2008, it is determined whether or not it is the timing for shifting to the final display. Specifically, a change end command related to the lower working port display unit DL (lower operation port 62a) or a change end command related to the right operation port display unit DR (right operation port 63a) is received from the main controller 162. It is determined whether it is timing. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2008, the process proceeds to step S2009, and a display process corresponding to the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, information for stopping and displaying the pattern creation corresponding to the jackpot result in the change end command transferred to the display control device 710, and the display corresponding to the jackpot result for the displayed target image TF and restraint image LF. And information for switching to. And the sound effect for having become a jackpot result in the 2nd normal game state or the 4th normal game state is output from the speaker part 29. FIG.

  This display is roughly divided into two modes. Specifically, it is divided into a display mode in the case of a 16R probability variation jackpot result and a display mode in the case of a jackpot result other than that. As for the former, in order to notify the transition to the third normal gaming state, the display of the target image TF is continued and the constraint image LF is not displayed. As for the latter, the target image TF and the constrained image LF being displayed are divided into fine pieces to clearly indicate that the transition to the third normal gaming state has failed.

  Returning to the description of step S2008, if a negative determination is made in step S2008, the process proceeds to step S2010. In step S2010, it is determined whether it is a fixed display end timing. If a negative determination is made in step S2010, the target display control process is terminated as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S2010, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot result is a 16R probability variable jackpot result, that is, whether or not the third special gaming state is to be entered after the first special gaming state is finished. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2011, the present display control process is terminated as it is. As a result, the display of the target image TF is continued even in the first special game state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2011, a non-display process for the target image TF is executed in step S2012. Specifically, a target image non-display command is output to the display control device 710 and a non-display sound effect is output from the speaker unit 29. Based on the reception of the target image non-display command, the display control device 710 hides the target image TF and the constrained image LF that are divided and displayed in fine pieces in the information display area IE.

  Next, referring to FIG. 55 to FIG. 57, the counter display control process in step S1904 executed to update the value of the counter image CF in the remaining number display area CE and the countdown display flow in the remaining number display area CE. Will be described. In the present embodiment, the main controller 162 is used both when the game times are executed based on the winning at the lower operating port 62a and when the game times are executed based on the winning at the right operating port 63a. The game times counter value is updated, and the value of the counter image CF is also updated accordingly. The counter display control process is executed at the counter display control process corresponding to the right operation port executed at the game times based on the winning at the right operation port 63a and at the game times based on the winning at the lower operation port 62a. And the counter display control process corresponding to the lower working port. 55 is a flowchart showing the counter display control process corresponding to the right working port, FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the counter display control process corresponding to the lower working port, and FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the countdown display.

(Counter display control processing for right working port)
As shown in FIG. 55, in the counter display control process corresponding to the right operation port, first, in step S2101, whether or not the current game time (game time based on winning in the right operation port 63a) corresponds to the jackpot result. Determine. If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102. In step S2102, whether or not it is the timing to start the pattern variation display on the right working port display section DR, the main symbol variation display in the second variation display area ME2, and the sub-design variation display in the third variation display area ME3. Determine. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the change start command related to the right working port display unit DR (right working port 63a) is received from the main control device 162. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, the process proceeds to step S2103.

  In step S2103, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining number counter in the various counter areas 675 matches the second predetermined number. The ROM 653 stores a second predetermined number setting table indicating a correspondence relationship between each reference number and the second predetermined number set at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state. The second predetermined number of times is set with reference to the reference number of times and the second predetermined number of times setting table when shifting to the normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state.

  For example, when the set reference number is 100, the second predetermined number is 90 times, 80 times, 70 times, 60 times, 50 times, 40 times, 30 times, 20 times, 10 times, 9 times, 8 times, 7 times, 6 times, 5 times, 4 times, 3 times, 2 times, 1 time, and 0 times. When the reference number is 70 times, the second predetermined number is 60 times, 50 times, 40 times, 30 times, 20 times, 10 times, 9 times, 8 times, 7 times, 6 times, 5 times, 4 times, 3 times, 2 times, 1 time, 0 times If the reference number is 50 times, the second predetermined number is 40 times, 30 times, 20 times, 10 times, 9 times, 8 times, 7 times, 6 times, 5 times, 4 times. 3 times, 2 times, 1 time, 0 times, and when the reference number is 30, the second predetermined number is 20, 10, 9, 8, 7 6 times 5 times 4 times 3 times 2 If the reference number is 10 times, the second predetermined number is 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3 times. 2 times, 1 time, and 0 times.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, the process proceeds to step S2014. In step S2104, an enlarged display process of the counter image CF is executed. Specifically, a counter enlargement display command is output to the display control device 710, and a sound effect for counter enlargement display is output from the speaker unit 29. In the present embodiment, the display state of the counter image CF is switched between a normal display state, a first enlarged display state that is slightly larger than the normal display state, and a third enlarged display state that is larger than the first enlarged display state. It is possible. When the value of the remaining number counter is a specific number (0 times) of the first predetermined number of times, the second enlarged display command is output as the counter enlarged display command, and the value of the remaining number counter is the first predetermined number of times. The first enlarged display command is output as the counter enlarged display command when the number is other than the specific number of times (0 times). The display control device 710 switches the display state of the counter image CF to the first enlarged display state based on the reception of the first enlarged display command, and displays the counter image CF based on the reception of the second enlarged display command. The state is switched to the second enlarged display state.

  In the normal display state and the first enlarged display state of the counter image CF, overlapping with the first variable display area ME1 to the third variable display area ME3 is avoided. On the other hand, in the second enlarged display state, the size and position are defined in accordance with the maximum display of the target image TF, and the counter image CF is displayed in the third variation display area ME3.

  After executing the process of step S2104 or when making a negative determination in step S2103, the process proceeds to step S2105. In step S2105, a subtraction display process is executed. Specifically, a subtraction display command is output to the display control device 710 and a sound effect for subtraction display is output from the speaker unit 29. The display control device 710 decrements the value of the counter image CF by “1” based on the reception of the subtraction display command.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 57 (a) → FIG. 57 (b), the counter image CF is displayed from the normal display state at the start of symbol variation display in the second variation display region ME2 and the third variation display region ME3. The display is switched to the first enlarged display state and the counter value is subtracted from “51” to “50”.

  Returning to the description of step S2102 in FIG. 55, if a negative determination is made in step S2102, that is, if it is not the variable display start timing, the process proceeds to step S2106. In step S2106, it is determined whether or not it is the transition timing to the fixed display of the pattern in the right working port display section DR and the fixed display of the main pattern in the second variation display area ME2. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the change end command related to the right working port display section DR (right working port 63a) is received from the main control device 162. If a negative determination is made in step S2106, the counter display control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, the process proceeds to step S2107.

  In step S2107, it is determined whether or not the current game number is the last game number (game number reaching the reference number) in which the value of the remaining number counter is “0” in the second normal game state or the fourth normal game state. judge. If a negative determination is made in step S2107, the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2108, it is determined whether or not the counter image CF is enlarged. If a negative determination is made in step S2108, the counter display control process is terminated as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S2108, the process proceeds to step S2109.

  In step S2109, reduced display processing of the counter image CF is executed. Specifically, a counter reduction display command is output to the display control device 710 and a sound effect for reduction display is output from the speaker unit 29. The display control device 710 returns the display state of the counter image CF to the normal display state based on the reception of the counter reduction display command.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 57 (b) → FIG. 57 (c), the counter image CF is moved from the first enlarged display state in accordance with the fixed display of the symbols in the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3. Switched to normal display state.

  Returning to the description of step S2107, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, that is, if it is time to shift to the final display in the final game number, the process proceeds to step S2110 to execute counter image non-display processing. Specifically, a counter non-display command is output to the display control device 710. The display control device 710 hides the counter image CF based on the reception of the counter non-display command.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 58 (a), a supplementary explanation will be given for the switching of the display in the case of shifting from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state.

  When the above-mentioned final game round is started in the second normal gaming state, the target image TF and the restraint image LF are enlarged and displayed from LV5 to LV6, as shown in FIG. 58 (a1) → FIG. 58 (a2). At the same time, the number of patterns constituting the constrained image LF decreases from “4” to “3”. Further, the counter image CF is switched from the normal display state to the second enlarged display state, and the value of the counter image CF is decreased from “1” to “0”. Thereby, it is notified that it is the last game round in the second normal gaming state. In the last game round, the display of the main symbol in the second variation display area ME is continued, while the sub symbol in the third variation display area ME3 is not displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 58 (a), the final game number corresponds to the special hit result. In this case, at the end timing of the variable display, the symbol combination corresponding to the special hit result is stopped and displayed in the second variable display area ME2, and the target image TF is displayed at the maximum in the center of the display screen 75a. In accordance with this, the restraint image LF and the counter image CF are not displayed, and a message indicating that the transition to the third normal gaming state is confirmed (character of “rush”) is displayed at a position adjacent to the target image TF. It will be.

  Returning to the description of step S2101 in FIG. 55, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if the game turn related to the current right operation port 63a corresponds to the jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S2111. In step S2111, it is determined whether or not it is the variable display start timing as in step S2102. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2111, the processing in steps S2103 to S2105 is executed. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2111, the process proceeds to step S2112.

  In step S2112, it is determined whether or not it is the timing for shifting to the final display, as in step S2106. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2112, the process advances to step S2113 to execute a jackpot result correspondence display process. Specifically, a jackpot result display command is output to the display control device 710 and a sound effect for the jackpot result is output from the speaker unit 29. Based on the reception of the jackpot result corresponding display command, the display control device 710 performs a display indicating that the transition to the third normal gaming state has failed. Specifically, the counter image CF is switched to an image obtained by dividing the counter image CF into a plurality of small pieces.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2112, the process proceeds to step S2114. In step S2114, it is determined whether it is the final display end timing. If it is not the final display end timing, the counter display control process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S2114, the process proceeds to step S2115. After the counter image non-display control process similar to that in step S2110 is executed in step S2115, the counter display control process ends.

  Here, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 58 (b), a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the switching of the display when a jackpot result (specifically, a jackpot result other than the 16R probability variable jackpot result) is obtained in the second normal gaming state.

  When the game times corresponding to the jackpot result are started in the second normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 58 (b1), the display mode on the display screen 75a is a special hit result or a missed result. The display mode is similar. For this reason, it is difficult to identify whether or not the jackpot result has been obtained from the display on the display screen 75a at the beginning of the game round.

  At the transition timing to the fixed display, as shown in FIG. 58 (b2), the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed in the second variation display area ME2 and the third variation display area ME3. Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (b2) → FIG. 58 (b3), the target image TF, the constrained image LF, and the counter image CF are each switched to an image that is broken into a plurality of small pieces, and these images have a fixed display time. It will be hidden by

  Here, in the gaming machine shown in the present embodiment, the game times related to the lower operation port 62a may be executed in the second normal gaming state, and the game times related to the lower operation port 62a are executed. Even in this case, the values of the game number counter and the remaining number counter are updated (subtracted). Hereinafter, the counter display control process corresponding to the lower working port will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Counter display control processing corresponding to the lower working port)
In the counter display control process corresponding to the lower working port, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a change start command related to the lower working port display unit DL (lower working port 62a) has been received from the main controller 162. If a positive determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2202. In step S2202, the remaining number counter is subtracted. In subsequent step S2203, a subtraction display process is executed.

  Specifically, a subtraction display command is output to the display control device 710 and a sound effect for subtraction display is output from the speaker unit 29. The display control device 710 decrements the value of the counter image CF by “1” based on the reception of the subtraction display command. In the game times related to the right operation port 63a, the value of the counter image CF is subtracted by “1” at the start timing of the symbol variation display in the second variation display region ME2 or the third variation display region ME3. On the other hand, in the game times related to the lower operating port 62a, during the game times related to the right operating port 63a, etc., regardless of the start timing of the variable display of the symbols in the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3. Suddenly, “1” is subtracted from the value of the counter image CF.

  Returning to the description of step S2201, if a negative determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2204. In step S2204, it is determined whether or not it is a timing to shift to the fixed display of the pattern in the lower working port display unit DL. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the change end command related to the lower working port display portion DL (lower working port 62a) is received from the main control device 162. If a positive determination is made in step S2204, the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2205, it is determined whether it is the last game round. If it is the last game time, the counter image non-display process is executed in step S2206, and then the display control process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2204, the process proceeds to step S2207. In step S2207, it is determined whether or not it is the final display end timing. If a negative determination is made in step S2207, the display control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2207 or a negative determination is made in step S2205, the process proceeds to step S2208. In step S2208, it is determined whether or not the game time related to the current lower operation port 62a corresponds to the jackpot result. If a negative determination is made in step S2208, the present display control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2208, the counter image non-display process is executed in step S2206, and then the display control process ends.

  When the game ball is being fired toward the right route in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the game operation progresses around the game operation related to the right operation port 63a, but the lower operation port The possibility that the game times related to 62a intervene cannot be denied. When the game turn related to the lower operation port 62a is executed, the value of the counter image CF is subtracted regardless of the change in the display state of the counter image CF, thereby making the subtraction less noticeable.

  In the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state, the symbols in the first variation display area ME1 are not displayed, and the interlocking target of the third variation display area ME3 is the second variation display area ME2. Under such circumstances, when a jackpot result is obtained in the game times related to the lower working port 62a, at the timing when the design corresponding to the jackpot result is confirmed and displayed on the lower working port display unit DL, The symbol combination corresponding to the detachment result is stopped and displayed in the second variation display area ME2. Accordingly, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed in the third variation display area ME3, and the cooperation target of the third variation display area ME3 is switched from the right operation port 63a to the lower operation port 62a. In accordance with this, the counter image CF is not displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal game state in which the game proceeds mainly from the first normal gaming state in which the game proceeds by the game times related to the lower operating port 62a to the game time mainly related to the game times related to the right operating port 63a. Immediately after shifting to the gaming state, there is a chance that the remaining number counter is subtracted by the gaming times related to the lower operation port 62a. Hereinafter, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 59, a supplementary description will be given of the display of the remaining number of times when the game times related to both the operation ports 62a and 63a are executed in parallel.

  For example, when the hold information related to the lower operation port 62a acquired in the first normal gaming state is carried over to the second normal gaming state through the first special gaming state, the transition to the second normal gaming state is made. Along with this, the game times related to the lower operation port 62a are started. In the example shown in FIG. 59, the number of pieces of hold information related to the lower operation port 62a is 4 at the timing of ta1 (specifically, the timing of transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state through the first special gaming state). In addition, the number of the hold information related to the right operation port 63a is four. In such a case, the game times related to the lower operation port 62a and the game times related to the right operation port 63a are started simultaneously with the transition to the second normal game state.

  The value of the counter image CF displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is “98” by subtracting each game amount from the initial value “100”. The variation display time of the pattern in the lower working port display unit DL is based on the variation display time of the pattern in the display unit DR for the right working port, that is, the variation display time of the pattern in the second variation display area ME2 and the third variation display area ME3. When the pattern is stopped and displayed on the lower working port display portion DL, the variation display of the pattern on the right working port display portion DR is still continued.

  In the right working port display section DR, the variation display of the pattern in the lower working port display section DL is started at the timing ta2 before the final display of the design is completed. As a result, the value of the counter image CF is subtracted from “98” to “97”. The right working port display section DR shifts to the second special game state at the timing ta3 when the fixed display time of the pattern corresponding to the special hit result has elapsed. At the timing of ta4 when returning from the second special gaming state to the second normal gaming state, both the holding information related to the lower operating port 62a and the holding information related to the right operating port 63a exist, so the timing of the ta4 Then, similarly to the timing of ta1, the game times related to the lower operation port 62a and the game times related to the right operation port 63a are started simultaneously.

  The value of the counter image CF displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is “95” by subtracting each game amount from “97”. The variation display time of the pattern in the lower working port display unit DL is based on the variation display time of the pattern in the display unit DR for the right working port, that is, the variation display time of the pattern in the second variation display area ME2 and the third variation display area ME3. When the pattern is stopped and displayed on the lower working port display portion DL, the variation display of the pattern on the right working port display portion DR is still continued.

  The change display of the pattern in the lower working port display unit DL is started at the timing ta5 before the final display of the design is finished in the right working port display unit DR. As a result, the value of the counter image CF is subtracted from “95” to “94”. At the timing ta6 when the final display of the pattern in the lower working port 62a is completed, the hold information related to the lower working port 62a is “0”. Thereafter, the value of the counter image CF is decremented by “1” every time a game turn related to the right operation port 63a is started.

  According to the first embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Since the second normal gaming state corresponds to the high probability mode, it can be expected that a big win result will be obtained as soon as possible. However, in some cases, the game may proceed without a big hit result. If the game progresses without a jackpot result and the support mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode despite the high expectation that the jackpot result will be, the player's game There is concern that the willingness will be significantly reduced. In this regard, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, when the number of games reaches the reference number without becoming a winning result in the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the reference number Upon arrival, the state shifts to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. The third normal gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state, and the game can be further advantageously advanced by upgrading to the third normal gaming state. By reducing the player with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation.

  Specifically, in the third normal gaming state, the number of game balls passing through the right operating port 63a increases due to a decrease in the opening frequency of the right operating port 63a, and the game ball passing through the right operating port 63a is increased. Most of them will enter the Shimodai winning entrance 341. In other words, although the winning probability hardly changes in the entire winning unit 70, the breakdown of winning destinations changes, and the number of winning prizes to the lower large winning opening 341 increases. The lower prize winning opening 341 is preferentially given so that the number of winning balls is larger than that of the right operation opening 63a. As a result, the benefits (principal balls) obtained by the same investment are increased from those in the second normal gaming state. It becomes. Specifically, as described above, in the second normal game state, the ball is gradually decreased as the game progresses, whereas in the third normal game state, the ball is gradually increased as the game progresses. The third normal gaming state is continued until at least the next jackpot result is reached, which is an opportunity to increase the number of balls.

  Further, in the third normal gaming state, the time required for the game times is slightly shortened as compared with the second normal gaming state, and even when the intervention in the second special gaming state continues. The occurrence of inconveniences such as slow game progression is suppressed.

  In the third normal gaming state, the opening of the lower major prize opening 341 is triggered by the ball entering the right operation port 63a. Here, although the winning probability to the right operating port 63a is lower than that in the second normal gaming state, the decrease in the winning probability is suppressed so as to sufficiently obtain the hold information related to the right operating port 63a. Yes. That is, inconveniences such as a decrease in the opening frequency of the lower large prize winning port 341 due to a decrease in the winning probability of the right operating port 63a are suppressed.

  In the case of a jackpot result during the third normal gaming state, most of them (excluding the 2R normal jackpot result and 16R probability variable jackpot result) will shift to the second normal gaming state, and the above-described relief function is excessive. Has been avoided. However, even if the player is demoted from the third normal gaming state, if the transition destination is the second normal gaming state, the player can transition to the third normal gaming state again. It can suppress that a player's game eagerness falls at a stretch.

  During the third gaming state, the right route is preferentially favored to the player as compared to the left route, so it is assumed that the launch destination of the game ball is mainly the right route. The game balls launched to the right route are prevented from entering the lower operation port 62a and enter the right operation port 63a. Here, the number of time reductions set when a jackpot result is obtained at the game times related to the right operating port 63a is based on the time reduction number set when a jackpot result is set at the game times related to the lower operation port 62a. However, it is biased so as to decrease overall. For this reason, if a jackpot result is obtained in the third normal gaming state, it will be demoted to the second normal gaming state as a trigger, but it will be preferentially reduced so that the number of short times to be reset is relatively small Yes. As a result, the hurdle for activating the relief function is lower in the second normal gaming state shifted from the third normal gaming state than in the second normal gaming state shifted from the first normal gaming state. This is a device for alleviating a decrease in gaming motivation associated with the end of the third normal gaming state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a 2R normal jackpot result is obtained in the third normal gaming state, the first normal gaming state is entered and 50 times is set as the short time, and in the third normal gaming state, When the 2R probability variation jackpot result is reached, the game is shifted to the second normal gaming state, and 50 times is also set as the number of time reductions. In each of these normal game states, the display effects on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, the BGM output from the speaker unit 29, etc. are shared, and the normal game state is identified from the appearance. Has become difficult. For this reason, it is unclear whether the game will be promoted to the third normal gaming state or demoted to the first normal gaming state until the set short time is consumed. In this way, even if the same number of times is set, the game state after the completion of the number of times is divided into advantageous / disadvantaged depending on the game state, thereby suppressing the monotony of the game and the degree of attention to the game It can contribute to improvement.

  As described above, in a configuration in which the gaming state can be changed to the advantageous side / disadvantage side by short-time digestion, the player's attention tends to be directed to the remaining number of times until the short-time digestion. In this way, if the number of possessed balls has greatly decreased under the circumstances where attention to games is increasing, it is assumed that it will easily lead to a decrease in gaming motivation due to increased attention to games. The Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, both the fourth normal gaming state that shifts with the 2R normal jackpot result as a trigger and the second normal gaming state that shifts with the 2R probability variable jackpot result as a trigger support the high-frequency support mode. Thus, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed by suppressing the decrease of the holding ball.

  In addition, in a configuration in which the game state changes due to short-time digestion, there is a concern that prolonged game progress in the process may hinder the impact from being reduced and exert an effect of increasing the attention to the game. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, such a concern can be suitably eliminated by smoothing the progress of the game up to the short-time digestion by shortening the variable display time or the like.

  Furthermore, in a configuration in which the gaming state is divided into advantageous / disadvantaged due to short-time digestion, an improvement in the degree of attention to the game can be expected, but the player's fatigue is reduced by extending the time until the short-time digestion. There is concern about the increase. In this respect, smoothing the progress of the game by the above configuration is advantageous in reducing the player's fatigue by suppressing the extension of the game times and shortening the process up to the short time. Moreover, it is also preferable for setting a certain number of times when the branching occurs.

  When the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state are compared, the former corresponds to the high probability mode, while the latter corresponds to the low probability mode. For this reason, as described above, even if it is difficult to identify which gaming state the display effects are made in common, it is possible to contribute to the diversification of the game by providing a difference in the chance of being a big hit result during the gaming state. it can.

  As described above, after the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state through the first special gaming state, the number of games executed in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit (number of times reduced). This shifts to a third normal gaming state that is more advantageous to the player. The upper limit includes “100 times”, “70 times”, “50 times”, “30 times”, and “10 times”. Depending on which upper limit is set, there is a difference in the transition hurdle to the third normal gaming state. Occurs. That is, a second normal gaming state that is easy to shift to the third normal gaming state or a second normal gaming state that is difficult to shift to the third normal gaming state occurs. In this way, by diversifying the second normal gaming state and providing a plurality of transition hurdles to the third normal gaming state, the monotony of the game in the normal gaming state is suppressed and the degree of attention to the game is improved. Can contribute.

  In order to strengthen the sharpness of the game while suppressing an excessive bias in the degree of advantage, it is preferable to increase the set upper limit to some extent to suppress the upper limit achievement probability. On the other hand, however, if the upper limit is too large, the game will be extended due to the diversification of the game due to the fact that the game until the upper limit is reached may be prolonged or the impression that it is virtually impossible to reach will become stronger. There is a concern that the effect of achieving this will not be demonstrated well. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, if the lottery mode in the second normal gaming state is defined to be a high probability mode, it is possible to suppress the frequent arrival of the upper limit even if the upper limit is lowered, Generation | occurrence | production of the said various inconvenience can be suppressed suitably.

  The transition (promotion) to the third normal gaming state is accompanied by a certain level of tension, and if such tension continues for an excessively long time, it causes a player's fatigue to increase. Therefore, in the second normal gaming state, an upper limit is set for the number of games executed based on the ball entering the right operation port 63a, and it is easy to enter the right operation port 63a in the second normal game state. With this configuration, the game can be advanced promptly. As a result, it is possible to alleviate the fatigue caused by it while improving the degree of attention to the game.

  Further, in the second normal gaming state, the game can be advanced promptly by adopting a configuration in which the symbol variation display time is shortened compared to the first normal gaming state. As a result, it is possible to alleviate the fatigue caused by it while improving the degree of attention to the game.

  In particular, according to the combination with the high-frequency support mode, it is performed with the expectation that the upper limit will be reached by adopting a configuration in which the variation display time is shortened in conjunction with the increase in the frequency of entering the right operation port 63a. The game in the second normal game state can be smoothly advanced. Thereby, the effect of said fatigue relaxation can be exhibited more suitably.

  It is realistic to reach the upper limit when the player enters the second normal gaming state for a player who has experienced shorting the number of times without winning the lottery for the transition to the first special gaming state in the fourth normal gaming state You can give the impression that it is something. With such a configuration, an improvement in the degree of attention to the game at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state can be expected.

  When a big hit result is obtained during the second normal gaming state, the state shifts to the first special gaming state, and after the first special gaming state is finished, the state returns to the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state. There will be a branching with the transition (demotion). Thereby, the monotonization of a game can be suppressed suitably. Further, even if a big hit result is obtained while the game is progressing toward the upper limit in the second normal game state, there is a possibility of returning to the second normal game state again. When returning to the second normal gaming state, it is possible to re-challenge the transition to the third normal gaming state by newly setting an upper limit. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in gaming motivation due to the transition to the first special gaming state.

  The transition conditions for shifting from the second normal gaming state to the most advantageous third normal gaming state are alleviated when the second normal gaming state results in a big hit and returns to the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state. Sometimes. If the hurdle to the third normal game state is lowered when the second normal game state is looped in this way, the effect of suppressing monotonization of the game by using a plurality of normal game states is preferably exhibited. be able to.

  As shown in the present embodiment, in the gaming machine whose transition from the second normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state (demotion) is a jackpot result, the second normal gaming state is set. The game is played in the hope that it will not result in a jackpot. Here, when the jackpot result is obtained, the condition may be demoted to the first normal gaming state, while the condition for returning to the second normal gaming state and shifting to the third normal gaming state may be relaxed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the player's gaming motivation from rapidly decreasing when a jackpot result is obtained in the second normal gaming state.

  In addition, when a winning result is obtained in the second normal gaming state, the hurdle to the third normal gaming state is not necessarily lowered, but a tension is given to the game by providing a case where it is raised. Can do.

  In a configuration that steps up in the order of the first normal gaming state → the second normal gaming state → the third normal gaming state, the jackpot result is obtained in spite of the transition to the second normal gaming state, so that the third normal gaming state is entered. In the case where an event such as the shift of the game goes away frequently occurs, it tends to be an impression that the game in the second normal gaming state is extended. This can be a hindrance in improving the degree of attention to the game. Here, as shown in the present embodiment, when a big hit result is obtained during the second normal gaming state, the rate of hurdle reduction is set higher than the rate of hurdle raising, so that a plurality of normal gaming states It is possible to make the step-up of the gaming state simple while using the above.

  When a game ball is being fired on the left route in the first normal game state, a big hit lottery is executed based on the ball entering the lower operation port 62a. If the lottery results in a big win and the transition to the second normal gaming state is made, it is easy to set a transition condition (number of times reduced) that is relatively difficult to establish. On the other hand, after the transition to the second normal gaming state, the game ball is fired on the right route, so that the main entry destination of the game ball becomes the right operation port 63a. When the jackpot lottery is executed based on the entrance to the right operation port 63a, the jackpot result is obtained, and when returning to the second normal gaming state through the first special gaming state, a transition condition (which is relatively easily established) It is easy to set the number of times. With such a configuration, the above-described various technical ideas can be suitably realized while avoiding complication of the configuration by using the existing configuration in the gaming machine.

  In the entrance unit 70 shown in the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball flowing down the right route to pass on the shutter 331 (the first specific area SE1) of the right operation entrance part 63 is frequently supported. This is longer than the sum of the display change time and the fixed display time of the picture in the through gate display section DS in the mode. For this reason, during the high frequency support mode, most of the game balls that have arrived at the entering unit 70 (the right operation entrance unit 63) enter the right operation port 63a. That is, the game ball launched to the right route during the high-frequency support mode flows into the right operation port 63a, and the ball entering the lower major prize winning port 341 is suppressed. On the other hand, the required time is shorter than the sum of the variable display time and the fixed display time in the low frequency support mode. For this reason, during the low frequency support mode, even when the right working ball entering part 63 is continuously switched to the receiving state, some of the game balls that have reached the shutter 331 pass through the right working ball entering part 63. Head to the grand prize opening 341. In this way, while the high frequency support mode suppresses the entrance to the lower major prize opening 341, while the low frequency support mode increases the number of entries to the lower major prize opening 341, the game progresses. A clear difference can be made.

  Here, in order to differentiate each support mode, in order to reduce the game balls (spills) that pass through the right operation port 63a and go to the lower prize winning port 341 during the low frequency support mode, the above-described variation display time and final display are performed. You can shorten the time. However, if these times are simply shortened, launch / stop is performed in accordance with the result displayed on the through-gate display section DS (to advance the game so as to be advantageous to the player). This makes it difficult to provide the through gate display portion DS. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the fluctuation display time and the fixed display time in the through-gate display unit DS from becoming extremely short while suppressing the spilling. Thereby, the improvement of the attention degree to a game is suitably realizable.

  In the configuration in which the entry to the lower major prize opening 341 is preferentially given over the entry to the right operation opening 63a, it is assumed that the player performs the game in anticipation of entering the lower major prize opening 341. Is done. In such a configuration, it is not preferable that excessive entry into the lower large winning opening 341 causes a loss of game balance. In this respect, since it is possible to avoid the movement of the game ball toward the lower large prize winning opening 341 while shortening the time required for the right-hand acted ball entering portion 63 to be received as much as possible, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. . Then, shortening the time for the acceptance state is advantageous for encouraging the player to expect the game ball to flow down toward the lower prize winning opening 341, and the time for the acceptance state becomes longer. It can suppress suitably that the expectation of the ball entering the lower large winning opening 341 is lost.

  The lower variable winning device 65 is opened by making the passage length of the intermediate passage portion 323 connecting the right operation ball entering portion 63 and the lower variable winning device 65 shorter than the passage length related to the first specific region SE1. If the game ball that has reached the right-hand actuated entrance part 63 can pass through the right-hand actuated entrance part 63 under the circumstances, it is easier to give the player an impression that it can enter the first entrance part immediately, This can contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the behavior of the game ball that has reached the shutter 331 of the ball entry portion 63 and the right operation ball entry portion 63.

  Since most of the game balls that have flowed into the entrance unit 70 can enter either the right operation opening 63a or the lower major prize opening 341, one large entry is made by combining the right operation opening 63a and the lower major prize opening 341. It can appear as if the department is built. It is advantageous in improving the player's satisfaction to make it appear as if a game ball has been entered by the large ball club. Here, by making the passage length of the intermediate passage portion 323 shorter than the passage lengths of the passage portions (specific areas SE1, SE2) constituted by the respective shutters, both the ball entering portions (the right operation port 63a and the lower large portion). The sense of unity of the winning opening 341) can be strengthened. Thereby, the said impression can be strengthened.

  In this type of large pitching part, when the main pitching destination is switched by the right operation port 63a / the lower major prize opening 341 depending on the situation, the situation where the entrance to the lower major prize opening 341 should not occur. As a result, the game hall is more likely to suffer a disadvantage as a result of the ball entering the lower large winning opening 341. In consideration of such circumstances, a communication passage (intermediate passage portion 323) is provided between the lower major prize winning port 341 and the right operation port 63a to delay the movement of the game ball toward the lower major prize winning port 341. There is technical significance in thinning out. If the intermediate passage 323 is lengthened to some extent, these functions can be suitably exerted, but on the other hand, the sense of unity between the two ball entry portions (the right operation port 63a and the lower large prize winning port 341) is reduced. There is a concern that the impression that it is a large entry club will be thin. In this respect, as shown in the present embodiment, the shutters of both the ball entering portions (the right operation port 63a and the lower large prize winning port 341) are each inclined downward in the left direction, and the intermediate passage portion 323 intersects the inclination direction. As a configuration extending in the vertical direction, the positions of the ball entering portions (the right operation port 63a and the lower large winning port 341) are offset up and down, so that both the ball entering portions (the right operation are operated while increasing the passage length of the intermediate passage portion 323). A reduction in the sense of unity between the mouth 63a and the lower prize winning mouth 341) can be reduced.

  The game ball that has flowed into the discharge passage provided in the middle position of the intermediate passage portion 323 is discharged as it is from the game area PE and is prevented from reaching the lower prize winning opening 341. In this way, a part of the game balls that have passed through the right-hand actuated ball entering portion 63 is discharged from the game area PE without flowing into the lower major prize opening 341, so that the game that has flowed into the intermediate passage portion 323. Compared with the configuration in which the sphere faces the out port 68, it is possible to reinforce the impression that it is the above-described one large entrance portion.

  In a configuration in which the lower prize winning opening 341 is preferentially given to the player rather than the right action opening 63a, the game ball is expected to pass through the right action opening 63a and go to the lower prize winning opening 341. Thus, it is assumed that the launch operation is executed, and the player's attention is easily directed to the movement of the game ball from the right operation port 63a to the intermediate passage portion 323. Here, in a configuration in which a speed reduction part (projection part 335a, 336a) is provided in the passage part (first specific region SE1) formed by the shutter 331 and the required time for passage is extended, the speed reduction part is connected to the intermediate passage part 323 side. By being arranged so as to be biased toward the player, it is possible to easily follow the movement of the game ball at a place where the degree of attention of the player is easy to face. Thereby, it can contribute to the improvement of the further attention degree.

  In the present embodiment, after shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state through the first special gaming state, the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, so that the second normal gaming state is reached. The state shifts to a third normal gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the state. Although diversification of games in this way can suppress the monotonization of the game and contribute to an increase in the degree of attention to the game, it is assumed that the complexity of the game will easily cause confusion for the player. There is a concern that this may hinder the effect of improving the attention level. In this regard, in the second normal gaming state, an image indicating the target gaming state (target image TF) and a process up to the target (counter image CF) are displayed, thereby suppressing the occurrence of the inconvenience. The effect of improving the degree of attention to can be suitably exhibited. In particular, by displaying the target image TF and the counter image CF together and suppressing the display of the target image TF alone, the current gaming state is changed from the target image TF displayed in the second normal gaming state. 3 The chance of being misunderstood as a normal gaming state can be reduced.

  With respect to the counter image CF indicating the remaining number of games (stroke), the counter value is updated according to the progress of the game times, so that it can be clearly shown that the transition to the third normal gaming state is approaching. On the other hand, the target image TF indicating the target third normal gaming state is also enlarged in accordance with the progress of the game times, thereby indicating that the transition to the third normal gaming state is approaching. Can be suitably strengthened.

  The target image TF is enlarged as the game times progress, whereas the basic size of the counter image CF is unified except for the final game times. For this reason, the area ratio between the target image TF and the counter image CF changes as the game times progress, and the target object is displayed in a more emphasized manner. With such a configuration, even if a large amount of information is provided to the player at the same time, it can be suitably suppressed from causing a player's confusion.

  When the target image TF and the counter image CF are displayed on the display screen 75a, the occupied area on the display screen 75a increases due to the increase in the information displayed. In order to improve the degree of attention to information, it is effective to enlarge the display area of information, but the occupied area is further increased by expanding the display area. This is assumed to be a factor of pressing an area for displaying other information on the display screen 75a. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, for the target image TF indicating the target, the counter image CF indicating the stroke is displayed while appealing that the target image TF is approaching the target by increasing the size of the display area. By appealing the update of information by temporarily expanding the display area, the occupied area on the display screen 75a is preferably prevented from becoming excessively large in order to exhibit the notification function.

  In the second normal gaming state, the counter value is updated as the game times progress. Here, if the configuration is such that the target image TF is enlarged when the counter value reaches a predetermined value, relevance can be given to the two pieces of information. With such a configuration, even when the player is gazing at the counter image CF, the player can be notified of the timing at which the target image TF should be gazed, and the size of the target image TF can be reduced. You can reduce the chances of missing changes.

  The target image TF is configured such that the display range before enlargement is included in the display range after enlargement, and the amount of movement of the line of sight of the player who is gazing at the target image TF in the process of approaching the upper limit is reduced. be able to. This is advantageous in reducing the chance of missing a change in the target image TF. In this way, if the configuration reduces the chance of missing, it is not necessary to excessively increase the amount of change in the size of the target image TF, and even when the upper limit is set for the size of the target image TF. The number of changes in the size of the target image TF can be suitably increased.

  The target image TF shown in the present embodiment is accompanied by a restraint image LF, and the number of pictures constituting the restraint image LF is changed in accordance with the enlargement of the target image TF. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that the enlarged display is overlooked even when the difference between the display ranges before and after the enlargement of the target image TF is small. This is preferable for diversifying the change mode of the display range.

  When changing the display range of the target image TF, it is preferable to secure some change time in order to appeal the change. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the display range is changed at the start of the game times as shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to use the change display time of the pattern of the game times as the change time of the display range of the target image TF. A practically preferable configuration can be realized.

  The challenge to the third normal gaming state may be terminated due to a jackpot result or the like during the second normal gaming state. Here, if the display range is avoided based on the fact that it is a jackpot result or the like even though the display range is supposed to be changed, it becomes a foothold and this The end of the challenge will be exposed as soon as possible. In this regard, in the case where the display range of the target image TF is changed at the start of the game times as described above, the occurrence of the inconvenience can be suppressed by changing the display range regardless of the determination result.

  In the configuration shown in this feature, the fact that a predetermined jackpot result is not reached (for example, a missed result or a special winning result) until the upper limit is reached in the second normal gaming state is a transition to the third normal gaming state. It is a condition. Here, when the jackpot result is an opportunity to increase the number of balls, it is assumed that the lottery result other than the jackpot result is displayed with emphasis and causes a player to feel uncomfortable. That is, there is a concern that the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game will not be exhibited well due to the diversification of the game. Therefore, in the final game round, the lottery result is not displayed in the relatively large third display area ME3, and the lottery result is displayed only in the relatively small first display area. Can be suppressed.

  In game times other than the last game time, the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed in both the second variation display area ME2 and the third variation display area ME3. As described above, in the prior game round, to use both the second fluctuation display area ME2 and the third fluctuation display area ME3, the relationship between the two fluctuation display areas is determined by the player until the final game round. In other words, there is a technical significance that even if the symbol in the third variation display area ME3 is not displayed, it can be suppressed that it becomes a factor that confuses the player.

  Further, if the symbols in the third variation display area ME3 are not displayed in advance, for example, a place and time for displaying a still image, a moving image, or the like that suggests transition to the third normal gaming state in the third variation display area ME3. Can be suitably secured. In particular, in the present embodiment, the symbols of the third variation display area ME3 are not displayed at the start of the final game round, and the variation display of these symbols is avoided. In this way, by avoiding that the symbols in the third variation display area ME3 are suddenly hidden during the variation display, the uncomfortable feeling when the symbols are hidden can be reduced.

  Note that, as shown in the present embodiment, if the symbol of the third variation display area ME3 is not displayed, for example, the symbol in the third variation display area ME3 remains changed or stopped at the previous game round. It is avoided that the displayed symbol is left as it is. This is preferable for preventing the player from being confused due to a difference in the display of the second variation display area ME2 and the third variation display area ME3.

  Incidentally, in the process of going from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state, symbol combinations that do not correspond to the jackpot result are repeatedly stopped and displayed. It is cruel to a player who is playing a game in the hope that such a display will be overly conspicuous, resulting in a jackpot result. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the area ratio with respect to the third variation display area ME3 is changed by enlarging the target image TF, and it is possible to urge the player's attention to be directed to the target image TF. This is preferable for suppressing the occurrence of the above inconvenience. In addition, suggesting the transition to the third normal gaming state using the target image TF instead of hiding the symbol of the third variation display area ME3 compensates for the lack of information due to the symbol hiding. Also preferred above.

<Second Embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31 (b2), the variable display time table that is referred to in the second normal gaming state when a lost result or a special hit result is obtained is displayed in the second normal game state. All game times in the gaming state are common. In this variable display time table, the variable display time is set shorter than that in the first normal game state in order to facilitate the progress of the game in the second normal game state. Specifically, when the number of the hold information related to the right operation port 63a is “0”, the change display time is “13 sec”, and when the number of the hold information related to the right operation port 63a is “1”, the change is displayed. When the display time is “8 sec” and the number of the hold information related to the right operation port 63a is “2”, when the variable display time is “4 sec” and the number of the hold information related to the right operation port 63a is “3” or more Is defined so that the variable display time is “1 sec”.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the setting of the variable display time of the pattern in the right working port display section DR is different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, as the variable display time table referred to in the second normal gaming state, the first variable display time referred to until the game times executed in the second normal gaming state reaches the reference number of times. Table and a second variation display time table that is referred to when the reference count is reached. When comparing the first variation display time table and the second variation display time table, the latter is more than the former. The difference is that a difference is provided so that the variable display time becomes longer.

  Specifically, in the first variable display time table, when the number of hold information related to the right operation port 63a is “0”, the variable display time is “13 sec”, and the number of hold information related to the right operation port 63a is “1”. ", The variable display time is" 8 sec ", and when the number of hold information related to the right operation port 63a is" 2 ", the variable display time is" 4 sec ", and the number of hold information related to the right operation port 63a is In the case of “3” or more, the variable display time is defined to be “1 sec”. On the other hand, in the second variable display time table, when the number of hold information related to the right operating port 63a is “0”, the variable display time is “13 sec”, and the number of hold information related to the right operating port 63a is In the case of “1”, the variable display time is “8 sec”, and in the case where the number of the hold information related to the right operation port 63a is “2”, the change display time is “5 sec” and the hold information related to the right operation port 63a is stored. When the number is “3” or more, the variable display time is defined to be “5 sec”.

  Further, the configuration relating to the setting of the fixed display time of the pattern in the right working port display section DR is also different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, a first fixed display time that is set until the game times executed in the second normal gaming state reaches the reference number, and a second fixed display time that is set when the reference number is reached. Are different. Specifically, the first fixed display time is “1 sec” as in the first embodiment, whereas the second fixed display time is longer (more specifically, “2 sec”). ).

  That is, in the present embodiment, the execution time of the roaring effect using the target image TF in the final game round and the notification time indicating the transition to the third normal gaming state may be made longer than those in the first embodiment. It is possible. In the configuration that becomes a chance to greatly increase the possession ball by shifting from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state, earning time to inform the player that the player has shifted to the third normal gaming state, This is preferable for improving the degree of attention to the game and the satisfaction of the player.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment, although a device for earning a notification execution time indicating the transition to the third normal gaming state is made, the specific configuration is the second embodiment. It is different from the form. Hereinafter, the device will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. In the present embodiment as well, as in the first embodiment, the variable display time table that is referred to in the second normal gaming state when a lost result or a special winning result is obtained is the second normal game. It is configured to be common to any game times in the game state.

  At the timing of tb1 when the last game round in the second normal gaming state is started, the display level of the target image TF is LV6, and the number of counter images CF is “0”. At the timing of tb2 when the pattern in the right operation port 63a is confirmed and displayed in the final game round, the target image TF is displayed at the maximum in the center of the display screen 75a, and the constraint image LF and the counter image CF are not displayed. Thereby, the transition notification to the third normal gaming state is started.

  In the example shown in FIG. 60, the final game times correspond to special hit results. For this reason, it shifts to the second special game state at the timing of tb3 when the confirmation display is completed. The transition notification on the display screen 75a is continued during the second special game state. During the transition notification, the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the second variation display area ME2 on the display screen 75a are maintained in the stopped state.

  At the timing of tb4 when the second special gaming state ends and the state shifts to the third normal gaming state, the display of the variation of the pattern on the right working port display unit DR is started. That is, the first game round in the third normal gaming state is started. At this timing, the symbol variation display in the second variation display region ME2 is started, but the target image TF is still displayed on the display screen 75a, and the symbol display in the third variation display region ME3 is avoided. .

  The first game times in the third normal gaming state also correspond to the special winning result, and immediately after the transition to the third normal gaming state, the state shifts to the second special gaming state (timing tb6). The above-described target image TF is maintained until the second special gaming state ends, and is erased at the timing of tb7 when returning to the third normal gaming state. Then, on the display screen 75a, a character image or the like corresponding to the third normal gaming state is displayed instead of the target image TF. In the third normal gaming state, the number of prize balls acquired in the third normal gaming state is displayed. The display of the number of winning balls includes the number of winning balls acquired while the target image TF is displayed in the third normal gaming state.

  Even if the final game number corresponds to the result of losing, the display of the target image TF until the second game time in the third normal game state is started, that is, the transition to the third normal game state. Notification continues.

  In addition, when a jackpot result is obtained at the first game number in the third normal gaming state, an image corresponding to the jackpot result is substituted for the target image TF at the timing when the final display of the first game number is started. And so on.

  As described above, the transition notification started in the second normal gaming state is continued so as to straddle at least the first game time in the third normal gaming state, thereby suppressing the delay of the game progress and reducing the notification time. It can be suitably secured.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the first embodiment, a value displayed in the remaining number display area CE (hereinafter referred to as a counter value) is updated by subtracting “1” each time a game is started, and the counter value is updated. In this configuration, the game state shifts to the third normal game state after the value becomes “0”, that is, the number of remaining games until the shift to the third normal game state is notified. In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the updating of the counter value displayed in the remaining number display area CE is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, a configuration relating to notification of the remaining number of games in the present embodiment will be described.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of subtraction levels having different degrees when subtracting the value of the remaining number display area CE are provided. Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 61A, the counter value in the remaining number display area CE is subtracted from the counter value 1 (LV1) for subtracting “1” for each game number, and the counter in the remaining number display area CE. Subtraction level 2 (LV2) for subtracting “2” per game number, subtraction level 3 (LV3) for subtracting “3” for the remaining number display area CE per counter, and counter for remaining number display area CE Four subtraction levels 4 (LV4) for subtracting “4” per game number are provided, and the remaining number display area CE is referred to in the MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143 with reference to the set subtraction level. The counter value is subtracted.

  When the subtraction level is LV1, as in the first embodiment, the timing at which the symbol variation display is started in the second variation display region ME2 or the third variation display region ME3, that is, the right operation port 63a. The counter value is decremented by “1” at the timing when the game turn related to (see FIG. 61B). On the other hand, when the subtraction level is LV2 to LV4, the timing at which the symbol variation display is started in the second variation display region ME2 or the third variation display region ME3, that is, the game times related to the right operation port 63a. The counter value is subtracted in accordance with the subtraction level at the timing when the operation starts. For example, when the subtraction level is LV2, the timing at which the symbol variation display is started in the second variation display region ME2 or the third variation display region ME3, that is, the timing at which the game turn related to the right operation port 63a is started. Thus, “2” is subtracted from the counter value (see FIG. 61B).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the initial value of the counter value (hereinafter referred to as the initial display count) when the counter image CF is displayed in accordance with the transition to the second normal gaming state is the main controller 162. There are a case where it is determined by the notification / production control device 143 so as to coincide with the above-mentioned reference number of times, and a case where it is determined by the notification / production control device 143 so as to be larger than the reference number of times. The notification / production control device 143 determines the subtraction pattern of the counter value, that is, the subtraction level switching pattern in conjunction with the determination of the initial display count at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state. Hereinafter, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 62, the relationship between the reference count, the initial display count, and the subtraction pattern will be described.

  For example, when the reference count is “100”, the initial display count displayed is “100”, and the subtraction pattern in this case is that the subtraction level of all the first to 100th game times is LV1. That is, the counter value is decremented by “1” at any game time. This subtraction pattern is the same as in the first embodiment.

  When the reference count is “70”, the initial display count displayed is “100” or “70”. When the initial display count is “70”, that is, when the reference count and the initial display count match, the subtraction level for all the first to 70th game times is LV1. That is, the counter value is decremented by “1” at any game time. In contrast, when the initial display count is “100”, that is, when the initial display count exceeds the reference count, a plurality of subtraction patterns are provided, and which subtraction pattern is selected by lottery. The Each of these subtraction patterns is configured such that the subtraction level is raised and the subtraction speed is increased when the number of started game times reaches a preset number.

  For example, as the subtraction pattern set when the reference count is “70” and the initial display count is “100”, the first to 50th subtraction levels are LV1, and the 51st to 65th subtraction levels are LV2. A subtraction pattern in which the 66th to 70th subtraction levels are LV4 and a subtraction pattern in which the first to 60th subtraction levels are LV1 and the 61st to 70th subtraction levels are LV2 are provided.

  When the reference count is “50”, the initial display count displayed is “100”, “70”, or “50”. When the initial display count is “50”, that is, when the reference count and the initial display count match, the subtraction level of all the first to 50th game times is LV1. That is, the counter value is decremented by “1” at any game time. On the other hand, when the initial display count is “70” and “100”, that is, when the initial display count exceeds the reference count, a plurality of subtraction patterns are provided. Whether to do it is decided by lottery. Each of these subtraction patterns is configured such that the subtraction level is raised and the subtraction speed is increased when the number of started game times reaches a preset number.

  For example, as a subtraction pattern set when the reference count is “50” and the initial display count is “70”, the first to 30th subtraction levels are LV1, and the 31st to 50th subtraction levels are LV2. And a subtraction pattern in which the first to 40th subtraction levels are LV1, and the 41st to 50th subtraction levels are LV3.

  As the subtraction pattern set when the reference count is “50” and the initial display count is “100”, the first to tenth subtraction levels are LV1, the eleventh to fortieth subtraction levels are LV2, 41. Subtraction pattern in which the first to 50th subtraction level is LV3, the first to 20th subtraction level is LV1, the 21st to 40th subtraction level is LV2, and the 41st to 50th subtraction level is LV4. A pattern and a subtraction pattern in which the first to 30th subtraction levels are LV1, the 31st to 40th subtraction levels are LV2, and the 41st to 50th subtraction levels are LV3 are provided.

  When the reference count is “30”, the initial display count displayed is “70”, “50”, or “30”. When the initial display count is “30”, that is, when the reference count and the initial display count match, the subtraction level of all the first to 30th game times is LV1. That is, the counter value is decremented by “1” at any game time. On the other hand, in the subtraction pattern when the initial display number is “50” times and “70” times, the subtraction level is raised when the number of game times started reaches a preset number, The subtraction speed is increased.

  For example, as the subtraction pattern set when the reference number is “30” and the initial display number is “50”, the first to tenth subtraction levels are LV1, and the eleventh to thirtyth subtraction levels are LV2. And a subtraction pattern in which the first to 20th subtraction level is LV1, and the 21st to 30th subtraction level is LV3.

  As the subtraction pattern set when the reference count is “30” and the initial display count is “70”, the first to tenth subtraction levels are LV1, and the eleventh to thirty subtraction levels are LV3. A subtraction pattern is provided.

  The initial display number displayed when the reference number is “10” is “10”, and the subtraction pattern in this case is that the subtraction level of all the first to tenth game times is LV1. That is, the counter value is decremented by “1” at any game time. This subtraction pattern is the same as in the first embodiment.

  In this way, if the subtraction level is changed during the second normal gaming state and the subtraction speed is increased, the initial display count becomes a large value (for example, 100 times or 70 times). Even if it is a case, it can suppress suitably that the expectation with respect to transfer to a 3rd normal gaming state falls.

  Further, it is possible to give the player an impression that the progress speed of the game in the second normal gaming state is changing. This is preferable for suppressing monotonization of the game in the second normal gaming state.

  According to the configuration described in detail above, after the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state through the first special gaming state, the number of games in the second normal gaming state is set to the reference number ("upper limit"). (Equivalent)), it shifts to the third normal gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state. In the second normal game state, a counter value is displayed as numerical information correlated with the remaining game number in the remaining number display area CE of the display screen 75a. The player can predict the remaining until the transition to the third normal gaming state by looking at the counter value displayed on the display screen 75a. Here, the counter value subtraction level (corresponding to “update state”) is provided with LV1 to LV4, and the subtraction speed of the counter value can be changed by switching these subtraction levels. By such a switching function, a rhythm change occurs in the game progress until the transition to the third normal gaming state, and the monotonization of the game can be suitably suppressed.

  The initial value (initial display count) of the counter image CF is set to a value larger than the product of the reference count and the one-time update value at the minimum subtraction level (LV1), and the subtraction level of the subtraction level is estimated more than the reference count. It is possible to suitably increase the degree of freedom of setting.

  In the configuration in which the second normal gaming state ends when the reference number of times is reached, the opportunity to switch the subtraction level depends on the reference number of times. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately update the count value by determining in advance the game times for switching the subtraction level according to the reference number.

  As shown in the present embodiment, if the value to be subtracted at once is increased by switching the subtraction level, the counter value update speed can be increased toward the third normal gaming state. Thereby, a player's attention degree with respect to transfer to a 3rd normal game state can be improved suitably. In this embodiment, when compared with the same reference number, the number of updates (the number of subtractions) is the same, and by providing a difference in the update width in one update, the sharpness of the count value update is enhanced. it can.

<Fifth embodiment>
In the fourth embodiment, the rhythm of the game in the second normal gaming state is changed by adopting a configuration in which a plurality of counter values of the counter image CF can be subtracted in one game time. Here, the remaining number display area CE in which the counter image CF is displayed is larger than the second variable display area ME2 and smaller than the third variable display area ME3. In the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress overlooking of the counter value update, etc. by strengthening the cooperation between the symbol display and the counter value update in the third variable display area ME3 having relatively high visibility. This is one of the features. In the following, with reference to FIGS. 63 to 64, the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the fourth embodiment. In this embodiment, LV1 to LV2 are set as the subtraction levels, and other subtraction levels are omitted.

  When the subtraction level is LV1, as shown in the timing chart of FIG. 63, the counter value is decremented by “1” per game time. In this case, at the timing tc1 when the variable display of the pattern is started on the right working port display unit DR, the main symbol variation display in the second variation display region ME and the sub symbol variation in the third variation display region ME3. Display is started, and the counter value of the counter image CF is subtracted by “1” accordingly. Then, at the timing tc2 when the variable display of the pattern is stopped (determined display is started) in the right working port display section DR, the main symbol variation display and the third variation display in the second variation display area ME. The sub symbol variation display in the region ME3 is completed.

  On the other hand, when the subtraction level is LV2, as shown in the timing chart of FIG. 64, the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3 have different display patterns. Specifically, at the timing td1 when the variable display of the pattern is started on the right working port display unit DR, the main symbol variation display in the second variation display region ME and the sub symbol in the third variation display region ME3. And the counter value of the counter image CF is decremented by “1”. This is the same as when the subtraction level is LV1.

  At the timing td2 when the variation display of the pattern in the display portion DR for the right working port and the variation display of the symbol in the second variation display area ME2 are continued, the symbol combination corresponding to the detachment result is displayed in the third variation display area ME3. Stopped display. That is, the symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the third variation display area ME3. Then, the symbol variation display in the third variation display region ME3 is resumed at the timing td3 when the same length of time as the fixed display time has elapsed from the timing td2. The counter value of the counter image CF is decremented by “1” when the variable display is resumed.

  At the timing td4 when the pattern is stopped and displayed (determined display) on the right working port display section DR, the symbol combination corresponding to the special hit result is stopped and displayed in the second variation display area ME2, and the third variation display area is displayed. The symbol combination corresponding to the special hit result is stopped and displayed at ME3.

  In the present embodiment, the subtraction timing when a plurality of counter values are subtracted in one game time is distributed during one game time. In other words, in the fourth embodiment, a plurality of counter values are subtracted at the start timing of the game times, whereas in this embodiment, the start timing of the game times and the middle of the game times. The counter value is decremented by "1" at the timing. By temporarily stopping the symbol variation display in the third variation display area ME3 during the game operation, and restarting the symbol variation display in the third variation display region ME3 at the subtraction timing during the game operation, Opportunities for missed subtraction can be reduced. Thus, the subtraction rhythm can be changed by increasing the number of subtractions, rather than increasing the number of subtractions at a time.

  If the count value update is linked to the symbol display (fluctuation → stop), the counter image CF is made small so that the update is missed while coexisting with other information on the display screen 75a. Can reduce the chances In particular, since the third variation display area ME3 disposed in the center of the display screen 75a is a place where the player is likely to pay attention, the above effect can be obtained by interlocking with the image of the third variation display area ME3. It is more suitably exhibited.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of the components to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration that is a combination of the embodiments, or a part or all of the configurations may be applied in combination.

  (1) In each of the above embodiments, in the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the number of possessed balls is reduced (slightly decreased) as the game progresses. It is also possible to change this so that the number of possessed balls increases as the game progresses even in the second normal gaming state. However, in providing a difference in the degree of advantage that the latter is more advantageous between the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state, for example, the increasing speed of the ball in the second normal gaming state is the third It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the speed is kept lower than the rate of increase of the ball in the normal gaming state.

  (2) In each of the above embodiments, when the time reduction is completed without a jackpot result in spite of the shift to the high probability mode, the third normal that is more advantageous to the player including the meaning of the remedy is included. It was set as the structure which transfers to a gaming state. In view of such a relief function, it is sufficient that the third normal gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. For example, the ball has a ball compared to the second normal gaming state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the decrease rate of is slow. In addition, when the configuration in which the ball is increased in the second normal game state is used together as shown in the modification (1) described above, the increase rate of the ball in the third normal game state is the second normal game. You may comprise so that it may become lower than a state.

  (3) In each of the above embodiments, for example, when the result is a 16R probability variation jackpot result B, the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode are supported without going through the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. Although it was set as the structure which transfers to the 3rd normal game state of this, it is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is necessary to pass through the second normal gaming state to shift to the third normal gaming state regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

  (4) In each of the above-described embodiments, the number of times required to function as a hurdle for shifting to the third normal gaming state, that is, the number of games in which the support mode is maintained in the high-frequency support mode is made different depending on the type of the jackpot result. However, it is also possible to make the number of time reductions constant regardless of the type of jackpot result. For example, in any case of a 2R probability variation jackpot result, a 6R probability variation jackpot result, and a 16R probability variation jackpot result, the number of games maintained in the high frequency support mode may be unified to be N times. When such a change is made, it is preferable to unify the number of games maintained in the high-frequency support mode when shifting to the fourth normal gaming state via the 2R normal jackpot result or the 8R normal jackpot result.

  (5) In each of the above-described embodiments, when a jackpot result is obtained during the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode, the normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode can be shifted. In other words, the third normal gaming state can be terminated with the jackpot result. In addition to this, or instead of this, it may be configured to shift to the low probability mode when the number of games executed after shifting to the high probability mode reaches a predetermined number (for example, M times). In this case, by increasing the number of games in which the high probability mode is maintained to be higher than the number of games in which the high frequency support mode is maintained (number of time reductions), the third normal game state with a limited number of times through the second normal game state Can be realized.

  (6) In each of the above-described embodiments, the probability variation jackpot result based on the range of the number of time reductions set when the probability variation jackpot result is obtained based on the winning to the lower operation port 62a and the winning to the right actuation port 63a. Discrimination is made so that the range of the number of hourly times set in any case is “0” to “100”, and the distribution of the number of hourly times is biased to the side where the latter is less than the former As a result, the superiority of the right operating port 63a over the lower operating port 62a was secured. Expectation that the transition hurdle to the third normal gaming state is lower than before the probability variation jackpot result is reached when the probability variation jackpot result is shifted to the second special gaming state again in the second special gaming state, that is, the third In order to increase the expectation that the number of games required for shifting to the normal gaming state will be reduced, the maximum value of the number of short times set when the probability variation jackpot result is obtained based on the winning to the right operation port 63a is lowered. You may comprise so that it may become less than the maximum value of the number of time savings set when it becomes a probability variation jackpot result based on the winning to the opening | mouth 62a. It should be noted that when the probability variation jackpot result is based on the winning to the right operation port 63a, the number of time reductions may be “0”, that is, the transition to the third normal gaming state may be determined.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the number of time reductions is not shortened in a part of the case where the probability variation jackpot result is obtained in the second normal gaming state, but the probability variation jackpot result is obtained in the second normal gaming state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of time reductions is shortened in all cases. For example, the first time reduction number (for example, 50 times) set when a probability variation jackpot result is obtained based on a ball entering the lower working port 62a is a probability variation jackpot result based on a ball entering the right working port 63a. It may be specified to be larger than the second short time count (for example, 30 times) set in the case of In order to make it appear as if the number of time reductions remaining at the time when the probable big hit result is obtained in the second normal gaming state is shortened when returning to the second normal gaming state, it is based on the entrance to the right operation port 63a. It is also possible to set the number of time reductions set in the case of a probable big hit result to “0” times.

  (7) In each of the above-described embodiments, the third normal gaming state is configured to shorten the picture variation display time in the right working port display portion DR in comparison with the second normal gaming state. 3 Although the game progress in the normal game state is facilitated, the present invention is not limited to this. Compared to the second normal gaming state, the third normal gaming state is configured so that the display time of the variation of the pattern in the display portion DR for the right operation port is longer, or the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state are It is also possible to configure so that the variation display time of the pattern in the right working port display section DR has the same length.

  (8) The number of time reductions set when the 2R normal jackpot result is obtained in the second normal gaming state and the time reduction number set when the 2R probability variation jackpot result is both “50” times. In this case, the game state is displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 or the speaker unit 29 in any of the case of returning to the second normal game state through the special game state and the case of shifting to the fourth normal game state (demotion). It may be configured so that it is difficult or impossible to identify whether the player is in the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state, with the same effect or the like suggesting In this way, if the gaming state is made indefinite, when the number of time reductions becomes “0”, the state shifts (promotes) to the third normal gaming state which is more advantageous than the second normal gaming state, or the second A branch of whether to shift (demotion) to the first normal gaming state, which is disadvantageous to the normal gaming state, occurs. Thereby, the tension at the time of digesting the short time set set at the time of a game state transition can be raised suitably.

  (9) In each of the above embodiments, the lottery result based on the winning to the through gate 66 is displayed on the through gate display portion DS of the main display unit 81, but the present invention is not limited to this. is not. The lottery result based on winning through the through gate 66 may be displayed on another display unit such as the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75.

  (10) In each of the above-described embodiments, the upper variable winning device 64 and the through gate 66 are disposed on the upstream side of the right working ball entering portion 63 on the right route, but the present invention is not limited to this. The upper variable winning device 64 and the through gate 66 can be arranged on the downstream side of the right operation ball-entry portion 63 on the right route.

  (11) In each of the embodiments described above, the design fixed display time in the lower working port display unit DL is configured to be shorter than the design fixed display time in the right working port display unit DR. It is not limited. For example, it may be configured such that the fixed display time of the pattern in the display unit for the right working port DR is shorter than the fixed display time of the pattern in the display unit for the lower working port DL. It is good also as a structure which aligns the fixed display time of the pattern in the display part DL for operation openings.

  In the above embodiment, in any normal gaming state, the fixed display time of the pattern in the lower working port display unit DL and the right working port display unit DR is not changed. It is good also as a structure which changes the fixed display time of the display part DL for lower operation ports, and the display part DR for right operation ports according to a kind. For example, the fixed display time may be shortened in the order of the first normal gaming state → the second normal gaming state → the third normal gaming state.

  (12) In each of the above embodiments, the lower variable prize-winning device 65 is opened in the second special game state, and the right side operation is entered on the flow path (right route) toward the lower variable prize-winning device 65. Although the ball portion 63 is provided, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration corresponding to the lower variable prize-winning device 65 can be disposed on the flow path toward the right operation ball entering portion 63.

  (13) In each of the above embodiments, the protrusions 335a and 336a are provided as the decelerating means for decelerating the game ball that rolls on the shutter 331 of the right operation ball entry portion 63. However, the protrusions 335a and 336a pass through the shutter 331. The specific configuration for earning the time required for the operation is arbitrary. For example, the upper and lower surfaces of the shutter 331 may be provided with irregularities so that the flow path meanders up and down.

  Further, although the protrusions 335a and 336a are arranged to be biased to the downstream part (on the intermediate passage part 323 side) in the upstream passage part 322, the protrusions 335a and 336a are arranged in the upstream part and the middle stream part in the upstream passage part 322. It is also possible to arrange them.

  (14) In each of the above-described embodiments, the right-hand actuated ball entry portion 63 and the lower variable prize-winning device 65 are arranged so as to be shifted up and down, and the ball path in the ball entry unit 70 is cranked up and down. It is also possible to arrange the right operation ball entering portion 63 and the lower variable winning device 65 in a line.

  (15) In each of the above embodiments, the intermediate passage portion 323 serving as the “communication passage portion” is branched at a midway position, and a part of the game balls passing through the intermediate passage portion 323 is transferred to the lower variable winning device 65. However, it is not always necessary to form the above-described branch in the intermediate passage portion 323.

  In addition, the game balls that have flowed out from the midway position of the ball passage through the intermediate passage portion 323 are discharged from the game area PE without going through the out port 68, but these game balls are guided to the out port 68. It is good as composition.

  (16) The right-hand actuated ball entry portion 63 shown in the above embodiment is configured to be switched between the open state and the closed state when the shutter 331 slides in the front-rear direction, but is not limited thereto. For example, the shutter may be switched between an open state and a closed state by sliding in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction. Note that the shutter 331 does not necessarily have to be a slide type, and may be a rotary type.

  Similarly, the shutter 345 of the lower variable winning device 65 is switched to the open / closed state by sliding in the front-rear direction, but is not limited thereto. For example, the shutter may be switched between an open state and a closed state by sliding in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction. Note that the shutter 345 is not necessarily slidable and may be pivotable.

  In addition, the upper variable winning device 64 shown in each of the above embodiments is configured to be switched between the open state and the closed state when the shutter 315 rotates in parallel with the front surface of the game board 60, but is not limited thereto. It is not a thing. For example, the shutter may be switched to an open state / closed state by rotating in a direction intersecting the front surface of the game board. Note that the shutter 315 is not necessarily pivotable and can be slidable.

  (17) In each of the above-described embodiments, the time required for the game ball to pass over the shutter 331 of the right-hand actuating entrance 63 is the interval time during which the shutter 331 is kept closed in the high-frequency support mode. Longer than the interval time during which the shutter 331 is maintained in the closed state in the low frequency support mode, the predetermined time may be arbitrarily changed.

  (18) In each of the above embodiments, the transition to the high probability mode is determined by entering the advantageous ball portion 314 provided in the upper variable winning device 64. It is possible to omit the probability variation jackpot result and determine the transition to the high probability mode.

  (19) In each of the above embodiments, the lottery based on the entry into the lower operation port 62a is configured not to give a special winning result. However, the lottery based on the entry into the lower operation port 62a is changed. It is good also as a structure which becomes a special hit result in.

  (20) In the first embodiment, the number of remaining short times, that is, the number of remaining games until the transition to the third normal gaming state is displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. The remaining number of times displayed on the display screen 75a is not necessarily matched with the remaining short time number, and may indicate the remaining short time number.

  In this case, for example, it is difficult to identify from the display whether “100 times”, “70 times”, “50 times”, “30 open”, or “10 times” is set as the number of time reductions. This can improve the interest of the game. When such display is performed, for example, when the executed game times are “10 times”, “30 times”, “50 times”, and “70 times”, the state shifts to the third normal game state. By executing the display effect indicating that there is a possibility, monotonization of the game during the second normal gaming state can be suppressed.

  For example, if “100 times” is displayed as the display corresponding to the number of time reductions in the second normal gaming state where the time reduction number is “50 times”, the actual time reduction number is “10 times”, “30 times”, “ The possibility of “50 times”, “70 times”, or “100 times” remains. In this case, for the corresponding display, for example, after the number of executed game times reaches a specific number, the number to be subtracted multiple times during one game time is increased, and “0 times” is displayed as the display at the time of short-time digestion. It is also possible.

  (21) In each of the above embodiments, there is a difference in the variable display time when the number of holds is “3” or more between the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. Even when the number of holds is “3” or more, the variable display time can be shared.

  (22) In the case of a big hit result in the second normal gaming state, if the newly set short time number is smaller than the remaining short time number, notify the player to that effect. It may be configured to clearly indicate that the third normal gaming state is approaching.

  (23) In the above embodiments, the first normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state are differentiated by combining the support mode and the lottery mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For each normal gaming state, the specific configuration is arbitrary as long as a difference that is advantageous to the player is ensured in the order of the first normal gaming state <the second normal gaming state <the third normal gaming state. . For example, as the lottery mode, a medium probability mode having a higher probability of winning the result than the low probability mode and a lower probability of winning the result than the high probability mode is provided, and the first normal gaming state is the low probability mode and the second normal game. Differentiation may be achieved such that the state corresponds to the medium probability mode and the third normal gaming state corresponds to the high probability mode. Even in this case, a configuration is adopted in which a transition is made to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode when the reference number of gaming times has passed without causing a jackpot result despite the transition to the medium probability mode. Thus, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play. In the case of such a configuration, as long as the above-described advantage-disadvantage relationship can be ensured, it is arbitrary whether each normal gaming state is associated with the high-frequency support mode or the low-frequency support mode. .

  (24) In each of the above embodiments, the fixed display time of the pattern in the lower working port display unit DL is shorter than the fixed display time of the pattern in the right working port display unit DR. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. It is also possible to make the pattern fixed display time in the lower working port display section DL longer than the pattern fixed display time in the right working port display section DR. In addition, the fixed display time of the pattern in the lower working port display unit DL can be set to the same length as the fixed display time of the pattern in the right working port display unit DR.

  (25) In each of the above embodiments, the fixed display time of the pattern in the lower working port display unit DL is defined to be the same in the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something. For example, a difference may be provided so that the fixed display time in the first normal gaming state <the fixed display time in the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state <the fixed display time in the third normal gaming state.

  In addition, the fixed display time of the pattern in the right working port display unit DR is not necessarily unified in the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state. For example, the fixed display time in the first normal game state <first A difference may be provided so that the determined display time in the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state <the determined display time in the third normal gaming state.

  In addition, the difference may be provided for both the fixed display time related to the lower working port display part DL and the fixed display time related to the right working port display part DR, or the difference may be provided only in one.

  (26) In each of the above-described embodiments, the lower operation port 62a is displayed during the second normal gaming state in consideration of the pattern change display time and the fixed display time in the lower operation port display unit DL and the right operation port display unit DR. Although the minimum number of time reductions in the second normal gaming state is defined so that all the hold information related to is digested, it is not limited to this. If all the game times related to the lower operating port 62a (not including the additional portion) can be digested during one game time related to the right operating port 63a, the number of reserves related to the lower operating port 62a for the minimum number of times It is also possible to make the number one more than the upper limit.

  (27) In each of the above embodiments, the number of time reductions is subtracted regardless of whether the game times related to the lower operation port 62a and the game times related to the right operation port 63a are executed in the second normal game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of time reductions is subtracted only when the game times related to the right operation port 63a are executed.

  (28) In FIG. 31 in each of the above embodiments, the variable display time in the case of a special hit result or a missed result (specifically, a completely missed result not corresponding to reach display) is shown. For example, in the second normal gaming state In the fourth normal gaming state, it is also possible to unify the variable display time when a jackpot result is obtained.

  (29) In each of the above embodiments, the game times related to the right working port display unit DR are special hit results, and the game times related to the lower working port display unit DL are results of losing, When the pattern change display on the display unit is performed in parallel, the pattern change display on the lower operation port display unit DL is forcibly performed at the timing when the design confirmation display on the right operation port display unit DR is executed. Is terminated automatically. In such a configuration, it is not always necessary to make the variation display time of the lower working port display unit DL shorter than the variation display time of the right working port display unit DR in the second normal gaming state. It may be configured such that all the hold information related to the lower working port display portion DL is digested before reaching the third normal gaming state after reaching the short time set at least in the second normal gaming state. For example, the variation display time of the lower working port display unit DL may be longer than the variation display time of the right working port display unit DR, or the same length as the variation display time of the right working port display unit DR. Also good.

  (30) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the detection sensor 391d attached to the right operation ball entry portion 63 is within the effective time, the information from the detection sensor 391d is read by the main controller 162, and during the effective time If not, the information is not read by the main controller 162, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the sensor is read regardless of whether it is valid or not, and when it is valid, a privilege is given based on the detection of the entry, but it is not valid Even if it is a case where a ball is detected, it is good also as a structure which does not provide a privilege.

  (31) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, the sum of the variable display time and the fixed display time of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS is the effective time of the detection sensor 391. Although it is configured to match the over amount, it is possible to set the sum of the change display time and the fixed display time of the pattern in the through gate display unit DS to be longer than the over time of the effective time of the detection sensor 391. It is.

  (32) In each of the above embodiments, the upper variable winning device 64 that is opened in the first special game state reduces the number of balls entering the right operation port 63a during the first special game state. In order to reinforce such a function, the through gate 66 may also be disposed downstream of the upper variable winning device 64.

  (33) In each of the above embodiments, when transitioning from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state, the hold information relating to the lower operation port 62a stored at the beginning of the transition to the second normal gaming state is Although it was configured to be completely digested, it is not limited to this. As long as the hold information related to the lower operation port 62a can be reduced by the transition to the third special game state, the specific configuration is arbitrary.

  (34) In each of the above embodiments, the game times related to the lower operation port 62a and the game times related to the right operation port 63a are simultaneously advanced. However, it is not always necessary to simultaneously advance the game times. For example, the game times executed in the order in which the hold information is acquired may be switched between the game times related to the lower operation port 62a and the game times related to the right operation port 63a. In addition, the game times that are executed so that the game times related to the right operating port 63a are preferentially executed over the game times related to the lower operating port 62a, and the games related to the lower operating port 62a / games related to the right operating port 63a. It is good also as a structure switched by times.

  (35) In each of the above embodiments, the second variation display region ME2 and the third variation display region ME3 are provided on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 as the symbol display region corresponding to the right working port display unit DR. However, a display device provided with a display area corresponding to the second variable display area ME2 and a display device provided with a display area corresponding to the third variable display area ME3 may be provided individually.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the first variable display area ME1 (lower working port display portion DL) / second variable display area ME2 is selected as the variable display area to be linked to the third variable display area ME3 depending on the situation. Although it is set as the structure switched to (display part DR for right working ports), it is not limited to this. Even if a variable display region linked to the first variable display region ME1 (lower operating port display portion DL) and a variable display region linked to the second variable display region ME2 (right operating port display portion DR) are provided, respectively. Good.

  (36) In each of the above embodiments, the value of the counter image CF is displayed in a countdown manner as the game progresses. However, this is changed and the value of the counter image CF is displayed in a countup manner as the game progresses. It is also possible. In the case of such a configuration, for example, when the value of the counter image CF becomes, the transition to the third normal gaming state is determined when the display of the counter image CF is started, or when the transition to the second normal gaming state is performed. It is preferable to teach in the middle of the second normal gaming state.

  (37) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is taught that the second normal gaming state is ended by setting the value of the counter image CF to “0” in the second normal gaming state. It may be configured to teach that the second normal gaming state is ended by setting the value of the counter image CF to a predetermined value other than “0”. For example, the reference number set by the main controller 162 is “100” and the initial display number in the counter image CF is “100”, and the value of the counter image CF is decremented by “1” every game time. The reference count set by the main controller 162 is “70”, the initial display count in the counter image CF is “100”, and the value of the counter image CF is “1” for each game. In the former, the value of the counter image CF when the second normal gaming state ends is “0”, and the latter is the counter of the counter image CF when the second normal gaming state ends. It is also possible to configure the value to be “30”. In such a configuration, even if the initial display count is “100”, the transition to the third normal gaming state may occur before “0” times (“30” times). It is a case where the process of this is long, and the fall of the game willingness resulting from it can be suppressed suitably.

  (38) In each of the above-described embodiments, the value of the counter image CF is updated (subtracted) at the timing at which game times are started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is determined at game times. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the value of the counter image CF is updated (subtracted) at the timing of shifting to display.

  (39) In each of the above embodiments, the remaining number of games until the transition to the third normal gaming state is notified on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the speaker unit 29 may output a sound indicating the remaining number of games (for example, “30 remaining times”), or may depend on the number of light emitters that are emitting light in a lamp unit that includes a plurality of light emitters. It is good also as a structure which displays the number of remaining games.

  (40) In each of the above embodiments, display of the target image TF and the counter image CF is started during the first special game state (during ending) when shifting from the first special game state to the second special game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which display of the target image TF and the counter image CF is started during the second normal gaming state (for example, the transition timing or the timing immediately after the transition).

  (41) In each of the above embodiments, after the transition to the second normal gaming state, the target image TF and the restraint image LF are continuously displayed until at least the transition to the other normal gaming state is confirmed. However, this does not deny the configuration in which the target image TF and the restraint image LF are not displayed during the second normal gaming state. For example, when performing a display effect that may end the second normal game state in a part of the second normal game state, the target image TF and the constraint image LF are not displayed during the display effect. It is good also as a structure.

  (42) In each of the above-described embodiments, the display of the target image TF corresponding to the third normal gaming state is continued when the second normal gaming state shifts to the third normal gaming state, and the second normal gaming is performed. Although the target image TF is shared in the state and the third normal gaming state, it is not limited to this. An image indicating the third normal gaming state may be separately provided during the third normal gaming state.

  (43) In each of the above embodiments, the target image TF (corresponding to “second information”) and the counter image CF (corresponding to “first information”) are displayed on the display screen 75a. A configuration in which information is displayed on separate display devices is also possible.

  (44) In each of the embodiments described above, when the main controller 162 performs a lottery based on the hold information, the operation port display units DL and DR in the main display unit D simultaneously with the lottery (specifically immediately after the lottery). However, the present invention is not limited to this. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Prior to the lottery, it is also possible to start the pattern variation display on the operation port display portions DL and DR and the symbol variation display on the variation display areas ME1 to ME3 on the display screen 75a.

  (45) In each of the above embodiments, the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state are configured so that it is difficult to identify which game state is the display content on the display screen 75a. The present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to configure the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state so as to be easily identified. For example, in the second normal gaming state, a target image indicating the third normal gaming state is displayed as a target image on the display screen 75a, and in the fourth normal gaming state, a target image indicating the first normal gaming state is displayed as a target image on the display screen 75a. It is also possible to have a configuration for displaying.

  Note that a target image indicating the first normal gaming state is displayed in the second normal gaming state, and the target image is displayed in the third normal gaming in the middle of the second normal gaming state or in the final game round of the second normal gaming state. It is good also as a structure switched to the target image which shows a state.

  (46) In the second normal gaming state, when the holding information related to the lower operating port 62a is stored and the holding information related to the right operating port 63a is not stored, the game times related to the lower operating port 62a The symbol variation display in the third variation display area ME3 may be started in accordance with the start. That is, when only the hold information relating to the lower operation port 62a exists, the cooperation target of the third variation display area ME3 can be set to the lower operation port 62a. In such a configuration, the pattern is displayed on the lower working port display unit DL without starting the game turn related to the right working port 63a while the symbol variation display is being performed in the third variation display area ME3. Is stopped and displayed, the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result of the game times related to the lower operation port 62a is stopped and displayed in the third variation display area ME3, and the symbol variation display is displayed in the third variation display area ME3. If the game turn related to the right operating port 63a is started during the process, the linked object is switched to the right operating port 63a side while maintaining the symbol variation display (without stopping display). When the design is stopped and displayed on the working port display section DR, it is also possible to stop and display the design that is being displayed in the third variation display area ME3.

  (47) In each of the above embodiments, the size of the target image TF is changed as the game progresses. However, the specific configuration for changing the display mode of the target image TF as the game progresses is described. Is optional. For example, the color, brightness, and shape of the target image TF can be changed instead of or in addition to the configuration for changing the size. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is preferable that the display mode is changed so as to easily attract the player's attention by approaching the third normal gaming state.

  (48) In each of the above-described embodiments, the process (process, route) until the transition to the third normal gaming state is made by updating the count value of the counter image CF during the second normal gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the process up to the third normal gaming state, that is, the start to the goal may be displayed by a status bar, and the current location (current position in the status bar) may be displayed by an arrow or the like that can move along the status bar ( Map display function).

  (49) In each of the above embodiments, the display of the target image TF and the display of the counter image CF in the information display area IE are performed in parallel. However, one of the target image TF and the counter image CF is displayed. It is also possible to hide the other under the circumstances.

  (50) In each of the above embodiments, the size of the target image TF and the size of the counter image CF are changed at the same timing, but a configuration in which these timings are shifted is also possible.

  (51) The display of the target image TF displayed in the second normal gaming state is continued from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state, and the target image TF is continuously displayed even in the third normal gaming state. It is good also as composition to do. In such a configuration, the display position of the target image TF may be common to the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state, and the attached restraint image LF may not be displayed in the third normal gaming state. preferable.

  (52) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the counter image CF is displayed on the display screen 75a in the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and the counter value of the counter image CF is displayed. The remaining game times in the second normal game state is suggested by subtracting and displaying as the game times are digested. The subtraction speed of the counter value may increase in the middle of the second normal gaming state, and changing the rhythm of the game can contribute to the suppression of the monotony of the game. In this way, in changing the game rhythm by changing the subtraction speed, instead of or in addition to the above configuration, the counter value subtraction speed may be reduced in the middle of the second normal gaming state. . For example, the subtraction level after the executed game times have reached a predetermined number of times may be configured to be lower than the subtraction level until the predetermined number of times is reached.

  (53) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the display mode of the counter image CF is the same regardless of the set subtraction level, but the display mode of the counter image CF is changed according to the switching of the subtraction level. It may be changed. For example, in the case of subtraction level 1, the color of the counter image CF is white, in the case of subtraction level 2, the color of the counter image CF is blue, in the case of subtraction level 3, the color of the counter image CF is green, and the subtraction level 4 In this case, the color of the counter image CF may be changed so that the color of the counter image CF becomes red. The specific configuration for realizing the change in the display mode of the counter image CF is arbitrary. For example, the brightness of the counter image CF may be changed, or the counter image CF is accompanied by an effect display. The color or the like of the effect may be changed above.

  (54) The display mode (for example, color and brightness) of the counter image CF shown in the fourth and fifth embodiments may be switched according to the subtraction level. For example, the color of the counter image CF may be switched so that the subtraction level is white when it is LV1, blue when it is LV2, green when it is LV4, and red when it is LV5. In the configuration in which the subtraction speed is changed by switching the subtraction level of the count value, the change is easily overlooked because the display area of the count value becomes small. Therefore, if the display mode of the count value is switched according to the subtraction level as shown in the present modification, it is possible to reduce the chance of overlooking that the subtraction level has changed without making the display area darkly enlarged. it can.

  (55) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines that release a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or games in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a big hit when a ball enters, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  Furthermore, a pachinko machine and a slot machine that have a take-in device and start rotation of the reel by operating a start lever after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device The present invention can also be applied to game machines in which and are fused.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a characteristic configuration extracted from the above-described embodiment will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
The following group A of features is: “A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball to the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball fired from the game ball launching means enters the entrance part provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1) "In the gaming machine of the type described above, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game." It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature A1. Special information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a predetermined acquisition condition (entrance to the operation port 62a) is established;
Acquisition information storage means (reserved ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the lottery process is executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
A pattern display means (for example, a main display unit 81) having a display section (for example, a display section DR for the operation port) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display section;
Prior to the determination being performed by the determination unit or based on the determination being performed by the determination unit, the variable display of the pattern is started in the pattern display unit, and a stop result corresponding to the determination result When the variable display of the picture is terminated as one game round, the graphic of each game round is variably displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means for controlling the pattern display means (for example, a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed from the normal game state to the player based on the fact that the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game time control means. Special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (for example, opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to
As the normal gaming state, a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low-frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. The second normal gaming state corresponding to the probability mode and the high-frequency support mode) and the third normal gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (the third normal state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode) Gaming state), and
Second normal gaming state transition means for executing a transition from the gaming state to the second normal gaming state upon completion of the special gaming state (processing for transitioning to the second normal gaming state is performed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
When the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state, the upper limit setting means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) sets the upper limit (number of times reduced) in the second normal gaming state. Function to set the number of hours)
When the first upper limit is set as the upper limit by the upper limit setting means, the gaming state is changed from the second normal gaming state based on the fact that the number of games in the second normal gaming state has reached the first upper limit. When the upper limit setting means sets a second upper limit greater than the first upper limit as the upper limit, the number of games in the second normal gaming state is set to the second upper limit. The third normal gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state based on the fact that the state has reached (transition to the third normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) A game machine having a function of

  According to the feature A1, after the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state, the player is further increased when the number of games executed in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit. It shifts to the 3rd normal gaming state advantageous to. The upper limit includes the first upper limit and the second upper limit, and a difference occurs in the transition hurdle to the third normal gaming state when the first upper limit is set and when the second upper limit is set. That is, a second normal gaming state that is likely to shift to the third normal gaming state and a second normal gaming state that is difficult to shift to the third normal gaming state are generated. In this way, by diversifying the second normal gaming state and providing a plurality of transition hurdles to the third normal gaming state, the monotony of the game in the normal gaming state is suppressed and the degree of attention to the game is improved. Can contribute.

  Note that the configuration shown in this feature is “a game board in which a game area is formed, and special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball enters a start ball entering section provided in the game area; , Acquisition information storage means capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and determination whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information Prior to the determination being performed by the determination unit, the determination is performed by the determination unit, or a determination unit that sequentially includes a display unit that has a display unit and is capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display unit. Based on this, the pattern display means starts the variable display of the pattern, displays the stop result corresponding to the result of the determination, and ends the variable display of the pattern as one game time, Get A game times control means for controlling the picture display means so that a variable display of the picture of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the information storage means, and a judgment result by the judgment means is predetermined judgment information. A special game in which the game state is shifted to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the game time control means stops and displays the picture corresponding to the determination result. A state transition means, wherein the normal game state is a first normal game state, a second normal game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state, and a game that is further game than the second normal game state And a third normal gaming state advantageous to the user is provided, and the gaming state is switched to the first normal gaming state, the second normal gaming state, and the third normal gaming state according to the gaming situation. Gaming machine characterized in that it comprises a stage. "And may be.

Feature A2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (holding information) when a ball enters a starting ball entering portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition function), and
Acquisition information storage means (reserved ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the lottery process is executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
A pattern display means (for example, a main display unit 81) having a display section (for example, a display section DR for the operation port) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display section;
Prior to the determination being performed by the determination unit or based on the determination being performed by the determination unit, the variable display of the pattern is started in the pattern display unit, and a stop result corresponding to the determination result When the variable display of the picture is terminated as one game round, the graphic of each game round is variably displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means for controlling the pattern display means (for example, a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed from the normal game state to the player based on the fact that the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game time control means. Special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (for example, opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to
As the normal gaming state, a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low-frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. The second normal gaming state corresponding to the probability mode and the high-frequency support mode) and the third normal gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (the third normal state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode) Gaming state), and
Second normal gaming state transition means for executing a transition from the gaming state to the second normal gaming state upon completion of the special gaming state (processing for transitioning to the second normal gaming state is performed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
When the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state, the upper limit setting means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) sets the upper limit (number of times reduced) in the second normal gaming state. Function to set the number of hours)
When the first upper limit is set as the upper limit by the upper limit setting means, the gaming state is changed from the second normal gaming state based on the fact that the number of games in the second normal gaming state has reached the first upper limit. When the upper limit setting means sets a second upper limit greater than the first upper limit as the upper limit, the number of games in the second normal gaming state is set to the second upper limit. The third normal gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state based on the fact that the state has reached (transition to the third normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) A game machine having a function of

  According to the feature A2, after the transition from the first normal game state to the second normal game state through the special game state, the player is further increased when the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the upper limit. It shifts to the 3rd normal gaming state advantageous to. The upper limit includes the first upper limit and the second upper limit, and a difference occurs in the transition hurdle to the third normal gaming state when the first upper limit is set and when the second upper limit is set. That is, a second normal gaming state that is likely to shift to the third normal gaming state and a second normal gaming state that is difficult to shift to the third normal gaming state are generated. In this way, by diversifying the second normal gaming state and providing a plurality of transition hurdles to the third normal gaming state, the monotony of the game in the normal gaming state is suppressed and the degree of attention to the game is improved. Can contribute.

Feature A3. A variable pitching portion (upper variable prize-winning device 64) that can be switched between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a closed state in which the game cannot be entered;
An opening / closing control means (a function of executing an opening / closing process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable pitching portion between the closed state and the open state when the special game state is established;
The opening / closing control means sets the opening / closing mode of the variable pitching portion in the special gaming state to a predetermined mode when the special gaming state shifts to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the second upper limit. And a means for setting the opening / closing mode of the variable pitching portion in the special gaming state as the predetermined mode when the game state shifts to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the first upper limit. The gaming machine according to feature A2.

  As shown in the feature A1 and the like, according to the configuration in which a difference is provided in the transition hurdle to the third normal gaming state, monotonization of the game can be suitably suppressed. However, if the hurdle can be specified from the opening / closing mode (behavior) of the variable pitching portion in the special game state before the transition to the second normal game state, the degree of attention to the game in the second normal game state Concerns that will decline. In this regard, as shown in the present feature, the opening / closing mode of the variable pitching portion can be changed by making the opening / closing mode of the variable pitching portion the same regardless of whether the first upper limit or the second upper limit is set. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of inconvenience that the upper limit is specified in advance.

  Feature A4. The second normal gaming state is a gaming state (a normal game corresponding to a high probability mode) that is more likely to have a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information than the first normal gaming state when the determination is performed by the determination unit. The gaming machine according to feature A2 or feature A3, wherein

  In order to strengthen the sharpness of the game while suppressing an excessive bias in the degree of advantage, it is preferable to increase the set upper limit to some extent to suppress the upper limit achievement probability. On the other hand, however, if the upper limit is too large, the game will be extended due to the diversification of the game due to the fact that the game until the upper limit is reached may be prolonged or the impression that it is virtually impossible to reach will become stronger. There is a concern that the effect of achieving this will not be demonstrated well. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the game state (high probability mode) is likely to result in a result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, it is possible to suppress frequent occurrence of the upper limit even if the upper limit is lowered. Therefore, the occurrence of the various inconveniences can be suitably suppressed.

  Feature A5. The feature state A2 to feature feature A4 is characterized in that the second normal game state is a game state in which it is easier to enter the starting entrance part than the first normal game state. Game machines.

  The transition (promotion) to the third normal gaming state is accompanied by a certain level of tension, and if such tension continues for an excessively long time, it causes a player's fatigue to increase. Therefore, in the second normal gaming state, an upper limit is set for the number of games executed based on the entrance to the starting entrance part, and it is easy to enter the starting entrance part in the second normal gaming state. With this configuration, the game can be advanced promptly. As a result, it is possible to alleviate the fatigue caused by it while improving the degree of attention to the game.

  Feature A6. The second normal gaming state is a gaming state configured such that a variable display period (variable display time) of the pattern for each game time is shorter than the first normal gaming state. Thru | or the game machine as described in any one of characteristics A5.

  The transition (promotion) to the third normal gaming state is accompanied by a certain level of tension, and if such tension continues for an excessively long time, it causes a player's fatigue to increase. Therefore, in the second normal game state, the upper limit is set for the game times executed based on the entrance to the starting entrance part, and in the second normal game state, the pattern is more variable than in the first normal game state. By adopting a structure in which the display period is shortened, the game can be advanced promptly. As a result, it is possible to alleviate the fatigue caused by it while improving the degree of attention to the game.

  In particular, in the combination with the feature A5, a second normal operation that is performed in anticipation of reaching the upper limit by adopting a configuration in which the variable display period is shortened in conjunction with an increase in the frequency of entering the starting entrance portion. The game in the gaming state can be smoothly advanced. Thereby, the effect of said fatigue relaxation can be exhibited more suitably.

Feature A7. As the normal gaming state, a fourth normal gaming state (low probability mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state and is more disadvantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state. And the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode)
A fourth normal gaming state transition means for shifting to the fourth normal gaming state through the special gaming state (a function to shift to the fourth normal gaming state by using the normal jackpot result in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
When the number of games in the fourth normal game state reaches a specified number (for example, 50), the first normal game state transition means (the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 has a high frequency) shifts to the first normal game state. And a function to shift to the first normal gaming state after the support mode ends)
The upper limit setting means is configured such that at least one of the first upper limit and the second upper limit is less than the specified number of times, wherein the upper limit setting means is any one of features A2 to A6 Gaming machine.

  For a player who has reached the specified number of times without winning the lottery for transition to the special game state in the fourth normal game state, the upper limit is realistic when the player enters the second normal game state. Can give the impression that there is. With such a configuration, an improvement in the degree of attention to the game at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state can be expected.

Feature A8. As the normal gaming state, a fourth normal gaming state (low probability mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state and is more disadvantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state. And the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode)
The predetermined determination information includes first determination information (information corresponding to a probability variation jackpot result) and second determination information (information corresponding to a normal jackpot result),
Means for transitioning the gaming state to the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state when the judgment result by the judging means in the second normal gaming state is a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information. When,
Means for transitioning the gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state through the special gaming state when the determination result by the determining means in the second normal gaming state is a determination result corresponding to the second determination information. And a gaming machine according to Feature A7.

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, when a winning result is obtained during the second normal gaming state, the special gaming state is entered. After the special gaming state is completed, a branch occurs between returning to the second normal gaming state and shifting to the fourth normal gaming state (demotion). Thereby, the monotonization of a game can be suppressed suitably.

  Feature A9. The upper limit setting means is a case where the determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the first determination information before reaching the upper limit set by the upper limit setting means, and the special gaming state is passed through the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to Feature A8, further comprising means for resetting an upper limit in the second normal gaming state when entering the second normal gaming state.

  According to the feature A9, even when the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained while the game is progressing toward the upper limit in the second normal gaming state, the state again returns to the second normal gaming state. May return. When returning to the second normal gaming state, it is possible to re-challenge the transition to the third normal gaming state by newly setting an upper limit. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in gaming motivation due to the transition to the special gaming state.

  Feature A10. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A9, wherein a difference between the first upper limit and the second upper limit is smaller than the first upper limit.

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, even when the game number corresponding to the first upper limit is reached, even if the game state does not shift to the third normal game state, the game number corresponding to the second upper limit is reached from there. It can suppress that the feeling of expectation for reaching | attaining 2nd upper limit falls because the hurdle until it becomes low. Thereby, even if it is a case where a some hurdle is used, when the 1st hurdle does not occur, it can suppress suitably that game willingness falls.

  Feature A11. When the second upper limit is set as the upper limit by the upper limit setting means, there is provided means for performing a predetermined notification at the game times corresponding to the first upper limit and the game times corresponding to the second upper limit. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A9, wherein:

  As shown in the feature A2 and the like, when a plurality of hurdles for shifting to the third normal gaming state are provided, for example, even if the first upper limit is not reached, the third upper limit is set at the third upper limit. By suggesting that there is a possibility of shifting to the normal gaming state, the degree of attention to the game can be improved.

Feature A12. Special information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a predetermined acquisition condition (entrance to the operation port 62a) is established;
Acquisition information storage means (reserved ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the lottery process is executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
A pattern display means (for example, a main display unit 81) having a display section (for example, a display section DR for the operation port) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display section;
Prior to the determination being performed by the determination unit or based on the determination being performed by the determination unit, the variable display of the pattern is started in the pattern display unit, and a stop result corresponding to the determination result When the variable display of the picture is terminated as one game round, the graphic of each game round is variably displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means for controlling the pattern display means (for example, a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed from the normal game state to the player based on the fact that the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game time control means. Special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (for example, opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to
As the normal gaming state, a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state corresponding to a low-frequency support mode and a low probability mode) and a second normal gaming state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. The second normal gaming state corresponding to the frequency support mode and the high probability mode) and the third normal gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (the third normal state corresponding to the low frequency support mode and the high probability mode) Gaming state)
Second normal gaming state transition means for executing a transition from the gaming state to the second normal gaming state upon completion of the special gaming state (processing for transitioning to the second normal gaming state is performed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
When the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state, the upper limit setting means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) sets the upper limit (number of times reduced) in the second normal gaming state. Function to set the number of hours)
Third normal game state transition means (main control device 162) for shifting the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on the number of games in the second normal game state reaching the upper limit. And a function for executing a process for shifting to the third normal gaming state)
A plurality of the upper limits are provided, and the upper limit setting means is configured to set any one of the plurality of upper limits as the upper limit of the number of games in the second normal gaming state.

  According to feature A12, after the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state, the player is further increased when the number of games executed in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit. It shifts to the 3rd normal gaming state advantageous to. A plurality of the above upper limits are provided, and a difference occurs in the transition hurdle to the third normal gaming state depending on which of these upper limits is set. That is, a second normal gaming state that is likely to shift to the third normal gaming state and a second normal gaming state that is difficult to shift to the third normal gaming state are generated. In this way, by diversifying the second normal gaming state and providing a plurality of transition hurdles to the third normal gaming state, the monotony of the game in the normal gaming state is suppressed and the degree of attention to the game is improved. Can contribute.

  The technical ideas shown in the features A3 to A11 can be applied to the feature A12.

<Feature B group>
The following feature B group is: “A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball to the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball fired from the game ball launching means enters the entrance part provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1) "In the gaming machine of the type described above, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game." It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature B1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (holding information) when a ball enters a starting ball entering portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition function), and
Acquisition information storage means (reserved ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the lottery process is executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
A pattern display means (for example, a main display unit 81) having a display section (for example, a display section DR for the operation port) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display section;
Prior to the determination being performed by the determination unit or based on the determination being performed by the determination unit, the variable display of the pattern is started in the pattern display unit, and a stop result corresponding to the determination result When the variable display of the picture is terminated as one game round, the graphic of each game round is variably displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means for controlling the pattern display means (for example, a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed from the normal game state to the player based on the fact that the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game time control means. Special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (for example, opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to
As the normal gaming state, a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low-frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. The second normal gaming state corresponding to the probability mode and the high-frequency support mode) and the third normal gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (the third normal state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode) Gaming state), and
Transition condition setting means for setting a transition condition to the third normal gaming state when the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state is performed (the time reduction number is set by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) Function)
The transition condition setting means, when the determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information in the second normal gaming state, and enters the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state. Relaxing means for relaxing the transition condition to the third normal gaming state (set when the number of times set when the jackpot result related to the right operating port 63a is the jackpot result related to the lower operating port 62a) A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration that is favored over a short time.

  As shown in this feature, monotonization of the game can be suppressed by adopting a configuration in which the advantage increases by shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state. Here, the transition condition for shifting from the second normal gaming state to the most advantageous third normal gaming state is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information in the second normal gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a winning result). It may be alleviated when returning to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state. If the hurdle to the third normal game state is lowered when the second normal game state is looped in this way, the effect of suppressing monotonization of the game by using a plurality of normal game states is preferably exhibited. be able to.

  Note that the configuration shown in this feature is “a game board in which a game area is formed, and special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball enters a start ball entering section provided in the game area; , Acquisition information storage means capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and determination whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information Prior to the determination being performed by the determination unit, the determination is performed by the determination unit, or a determination unit that sequentially includes a display unit that has a display unit and is capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display unit. Based on this, the pattern display means starts the variable display of the pattern, displays the stop result corresponding to the result of the determination, and ends the variable display of the pattern as one game time, Get A game times control means for controlling the picture display means so that a variable display of the picture of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the information storage means, and a judgment result by the judgment means is predetermined judgment information. A special game in which the game state is shifted to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the game time control means stops and displays the picture corresponding to the determination result. A state transition means, wherein the normal game state is a first normal game state, a second normal game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state, and a game that is further game than the second normal game state And a third normal gaming state advantageous to the user is provided, and the gaming state is switched to the first normal gaming state, the second normal gaming state, and the third normal gaming state according to the gaming situation. Gaming machine characterized in that it comprises a stage. "And may be.

Feature B2. The transition condition setting means sets an upper limit of game times executed in the second normal gaming state as the transition condition from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state,
The mitigation means is configured so that the second normal game state passes through the special game state from the second normal game state rather than the upper limit set when the first normal game state makes a transition to the second normal game state. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein the gaming machine is means for lowering an upper limit set in a gaming state.

  As shown in this feature, in the configuration in which the upper limit of the number of game times executed in the second normal gaming state reaches the third normal gaming state, whether or not this upper limit can be reached is advantageous for the game. It is important to proceed. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, the above upper limit may be lowered when the winning result is obtained in the second normal gaming state and the special gaming state returns to the second normal gaming state, and such an event occurs. Thus, the expectation for the transition to the third normal gaming state can be enhanced.

Feature B3. The predetermined determination information includes first determination information (information corresponding to a probability variation jackpot result) and second determination information (information corresponding to a normal jackpot result),
Means for transitioning to the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state when the determination result by the determining means becomes a determination result corresponding to the first determination information during the second normal gaming state;
Means for causing a transition to the first normal gaming state through the special gaming state when the determination result by the determining means becomes a determination result corresponding to the second determination information during the second normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to Feature B1 or Feature B2, wherein

  As shown in this feature, in the gaming machine whose transition from the second normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state is an opportunity to be demoted, the winning result is in the second normal gaming state. The game is played in the hope that it will not be. Here, when the winning result is obtained, the condition may be demoted to the first normal gaming state, while the condition for returning to the second normal gaming state and shifting to the third normal gaming state may be relaxed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the player's gaming motivation from rapidly decreasing when a winning result is obtained in the second normal gaming state.

  Feature B4. The transition condition setting means, when the determination result by the determination means in the second normal gaming state becomes a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information and enters the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, further comprising means for setting a transition condition that is more difficult to be established than the transition condition set by the transition condition setting means.

  As shown in this feature, when a winning result is obtained in the second normal gaming state, the hurdle to the third normal gaming state is not necessarily lowered, but a tension is provided to the game by providing a case where the hurdle is raised. A feeling can be imparted.

  Feature B5. When the determination result by the determination means in the second normal gaming state becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and enters the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state, the transition condition is set by the relaxation means. The feature B4 is characterized in that the probability that the transition condition is relaxed is higher than the probability that the transition condition that is difficult to be established is set more than the transition condition set in advance by the transition condition setting means. The gaming machine described in 1.

  As shown in feature B1, in the configuration in which the first normal gaming state → the second normal gaming state → the third normal gaming state is stepped up in this order, the winning result is obtained despite the transition to the second normal gaming state. Thus, when an event such as the shift to the third normal gaming state frequently occurs, it is likely that the game in the second normal gaming state is extended. This can be a hindrance in improving the degree of attention to the game. Here, as shown in this feature, when the winning result is obtained during the second normal gaming state, the rate of hurdle reduction is set higher than the rate of hurdle increase, so that a plurality of normal gaming states can be used together. However, it is possible to make the game state step up light.

Feature B6. As the starting entrance part, a first starting entrance part (lower operation port 62a) disposed in the first passage (left route) in the gaming area, and a second passage different from the first passage. A second starting ball entrance (right operation port 63a) disposed on the (right route),
As the transition condition, a first transition condition (for example, “50 times”) and a second transition condition (for example, “30”, “10”, “0” times) that is easier to establish than the first transition condition. ) And
When the special information corresponding to the entry to the second start entrance part has a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the relaxation means enters the first start entrance part. The ratio of setting the second transition condition as the transition condition is higher than when the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in the special information corresponding to the sphere,
In the first normal gaming state, it is more likely to be determined by the determining means when the game ball is launched into the first flow path than in the second flow path. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, wherein the game ball is configured such that the number of determination opportunities by the determination unit increases when the game ball is launched into the second flow path.

  According to the feature B6, when a game ball is fired in the first flow path in the first normal game state, the lottery for shifting to the special game state is executed based on the ball entering the first start ball entering part. Is done. In the case where the lottery results in a win and the transition to the second normal gaming state is made, it is easy to set the first transition condition that is relatively difficult to be established. On the other hand, after the transition to the second normal game state, the game ball is launched into the second flow path, so that the main ball destination of the game ball becomes the second start ball entering part. A transition lottery to the special gaming state is executed based on the entry to the second starting pitching part, and a winning result is obtained, and when returning to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state, relative transition conditions are set. Therefore, it is easy to set the second transition condition that is easily established. With such a configuration, the technical idea shown in the feature B1 can be suitably embodied while avoiding complication of the configuration by using the existing configuration in the gaming machine.

Feature B7. A plurality of the second transition conditions are provided;
The relaxation means has a plurality of the second transition conditions as the transition condition when the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in the special information corresponding to the entrance to the second start entrance part. The gaming machine according to Feature B6, wherein the probability that the transition condition that is most easily established is set is higher than the probability that another transition condition is set.

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, the transition condition set when the second normal gaming state is looped is more easily established than the transition condition set when the transition is first made to the second normal gaming state. Opportunities increase. Thereby, the relaxation function shown in the feature B1 can be suitably exhibited.

  Feature B8. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, further comprising correspondence information display means for displaying transition condition correspondence information corresponding to the transition condition set by the transition condition setting means.

  In the configuration in which the transition condition can be relaxed as shown in the feature B1 or the like, the transition condition correspondence information corresponding to the transition condition is displayed, which can contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

  The technical ideas shown in the features B1 to B8 may be applied to the feature A group.

<Feature C group>
The following group C is: “A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball fired from the game ball launching means enters a ball entering section provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. As for the background art of “Patent Document 1”, there is an invention that “the gaming machine of the type described above still has room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game”. It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature C1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (holding information) when a ball enters a starting ball entering portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition function), and
Acquisition information storage means (reserved ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the lottery process is executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
A pattern display means (for example, a main display unit 81) having a display section (for example, a display section DR for the operation port) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display section;
Prior to the determination being performed by the determination unit or based on the determination being performed by the determination unit, the variable display of the pattern is started in the pattern display unit, and a stop result corresponding to the determination result When the variable display of the picture is terminated as one game round, the graphic of each game round is variably displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means for controlling the pattern display means (for example, a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed from the normal game state to the player based on the fact that the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game time control means. Special game state transition means (function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special game state (for example, opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to
Switching means for switching between an accepting state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting entrance part and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than the accepting state (electrical accessory 71) When,
Switching control means for controlling the switching means (function to execute the power support process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
As a switching control mode of the switching means by the switching control means, a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high frequency support) in which the non-accepting period is shorter than the first switching mode. Mode), and
As a determination mode for performing the determination by the determination means, a high probability mode in which a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high and a probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are relative With a low low probability mode,
As the normal gaming state, a first normal gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, a second normal gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode, and the first switching Mode and a third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode,
The second normal gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state and more disadvantageous to the player than the third normal gaming state,
When the determination result by the determination means in the first normal gaming state becomes a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, the first normal gaming state passes through the special gaming state to the second normal gaming state. A first transition means for shifting (a function of executing a process of shifting to the second normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
A reference number setting means (a function for setting the number of time reductions in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for setting a reference number of times (number of time reductions) when shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state;
When the number of games executed in the second normal gaming state becomes the reference number, the second transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state. And a function of executing a process of shifting to the third normal gaming state).

  According to the feature C1, when the number of games reaches the reference number without becoming a winning result in the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the high probability mode is triggered when the reference number is reached. And it transfers to the 3rd normal game state corresponding to low frequency support mode. The third normal gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state. In other words, in the case where the benefit is not obtained despite the high probability mode (advantageous gaming state), the game can be further advantageously advanced by upgrading to the third normal gaming state. Become. By reducing the player with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation.

  The third normal gaming state shown in this feature corresponds to the first switching mode and the high probability mode, and is differentiated from the second normal gaming state by the difference in the combination of the switching control mode and the determination mode. Yes. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the game while suppressing an excessively complicated configuration related to the game, and it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C2. A special entry part (lower variable prize-winning device 65) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter is provided, and the special entry part is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the starting entry part. Has been
The starting pitching portion is disposed on a predetermined flow path (right route) that continues to the special pitching portion in the gaming area, and the predetermined amount of time when the starting pitching portion is in the receiving state. It is configured to restrict the flow down to the special ball entry section via the flow path of
In the third normal game state, the chance that a game ball launched into the predetermined flow path enters the start ball entry portion is reduced compared to the second normal game state, while the special ball entry portion enters. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to increase a chance to play a ball.

  According to the feature C2, in the second normal gaming state, the entry to the special entry portion set with higher advantage than the starting entry portion is regulated by the start entry portion, and the state shifts to the third normal gaming state. By doing so, the regulations will be relaxed. In this way, the advantage of the third normal gaming state over the second normal gaming state can be ensured by increasing the number of opportunities for entering the special pitching portion.

Feature C3. As the predetermined determination information, first information (information corresponding to the jackpot result) and second information (information corresponding to the special hit result) are provided,
When the number of games executed without the determination result corresponding to the first information in the second normal gaming state becomes the reference number, the second transition means starts from the second normal gaming state. It is configured to shift to the third normal gaming state,
A special pitching portion (a lower variable winning device 65) that can be switched between an accepting state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state in which it is more difficult to enter than the accepting state;
When the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to the second information, the entrance control means (the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes the opening / closing process) that switches the special entry portion to the acceptance state. Function)
A first predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the entrance to the starting entrance part, and a second predetermined number of game balls greater than the first predetermined number are entered based on the entrance to the special entrance part. A dispensing means (dispensing device 222) for dispensing,
The starting pitching portion is disposed on a predetermined flow path (right route) that continues to the special pitching portion in the gaming area, and the predetermined amount of time when the starting pitching portion is in the receiving state. It is configured to restrict the flow down to the special ball entry section via the flow path of
Compared to the second normal game state, the third normal game state has a configuration in which the proportion of game balls that enter the special ball entry portion is increased for the game balls that are launched toward the predetermined flow path. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by that.

  According to the feature C3, in the second normal game state, the entry to the special entry portion set with higher advantage than the start entry portion is regulated by the start entry portion, and the state shifts to the third normal game state. By doing so, the regulations will be relaxed. In this way, the advantage of the third normal gaming state over the second normal gaming state can be ensured by increasing the number of opportunities for entering the special pitching portion.

  Feature C4. In the special gaming state in which the determination result by the determination means has shifted to a determination result corresponding to the second information, there is provided means for maintaining the switching control mode in the switching control mode before the transition to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to Feature C3, wherein

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, when the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained during the second normal gaming state and when the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained during the third normal gaming state. The difference in pitching frequency can be increased. This is preferable for emphasizing the superiority of the special pitching portion as shown in the feature C2 and the like.

Feature C5. The reference number setting means is a first setting means,
If the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first information before reaching the reference number of times, and the second normal gaming state is reached through the special gaming state, the reference number (short time number) is set. Newly set second setting means (function of resetting the number of times when the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 shifts from the second normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state through the first special gaming state) The gaming machine according to Feature C3 or Feature C4, wherein:

  According to the feature C5, when the winning result is obtained before the relief function is activated and the game returns to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state, the reference number is reset. Thereby, for example, it is possible to suppress an excessive relief function shown in the feature C1.

Feature C6. The reference number setting means is a first setting means,
Third transition means (main) for shifting to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state when the determination result by the determining means in the third normal gaming state becomes a determination result corresponding to the first information. A function of executing a process of shifting to the second normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the control device 162),
When the third transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state, third setting means for newly setting the reference count (from the third normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). The game machine according to any one of features C3 to C5, wherein the game machine has a function of resetting the number of times when the time is shifted.

  When the winning result is obtained during the rescue, the player moves to the second normal gaming state and leaves a way to return to the third normal gaming state, so that the player's willingness to play rapidly increases with the end of the third normal gaming state. Can be suppressed.

  Feature C7. The gaming machine according to Feature C6, wherein the third setting means includes means for setting the reference number so as to be less than the reference number set by the first setting means.

  In the case of changing from the third normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state, preferential treatment is performed so that the reference number is relatively small, so that the demotion of the gaming state becomes a factor that reduces the player's willingness to play. Can be suppressed.

Feature C8. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (holding information) when a ball enters a starting ball entering portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition function), and
Acquisition information storage means (reserved ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the lottery process is executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
A pattern display means (for example, a main display unit 81) having a display section (for example, a display section DR for the operation port) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display section;
Prior to the determination being performed by the determination unit or based on the determination being performed by the determination unit, the variable display of the pattern is started in the pattern display unit, and a stop result corresponding to the determination result When the variable display of the picture is terminated as one game round, the graphic of each game round is variably displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means for controlling the pattern display means (for example, a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed from the normal game state to the player based on the fact that the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game time control means. Special game state transition means (function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special game state (for example, opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to
Switching means for switching between an accepting state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting entrance part and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than the accepting state (electrical accessory 71) When,
Switching control means for controlling the switching means (function to execute the power support process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
As a switching control mode of the switching means by the switching control means, a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) in which the non-accepting period is shorter than the first switching mode. )
As a determination mode for performing the determination by the determination means, a high probability mode in which a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high and a probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are relative With a low low probability mode,
When the determination result by the determination means in the first normal gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, the second switching mode and the high A first transition means for shifting to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the probability mode (a function of executing a process of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
When the first transition means shifts from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state, reference number setting means for setting a reference number (short time number) (the number of time reductions is set in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). Function to set)
When the number of games executed without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the second normal gaming state reaches the reference number, the switching control mode is changed from the second switching mode to the second switching mode. By switching to the first switching mode and maintaining the determination mode in the high probability constant mode, the second normal gaming state is shifted to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode. 2 transition means (function to execute a process of shifting from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second normal gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state and is more disadvantageous to the player than the third normal gaming state.

  According to the feature C8, when the number of games reaches the reference number without becoming a winning result in the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the high probability mode is triggered when the reference number is reached. And it transfers to the 3rd normal game state corresponding to low frequency support mode. The third normal gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state. In other words, in the case where the benefit is not obtained despite the high probability mode (advantageous gaming state), the game can be further advantageously advanced by upgrading to the third normal gaming state. Become. By reducing the player with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation.

  The third normal gaming state shown in this feature corresponds to the first switching mode and the high probability mode, and is differentiated from the second normal gaming state by the difference in the combination of the switching control mode and the determination mode. Yes. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the game while suppressing an excessively complicated configuration related to the game, and it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game.

  The technical ideas shown in the features C1 to C8 may be applied to the features A to B.

<Feature D group>
The following feature group D is “a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball to the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball fired from the game ball launching means enters the entrance part provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1) "In the gaming machine of the type described above, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game." It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature D1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (holding information) when a ball enters a starting ball entering portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition function), and
Acquisition information storage means (reserved ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the lottery process is executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
A pattern display means (for example, a main display unit 81) having a display section (for example, a display section DR for the operation port) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display section;
Prior to the determination being performed by the determination unit or based on the determination being performed by the determination unit, the variable display of the pattern is started in the pattern display unit, and a stop result corresponding to the determination result When the variable display of the picture is terminated as one game round, the graphic of each game round is variably displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means for controlling the pattern display means (for example, a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed from the normal game state to the player based on the fact that the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game time control means. Special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (for example, opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to
The starting entrance part can be switched between an accepting state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter and a non-accepting state in which entering is more difficult than the accepting state,
Switching control means for controlling the switching means (function to execute the power support process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
As a switching control mode by the switching control means, there are a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) in which the non-accepting period is shorter than the first switching mode. Provided,
As the normal gaming state, a first type normal gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and a second type normal gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode are provided,
Reference number setting means for setting a reference number (time reduction number) as the number of games in which the second type normal game state is continued when shifting to the second type normal game state (time reduction in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function to set the number of times)
First transition means capable of shifting from the second type normal gaming state to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second type normal gaming state (to the third normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). To execute the migration process)
Second transition means capable of shifting from the second type normal gaming state to a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second type normal gaming state (to the first normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). Function to execute the migration process)
When the number of games executed in the second type normal gaming state reaches the reference number, the gaming state is shifted by either the first shifting means or the second shifting means. A featured gaming machine.

  In the second type normal game state, it is easy to enter the starting ball entering part, and the game proceeds smoothly. When the number of games executed in the second type normal game state reaches the reference number, the game state shifts to a game state more advantageous to the player than the second type normal game state or a game state disadvantageous to the player. It will be. By diversifying the game in this way, the game can be prevented from being monotonous and contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

Feature D2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (holding information) when a ball enters a starting ball entering portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition function), and
Acquisition information storage means (reserved ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the lottery process is executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
A pattern display means (for example, a main display unit 81) having a display section (for example, a display section DR for the operation port) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display section;
Prior to the determination being performed by the determination unit or based on the determination being performed by the determination unit, the variable display of the pattern is started in the pattern display unit, and a stop result corresponding to the determination result When the variable display of the picture is terminated as one game round, the graphic of each game round is variably displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means for controlling the pattern display means (for example, a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed from the normal game state to the player based on the fact that the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game time control means. Special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (for example, opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to
As the normal gaming state, a first normal gaming state (a normal gaming state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. And a normal gaming state compatible with the high frequency support mode), a third normal gaming state (a normal gaming state compatible with the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state, There is provided a fourth normal gaming state (fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the one normal gaming state,
When changing to the second normal gaming state, first setting means for setting a reference number (number of time reductions) as the number of games in which the second normal gaming state is continued (second normal in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). A function to set the number of times in accordance with the transition to the gaming state),
First transition means for transitioning to the third normal gaming state when the number of games executed in the second normal gaming state reaches the reference number (to the third normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). To execute the migration process)
The second setting means for setting the reference number as the number of games in which the fourth normal gaming state is continued when the fourth normal gaming state is entered (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 shifts to the fourth normal gaming state). Function to set the number of times according to the transition of)
Second transition means for transitioning to the first normal gaming state when the number of games executed in the fourth normal gaming state reaches the reference number (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 shifts to the first normal gaming state). A game machine having a function of executing a transition process of

  When the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the reference number, the game is shifted (promoted) to a third normal game state that is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. On the other hand, when the number of games executed in the fourth normal gaming state reaches the reference number, the state is shifted (downgraded) to the first normal gaming state. In the second normal game state, the game is played while expecting the reference number of times to be reached, and in the fourth normal game state, the game is played while expecting to avoid reaching the reference number of times. In this way, even if the same reference number is set, the game state after reaching the reference number is divided into advantageous / disadvantageous depending on the game state, thereby suppressing the monotony of the game and the degree of attention to the game It can contribute to improvement.

  Note that the configuration shown in this feature is “a game board in which a game area is formed, and special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball enters a start ball entering section provided in the game area; , Acquisition information storage means capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and determination whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information Prior to the determination being performed by the determination unit, the determination is performed by the determination unit, or a determination unit that sequentially includes a display unit that has a display unit and is capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display unit. Based on this, the pattern display means starts the variable display of the pattern, displays the stop result corresponding to the result of the determination, and ends the variable display of the pattern as one game time, Get A game times control means for controlling the picture display means so that a variable display of the picture of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the information storage means, and a judgment result by the judgment means is predetermined judgment information. A special game in which the game state is shifted to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the game time control means stops and displays the picture corresponding to the determination result. A state transition means, wherein the normal game state is a first normal game state, a second normal game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state, and a game that is further game than the second normal game state And a third normal gaming state advantageous to the user is provided, and the gaming state is switched to the first normal gaming state, the second normal gaming state, and the third normal gaming state according to the gaming situation. Gaming machine characterized in that it comprises a stage. "And may be.

Feature D3. The starting entrance part can be switched between an accepting state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter and a non-accepting state in which entering is more difficult than the accepting state,
Comprising a switching control means (a function of executing a power support process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the starting incoming ball portion to the receiving state and the non-receiving state;
As a switching control mode by the switching control means, there are a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) in which the non-accepting period is shorter than the first switching mode. Provided,
The first normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state are gaming states in which the switching control mode is the first switching mode,
The second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state are gaming states in which the switching control mode is the second switching mode,
The first setting means is configured to set the reference number as a game number in which the second switching mode is continued in the second normal gaming state,
The gaming machine according to claim D2, wherein the second setting means is configured to set the reference number as a gaming number in which the second switching mode is continued in the fourth normal gaming state. .

  As shown in the feature D2, in the configuration in which the gaming state can be changed to the advantageous side / unfavorable side by reaching the reference number of times, the player's attention tends to be directed to the remaining number of times until the reference number of times is reached. In this way, if the number of possessed balls has greatly decreased under the circumstances where attention to games is increasing, it is assumed that it will easily lead to a decrease in gaming motivation due to increased attention to games. The Therefore, as shown in this feature, in the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state, the switching control mode is set to the second switching mode, and the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed by suppressing the decrease of the holding ball.

  In addition, in a configuration in which the game state changes by reaching the reference number of times, it is feared that the progress of the game progress in the process may hinder the impact from being reduced and exert the effect of increasing the attention to the game. In this respect, as shown in this feature, the game progress until reaching the reference number of times is smoothed, and such a concern can be suitably eliminated.

  Feature D4. The game times control means is configured such that the variable display period of the pattern in the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state is shorter than the variable display period of the pattern in the first normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to Feature D3, wherein:

  As shown in the feature D3, in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, if the game can be performed while suppressing a decrease in the number of balls, it is easy to direct the player's main attention to whether or not the reference number of times has been reached. In such a situation, if the configuration is such that the variable display period of the pattern is shortened, it is preferable that the player is excessively fatigued in the process of reaching the reference number of times by extending the game number and continuing the tension. Can be suppressed. This is a preferable configuration for setting the reference number of times to some extent and exhibiting the attention degree improving effect shown in the feature D2 and the like.

  Feature D5. The determination means includes a probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information when the determination is performed in the second normal gaming state, and the predetermined when the determination is performed in the fourth normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D4, wherein the probabilities of the determination results corresponding to the determination information are different from each other.

  According to the feature D5, the same reference number is used in the case of shifting to the third normal gaming state via the second normal gaming state and the case of shifting to the first normal gaming state via the fourth normal gaming state. Even if is set, there is a difference in the probability of reaching the reference number of times. Thereby, the effect which suppresses monotonization of a game can be exhibited more suitably.

  Feature D6. When the determination is performed in the second normal gaming state, the determination means has a probability that a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is determined in the fourth normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D5, wherein the gaming machine is configured to have a higher probability than a determination result corresponding to the determination information.

  According to the feature D6, the same reference number is used in the case of shifting to the third normal gaming state via the second normal gaming state and the case of shifting to the first normal gaming state via the fourth normal gaming state. Even if is set, there is a difference in the probability of reaching the reference number of times. Thereby, the effect which suppresses monotonization of a game can be exhibited more suitably.

  In particular, when a transition is made from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state, which is the advantageous side, the possibility of reaching the reference number of times becomes relatively low, and the first normal game that is disadvantageous from the fourth normal gaming state. When transitioning to a state, the possibility of reaching the reference number is relatively high. With such a configuration, even if it is assumed that the same reference number of times is reached, the hurdle for shifting to the third normal gaming state can be made relatively high, and the transition to the third normal gaming state can be made. A feeling of expectation can be favorably spoken.

  Feature D7. When the player is in the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state, the player is configured to make it difficult or impossible to distinguish between the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D6, wherein

  According to the feature D7, by making the second / fourth normal gaming state unclear (specific difficulty), the gaming state to be shifted after reaching the reference number of times becomes the first normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state. A game for guessing which of the gaming states is added. It becomes unclear whether it will shift to the advantageous side or the unfavorable side until the reference number is reached, that is, whether it will be promoted or demoted, which can contribute to further improvement in the degree of attention when the reference number is reached.

Feature D8. Means for executing a predetermined effect corresponding to the second normal game state over a plurality of game times executed in the second normal game state when the second normal game state is set;
The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D7, further comprising means for executing the predetermined effect when the fourth normal gaming state is set.

  As shown in feature D8, the same display effect (predetermined effect) is executed in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, and the normal game state is made unclear (difficult to specify). Thus, a game for guessing which of the first normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state the gaming state to be transferred after reaching the reference number of times is added. It becomes unclear whether it will shift to the advantageous side or the unfavorable side until the reference number is reached, that is, whether it will be promoted or demoted, which can contribute to further improvement in the degree of attention when the reference number is reached.

Feature D9. The predetermined determination information includes first determination information (information corresponding to a probability variation jackpot result) and second determination information (information corresponding to a normal jackpot result),
When the determination result by the determination means in the first normal gaming state becomes a determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the first normal gaming state is changed to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state. Means to migrate,
When the determination result by the determination means in the first normal gaming state becomes a determination result corresponding to the second determination information, the first normal gaming state is changed to the fourth normal gaming state through the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to Feature D7 or Feature D8, further comprising means for shifting.

  When the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in the first normal gaming state, the state shifts to the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state. Thus, by sharing the transition pattern from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state, any game before the transition to the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state is made. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether it is in a state. Thereby, the attention degree improvement effect shown in the feature D7 or the like can be suitably exhibited.

Feature D10. A variable pitching portion that can be switched to an accepting state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter and a non-accepting state in which entering is more difficult than the accepting state;
When the special gaming state, it is provided with a pitch control means for switching the variable pitch portion to the acceptance state,
The entry control means moves the special game state when the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is reached and the special game is transferred when the determination result corresponds to the second determination information. The gaming machine according to Feature D9, wherein the game machine is configured so that a switching mode of the variable pitching portion is common in the state.

  As shown in feature D10, the behavior of the variable ball portion is changed to the second when the transition to the second normal game state and the case of the fourth normal game state are made common. It is possible to avoid exposing the transition to the normal game state or the fourth normal game state. Thereby, the effect shown to the characteristic D9 can be exhibited suitably.

Feature D11. A suggestion means for suggesting the remaining number of times until the reference number of times is reached,
As the suggestion mode by the suggestion means, a first suggestion mode that clearly specifies the remaining number of times and a second suggestion mode that makes the remaining number of times implicit are provided,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D7 to D10, wherein the suggestion means is switchable between the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode.

  As shown in the feature D7, etc., in the configuration that is divided into advantageous / disadvantaged by reaching the reference number of times, the remaining number of times until the reference number of times is reached is switched between explicit / invisible, and the game is reached in the process until the reference number of times is reached The degree of attention can be suitably improved.

  The technical ideas shown in the features D1 to D11 may be applied to the features A to C.

<Feature E group>
The following group E is: “A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball to the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball fired from the game ball launching means enters the entrance part provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1) "In the gaming machine of the type described above, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game." It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature E1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A first pitching portion (a lower variable prize that can be switched between an accepting state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming region can enter and a non-accepting state in which entering is more difficult than the accepting state is provided in the gaming region. Device 65);
An accepting state and an accepting state in which a game ball arranged on a predetermined flow path (right route) toward the first ball entry portion in the game area and flowing along the predetermined flow path can enter. A second entrance portion (right operation entrance portion 63) that can be switched to a non-acceptance state where entry is more difficult than
Predetermined information acquisition means (in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring predetermined information (value of the open random number counter C4) when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing portion (through gate 66) disposed in the gaming area. The function of acquiring the value of the open random number counter C4),
Information storage means for storing predetermined information acquired by the predetermined information acquisition means (electric storage area 633 in the RAM 604 of the main controller 162);
Lottery means (function to execute support lottery in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for performing lottery to determine whether or not to switch the second pitching unit to the acceptance state based on predetermined information stored in the information storage means )When,
Variable display means (main display unit 81) having a display unit (through gate display unit DS) and capable of variably displaying a picture on the display unit;
Prior to the lottery by the lottery means or based on the fact that the lottery has performed a lottery, the display unit starts variable display of the pattern and the display control means for confirming and displaying the pattern corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means (A function of executing a pattern display process in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Switching control means for switching the second pitching section to the receiving state when the design corresponding to the winning result is displayed on the display section (a function of executing a big prize opening / closing process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) )
As the switching control mode by the switching control means, there are provided a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) in which entering is easier than in the first switching mode. And
The display control means includes a variable display period and a fixed display period of the pattern in the second switching mode rather than a first specific period that is the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period of the pattern in the first switch mode. The second specific period, which is the sum of
The entrance to the first entrance part is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the entrance to the second entrance part,
The second entrance part has an opening (operating port 63a) through which a plurality of game balls can pass simultaneously, and a shutter (shutter 331) that opens and closes the opening, and the shutter is disposed at a closed position. It is configured to be in the non-accepting state and to be in the accepting state by arranging the shutter in an open position,
When the second incoming ball portion is in the non-accepting state, a part of the rolling surface of the game ball in the predetermined flow path is formed by the shutter,
The time required for the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path to pass over the shutter is configured to be longer than the second specific period and shorter than the first specific period. A featured gaming machine.

  According to the feature E1, the time required for the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path to pass over the shutter is the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period of the pattern in the second switching mode (second specific period) Longer than. For this reason, during the second switching mode, most of the game balls that have reached the second entrance part will enter the second entrance part. That is, the game ball launched into the predetermined flow path during the second switching mode flows into the second entrance part and the entrance into the first entrance part is suppressed. On the other hand, the required period is shorter than the sum (first specific period) of the variable display period and the fixed display period of the pattern in the first switching mode. For this reason, during the first switching mode, even if the second pitching portion is continuously switched to the receiving state, part of the game balls that have reached the shutter pass through the second pitching portion and pass through the first pitching portion. Head to the club. Thus, while entering into the first entrance part which is relatively advantageous occurs during the first switching mode, entry into the first entrance part is suppressed during the second switching mode. Thus, it is possible to make a clear difference in the game progress.

  Here, in order to differentiate each switching mode, in order to reduce the number of game balls (spills) that pass through the second pitching part and go to the first pitching part during the second switching mode, the specific period can be shortened. Good. However, simply shortening the specific period makes it difficult to start / stop according to the result displayed on the display unit (to advance the game in a way that is advantageous to the player). The significance of providing a part will fade. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to prevent the variable display period and the fixed display period of the picture from becoming extremely short while suppressing the spilling. Thereby, the improvement of the attention degree to a game is suitably realizable.

  Feature E2. The switching control means is configured to switch the second incoming ball portion to the receiving state based on a lottery result by the lottery member regardless of whether the first incoming ball portion is in the receiving state. The gaming machine according to Feature E1, characterized in that:

  As shown in the feature E2, in the configuration in which the case where the first pitching unit is in the receiving state or not depending on the lottery result occurs, the player's attention is easily directed to the display of the lottery result. For such a configuration, it is technically significant to suppress the specific period from becoming extremely short by applying the technical idea shown in the feature E1.

Feature E3. A first predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out based on the entrance to the first entrance portion, and a number less than the first predetermined number is entered based on the entrance to the second entrance portion. 2 provided with a payout means (payout device 222) for paying out a predetermined number (for example, 1) of game balls;
Due to the difference in the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout means, the entrance to the first entrance portion is more advantageous to the player than the entrance to the second entrance portion. The gaming machine according to Feature E1 or Feature E2.

  As shown in feature E3, in a configuration in which entry to the first entry part is favored over entry to the second entry part, the player expects to enter the first entry part. It is assumed that the game will be played. In such a configuration, it is not preferable that excessive entry into the first entry portion causes a loss of game balance. In this respect, according to the combination with the feature E1, it is possible to avoid the movement of the game ball toward the first incoming ball portion while shortening the period during which the second incoming ball portion is received, as much as possible. The occurrence of inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. And, shortening the period for the acceptance state is advantageous for encouraging the player to expect the game ball to flow down toward the first entry part, and the period for the acceptance state becomes longer. It can suppress suitably that the expectation of the entrance to the 1st entrance part is shaved.

  Feature E4. The passage length of the communication passage portion connecting the first and second ball entering portions in the predetermined flow path is a passage portion configured by the shutter of the second ball entering portion in the predetermined flow path. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E3, wherein the gaming machine is shorter than the passage length.

  As shown in feature E4, the second incoming ball portion under the condition that the first incoming ball portion is opened by making the passage length of the communication passage portion shorter than the passage length of the second incoming ball portion. It is easier to give the player an impression that the player can reach the first entrance ball as soon as the game ball passing through the second entrance portion passes through the second entrance portion. This can contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the behavior of the game ball that has reached the entrance.

Feature E5. The first ball entry section has an opening (a big winning opening) through which a plurality of game balls can pass simultaneously, and a shutter (shutter) that opens and closes the opening, and the shutter is disposed at a closed position. It is configured to be in a non-accepting state and to be in the accepting state by arranging the shutter in the open position,
When the first incoming ball portion is in the non-accepting state, a part of the rolling surface of the game ball in the predetermined flow path is formed by the shutter of the first incoming ball portion,
The passage length of the communication passage portion connecting the first and second ball entering portions in the predetermined flow path is a passage portion configured by the shutter of the first ball entering portion in the predetermined flow path. Any one of the features E1 to E4, wherein the passage length is shorter than any of the passage lengths of the passage portions formed by the shutters of the second ball entry portions in the predetermined flow path. The gaming machine described in one.

  Since most of the game balls flowing down the predetermined flow path can enter either the first entrance portion or the second entrance portion, one large size can be obtained by combining the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion. You can make it look like the club is built. It is advantageous in improving the player's satisfaction to make it appear as if a game ball has been entered by the large ball club. Here, by making the passage length of the communication passage portion shorter than the passage length of the passage portion constituted by each shutter, it is possible to enhance the sense of unity of the both ball entering portions. Thereby, the said impression can be strengthened.

  In addition, the game ball that has reached the second incoming ball part in a situation where the first incoming ball part is opened by making the passage length of the communication passage part shorter than the above-mentioned passage length related to the second incoming ball part. However, it is easier to give the player the impression that the player can immediately enter the first entrance if only the second entrance can pass, and the game ball that has reached the shutter of the second entrance or the first entrance It can contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the behavior.

Feature E6. The first ball entry section has an opening (a big winning opening) through which a plurality of game balls can pass simultaneously, and a shutter (shutter) that opens and closes the opening, and the shutter is disposed at a closed position. It is configured to be in a non-accepting state and to be in the accepting state by arranging the shutter in the open position,
When the first incoming ball portion is in the non-accepting state, a part of the rolling surface of the game ball in the predetermined flow path is formed by the shutter of the first incoming ball portion,
The feature E4 or the feature E5 is characterized in that the shutter of the first ball entrance portion and the shutter of the second ball entrance portion extend in a predetermined direction and the communication passage portion extends in a direction intersecting the predetermined direction. The gaming machine described.

  As described above, if most of the game balls flowing down the predetermined flow path can enter either the first entrance portion or the second entrance portion, the first entrance portion and the second entrance ball. One large entrance part can be constructed by combining the parts. It is advantageous in improving the player's satisfaction to make it appear as if a game ball has been entered by the large ball club.

  In this type of large pitching part, when the main pitching destination is switched between the first pitching part / second pitching part according to the situation, there should be no entry to the first pitching part As a result, the game hall is more likely to suffer a disadvantage. In consideration of such circumstances, a communication passage is provided between the first and second pitching sections to delay or thin out the movement of the game balls toward the first pitching section. Has technical significance. If the communication passage is made longer to some extent, these functions can be suitably exerted. However, on the other hand, there is a concern that the feeling of unity of the two ball entering parts will be lowered and the impression that it is a single large ball entering part will be reduced. The In this regard, as shown in this feature, the positions of the entrance balls are shifted (for example, offset up and down) as a configuration in which the shutters of both entrance balls extend in a predetermined direction and the connecting passage extends in a direction crossing the predetermined direction With this configuration, it is possible to reduce a decrease in the sense of unity between the two balls while gaining a passage length of the communication passage.

Feature E7. A discharge port (out port 68) through which game balls are discharged from the game region is formed in the most downstream portion of the game region,
A branch passage portion is formed in the middle of the communication passage portion, and the game ball that has flowed into the branch passage portion is discharged from the game area without reaching the discharge port. The gaming machine according to Feature E6, wherein:

  The game ball that has flowed into the branch passage portion provided in the middle of the communication passage portion is discharged as it is from the game area and is prevented from reaching the first ball entry portion. As described above, a part of the game balls passing through the second entrance part is discharged from the game area without flowing into the first entrance part. The impression that it is the 1 large entrance part mentioned above can be strengthened compared with the structure which goes to a discharge port.

Feature E8. In a portion where the passage portion is formed by the shutter of the second ball entry portion in the predetermined flow path, a speed reduction portion (protruding portion 335a, 336a) for decelerating the game ball is provided,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E4 to E7, wherein the speed reduction portion is disposed at a position closer to the communication passage portion.

  In a configuration in which the first entrance is more advantageous to the player than the second entrance, the game ball passes through the second entrance to the first entrance. It is assumed that the launch operation is executed in anticipation of this, and the player's attention is likely to be directed to the movement of the game ball from the second entrance part to the communication passage part. Here, in the configuration in which the speed reduction unit is provided in the passage portion formed by the shutter and the required passage time is extended, the degree of attention of the player is obtained by arranging the speed reduction portion so as to be biased toward the communication passage portion side. This makes it easy to follow the movement of the game ball with your eyes where it is easy to face. Thereby, it can contribute to the improvement of the further attention degree.

Feature E9. The first incoming ball portion is configured to switch to the receiving state based on the incoming ball to the second incoming ball portion,
During the period in which the second ball entering portion is in the receiving state in the first switching mode, the game ball passes through a portion where the passage portion is formed by the shutter of the second ball entering portion in the predetermined flow path. One of the features E1 to E8 is characterized in that it is configured to be shorter than a required period required to perform the operation and to be shorter than a period during which the first incoming ball portion is in the receiving state. Game machines.

  As shown in this feature, in the first switching mode, the period in which the second entrance part is in the receiving state, the part where the passage part is formed by the shutter of the second entrance part in the predetermined flow path is the game ball Even if it is shorter than the time required to pass the game ball, the game ball located on the shutter will enter the first ball entry unit when the first ball entry unit is switched to the receiving state. . Therefore, it is possible to secure the entrance to the second entrance part while increasing the number of game balls that move to the first entrance part by shortening the period of the acceptance state.

  In addition, since the period during which the second incoming ball is in the receiving state in the first switching mode is set to be shorter than the period during which the first incoming ball is in the receiving state, It can be easily understood from the behavior of the two entrance parts that the entrance is likely to occur, and the player can easily focus on entering the first entrance part.

Feature E10. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
First acquisition means (information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (holding information) when a ball enters a starting ball entering portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition function), and
First storage means (reserved ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the first acquisition means;
First determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the first storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the lottery process is performed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). Function to execute)
A first display portion (for example, a display portion DR for the working port) capable of variably displaying the pattern;
Prior to the determination by the first determination means or based on the determination being made by the first determination means, variable display of a picture is started on the first display unit, and the result of the determination The display of the stop corresponding to the above and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game round, and the variable display of the picture of each game round is made according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means First display control means (for example, a function of executing the game turn control process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for performing display control of the first display unit as performed,
A special pitching portion (a lower variable prize winning device provided in the gaming area and switchable between an accepting state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter and a non-accepting state in which entering is more difficult than the accepting state. 65)
The determination result by the first determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, and the special entrance portion is displayed on the basis of the fact that the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the first display control means. First switching control means for switching to the accepting state (a function for executing the opening / closing process of the lower variable winning device 65 in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The starting entrance portion is disposed on a predetermined flow path (right route) toward the special entrance portion, and is configured to receive and receive the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path. Can be switched to a non-acceptance state where entry is difficult,
Second acquisition means (in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) acquires predetermined information (value of the open random number counter C4) when the game ball passes through a predetermined passing portion (through gate 66) provided in the gaming area. Function of obtaining the value of the open random number counter C4),
Second storage means (electric storage area 633 in the RAM 604 of the main controller 162) for storing predetermined information acquired by the second acquisition means;
Second determination means for determining whether or not to switch the starting and entering ball portion to the receiving state based on predetermined information stored in the second storage means (support lottery is executed in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) Function)
A second display section (through gate display section DS) capable of variably displaying the pattern;
Prior to the determination by the second determination means or based on the determination made by the second determination means, the variable display of the picture on the second display unit is started and corresponds to the determination result by the second determination means A second display control means (a function of executing a display process of the pattern in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for confirming and displaying the displayed pattern;
When a picture corresponding to the winning result is confirmed and displayed on the second display section, second switching control means (a MPU 602 of the main control device 162 performs a big prize opening / closing process) that switches the starting pitching section to the receiving state. Function to be executed)
As a switching control mode by the second switching control means, a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode in which a period during which the starting ball entering part is in the non-accepting state is shorter than the first switching mode. (High frequency support mode)
The second display control means is configured so that the second switching mode is more than a first specific period that is a sum of a variable display period and a fixed display period of a picture in the second display unit when the second switching unit is in the first switching mode. The second specific period, which is the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period of the pattern in the second display unit in the case of being, is configured to be shorter,
A first predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls is paid out based on the entrance to the starting entrance portion, and a second predetermined amount that is greater than the first predetermined number based on the entrance to the special entrance portion. A payout means (payout device 222) for paying out a number (for example, 10) of game balls;
The starting ball entrance portion has an opening (right operation port 63a) through which a plurality of game balls can pass simultaneously and a shutter (shutter 331) for opening and closing the opening, and the shutter is disposed at a closed position. It is configured to be in the non-accepting state and to be in the accepting state when the shutter is disposed in an open position.
When the starting entrance ball portion is in the non-accepting state, a part of the rolling surface of the game ball in the predetermined flow path is formed by the shutter,
The time required for the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path to pass over the shutter is configured to be longer than the second specific period and shorter than the first specific period. A featured gaming machine.

  According to the feature E10, the time required for the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path to pass over the shutter is the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period of the pattern in the second switching mode (second specific period). Longer than. For this reason, during the second switching mode, most of the game balls that have reached the second entrance part will enter the second entrance part. That is, the game ball launched into the predetermined flow path during the second switching mode flows into the second entrance part and the entrance into the first entrance part is suppressed. On the other hand, the required period is shorter than the sum (first specific period) of the variable display period and the fixed display period of the pattern in the first switching mode. For this reason, during the first switching mode, even if the second pitching portion is continuously switched to the receiving state, part of the game balls that have reached the shutter pass through the second pitching portion and pass through the first pitching portion. Head to the club. Thus, while entering into the first entrance part which is relatively advantageous occurs during the first switching mode, entry into the first entrance part is suppressed during the second switching mode. Thus, it is possible to make a clear difference in the game progress.

  Here, in order to differentiate each switching mode, in order to reduce the number of game balls (spills) that pass through the second pitching part and go to the first pitching part during the second switching mode, the specific period can be shortened. Good. However, if the specific period is simply shortened, it becomes difficult to start / stop according to the result displayed on the display unit (advantageously advance the game), and the significance of providing the display unit is diminished. End up. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to prevent the variable display period and the fixed display period of the picture from becoming extremely short while suppressing the spilling. Thereby, the improvement of the attention degree to a game is suitably realizable.

  In addition, it is also possible to apply each technical idea shown to the said feature E2-feature E9 to this feature.

  Further, the technical ideas shown in the features E1 to E10 may be applied to the features A to D.

<Feature F group>
The following feature F group is: “A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball to the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball fired from the game ball launching means enters the entrance part provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1) "In the gaming machine of the type described above, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game." It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature F1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (holding information) when a ball enters a starting ball entering portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition function), and
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the lottery process is executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
A pattern display means (for example, a main display unit 81) having a display section (for example, a display section DR for the operation port) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display section;
Prior to the determination being performed by the determination unit or based on the determination being performed by the determination unit, the display unit starts variable display of a pattern, and a stop result corresponding to the determination result is displayed. Displaying and ending the variable display of the picture is regarded as one game round, and the picture is variably displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means for controlling the display means (for example, a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed from the normal game state to the player based on the fact that the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game time control means. Special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (for example, opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to
As the normal gaming state, a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low-frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. The second normal gaming state corresponding to the probability mode and the high-frequency support mode) and the third normal gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (the third normal state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode) Gaming state), and
The game times control means has variable display period setting means for setting the variable display period of the picture (function of setting the variable display time of the picture in the display unit for the operation port in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The variable display period setting means is a period shortening means (varied by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that makes the variable display period of the picture in the third normal gaming state shorter than the variable display period of the picture in the second normal gaming state. A gaming machine having a function of switching a display time table.

  According to the feature F1, the player's advantage is increased by switching the gaming state in the order of the first normal gaming state → the second normal gaming state → the third normal gaming state. Here, when transitioning from the second normal game state to the third normal game state, the variable display period of the pattern is shortened, and the progress speed of the game is increased. Thereby, the refreshing feeling of the game when it is promoted from the first normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state through the second normal gaming state can be preferably improved, and it can contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

  Note that the first normal gaming state, the second normal gaming state, and the third normal gaming state are, for example, more in the second normal gaming state than in the first normal gaming state when compared with increase / decrease in the number of balls as the game progresses. It is preferable that a difference is provided so that the player is more advantageous to the player, and the third normal game state is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state.

Feature F2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (holding information) when a ball enters a starting ball entering portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition function), and
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the lottery process is executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
A pattern display means (for example, a main display unit 81) having a display section (for example, a display section DR for the operation port) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display section;
Prior to the determination being performed by the determination unit or based on the determination being performed by the determination unit, the display unit starts variable display of a pattern, and a stop result corresponding to the determination result is displayed. Displaying and ending the variable display of the picture is regarded as one game round, and the picture is variably displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means for controlling the display means (for example, a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed from the normal game state to the player based on the fact that the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game time control means. Special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (for example, opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to
As the normal gaming state, a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low-frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. The second normal gaming state corresponding to the probability mode and the high-frequency support mode) and the third normal gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (the third normal state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode) Gaming state), and
When the determination result by the determination means in the first normal gaming state becomes a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, the first normal gaming state passes through the special gaming state to the second normal gaming state. A first transition means for shifting (a function of executing a process of shifting to the second normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
Second transition means for directly shifting from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state (function to shift to the third normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
The game times control means has variable display period setting means for setting the variable display period of the picture (function of setting the variable display time of the picture in the display unit for the operation port in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The variable display period setting means is a period shortening means (varied by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that makes the variable display period of the picture in the third normal gaming state shorter than the variable display period of the picture in the second normal gaming state. A gaming machine having a function of switching a display time table.

  According to the feature F2, the player's advantage is increased by switching the gaming state in the order of the first normal gaming state → the second normal gaming state → the third normal gaming state. Here, when transitioning from the second normal game state to the third normal game state, the variable display period of the pattern is shortened, and the progress speed of the game is increased. Thereby, the refreshing feeling of the game when it is promoted from the first normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state through the second normal gaming state can be preferably improved, and it can contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

  In particular, the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state is configured to go through the special gaming state, but the configuration directly shifts from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state. Therefore, when the progress speed of the game is accelerated during the transition from the second normal game state to the third normal game state, the difference can be made to stand out. In such a configuration, the change can be easily understood without excessively increasing the difference in the variable display period between the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to secure an opportunity to visually check the variable display of the pattern by suppressing the variable display period of the pattern from becoming extremely short in the configuration in which the progress speed of the game is changed.

  Note that the first normal gaming state, the second normal gaming state, and the third normal gaming state are, for example, more in the second normal gaming state than in the first normal gaming state when compared with increase / decrease in the number of balls as the game progresses. It is preferable that a difference is provided so that the player is more advantageous to the player, and the third normal game state is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state.

Feature F3. When the first transition means shifts from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state, the reference number setting means for setting the reference number (the number of time reductions) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 sets the time reduction number). Function to set)
The second transition means is configured to shift from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state when the number of games executed in the second normal gaming state reaches the reference number. The gaming machine according to Feature F2, characterized in that

  As shown in feature F3, if the configuration is such that the transition from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state with the passage of the reference number of times, it can appear that the game has suddenly accelerated with the passage of the reference number of times. . By adopting such a configuration, the effect shown in the feature F2 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature F4. Switching means for switching the starting entrance part to an accepting state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting entrance part and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which entering the game ball is more difficult than the accepting state (Electric accessory 71),
Switching control means for controlling the switching means (function to execute the power support process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The acquired information storage means can store a plurality of the special information,
The variable display period setting unit is configured to set the variable display period so that the larger the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage unit, the shorter the variable display period of the picture on the display unit. And
The period shortening means has at least a variable display period of the picture set when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means has reached an upper limit in the third normal gaming state. (2) The variable display period is shortened so as to be shorter than the variable display period of the picture set when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means reaches the upper limit in the normal gaming state The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, which is configured as described above.

  As shown in the feature F4, if the starting ball entrance part is configured to be switchable between an accepting state and a non-accepting state, the entering frequency of game balls can be increased according to the situation. By combining such a configuration with a configuration in which the variable display period is shortened as the number of stored special information increases, it is possible to suitably increase the game progress speed. Here, it is assumed that the variable display period is included when the number of memories has reached the upper limit as a target for shortening the period accompanying the transition from the second normal gaming state advantageous to the player to the further advantageous third normal gaming state. Thus, it is possible to increase the speed of the game in a situation where the entrance to the starting entrance part is frequent. Therefore, the effect of raising the progress speed of the game with the transition from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state can be suitably exhibited.

Feature F5. The game times control means has stop display period setting means for setting the stop notation period of the picture (function of setting a fixed display time of the picture in the display unit for the operation port in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The stop display period setting means is configured to make the stop display period in the second normal gaming state and the stop display period in the third normal gaming state the same period,
The period shortening means is configured such that the variable display period of the picture in the second normal gaming state is longer than the stop display period, and the variable display period of the pattern in the third normal gaming state is shorter than the stop display period. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, wherein the variable notation period is shortened as described above.

  In the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state, if the pattern stop display period (determined display period) is made common and the variable display period of the pattern is made to be different from the stop display period, The notable player can compare the lengths of the variable display periods based on the same standard (common stop notation period). Thereby, it can be communicated to the player that the progress speed of the game is increasing.

  Feature F6. The period shortening means shortens the variable display period of the pattern in the second normal gaming state so as to be shorter than the variable display period of the pattern in the first normal gaming state, and changes the pattern in the third normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, characterized in that the display period is shortened so as to be shorter than the variable display period of the picture in the second normal gaming state. .

  As shown in feature F6, the player's sense of exaltation can be suitably improved by configuring so that the progress speed of the game becomes faster as the game state is stepped up so as to be advantageous to the player. .

Feature F7. As the starting entrance part, a first starting entrance part (lower operation entrance part 62) disposed on a first down path (left route) in the gaming area is different from the first down path. A second starting ball entry portion (right operation ball entry portion 63) disposed in the two downstream paths (right route);
The first downflow path and the second downflow path are such that a game ball flowing down the first downflow path cannot enter the second starting entrance ball portion and a game ball flowing down the second downflow path is the first downflow path. 1 It is formed so as not to enter the starting entrance part,
In the first normal gaming state, it is possible to advance the game advantageously to the player by firing the game ball to the first flow down path compared to the case of firing the game ball to the second flow down path. In the second normal game state and the third normal game state, by playing a game ball to the second downstream path, the game is played in comparison with the case of launching the game ball to the first downstream path. It is configured to be able to proceed in favor of the person,
The variable display period setting means is based on a first setting means for setting a variable display period of the pattern based on a ball entering the first starting ball entering part and a ball entering the second starting ball entering part. Second setting means for setting a variable display period of the picture,
The first setting means has the same variable notation period of the picture in the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state,
The second setting means constitutes the period shortening means so that the variable notation period of the picture in the third normal gaming state is shorter than the variable display period of the picture in the second normal gaming state. The game machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, wherein the variable display period is shortened.

  As shown in the feature F7, by shortening the variable display period for the second starting entrance part which is the main entrance destination in the third normal gaming state, it is possible to suitably exert the effect of the shortening of the period. And, for the first starting entrance part which is not the main entrance destination, by making the variable display period the same in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, it is refreshing by changing the progress speed of the game It is possible to suppress the improvement of the above from becoming a factor that excessively complicates the control processing related to the variable display of the pattern.

Feature F8. A variable pitching portion (for example, a lower side) provided in the gaming area and capable of switching between an accepting state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter and a non-accepting state in which entering is more difficult than the accepting state. Variable prize winning device 65),
A payout means (payout device 222) for paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on the entry into the variable pitching portion;
By shifting to the special gaming state by the special gaming state transition means, the variable pitching portion is configured to switch to the receiving state,
As the special gaming state, there are provided a first special gaming state and a second special gaming state in which a period during which the variable pitching portion is in the receiving state is shorter than the first special gaming state,
The third normal gaming state is configured such that a probability of entering the variable pitching portion when transitioning to the second special gaming state is higher than that in the second normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7.

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, an increase in the number of balls can be expected by repeating the transition to the second special game state in the third normal game state. Here, the pace of transition to the second special game state depends on the digestion speed of the game times. As shown in the feature F1 etc., in the third normal game state, by increasing this digestion speed, the increase speed of the ball is changed (fast) without excessively complicating various structures provided in the game area etc. be able to.

Feature F9. The predetermined determination information includes first determination information (information corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (information corresponding to the special hit result),
The special game state transition unit is a unit (main control) that shifts the gaming state to the first special gaming state as the special gaming state when the determination result by the determination unit is a determination result corresponding to the first determination information. A function of executing a transition process to the first special gaming state in the MPU 602 of the device 162) and the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to the second determination information, the gaming state is changed to the special gaming state. And a means for shifting to the second special gaming state (function to execute the transition processing to the second special gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162),
At least in the third normal gaming state, the determination result by the determination means is more likely to be a determination result corresponding to the second determination information than the determination result corresponding to the first determination information,
The second special game state is set so that a period during which the second special game state is maintained in the special game state is shorter than the first special game state,
The period shortening means sets the variable display period of the picture in the second normal gaming state to the second determination information when a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the third normal gaming state. The variable display period is set so as to be shorter than the variable display period of the pattern when the corresponding determination result is obtained. Any one of the characteristics F1 to F8 is characterized in that Game machines.

  When the transition to the second special game state frequently occurs in the third normal game state, the progress of the game may be delayed by securing the execution period of the second special game state. This can be a factor that prevents an increase in the progress speed of the game in the three normal gaming states. Therefore, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the second normal gaming state, the transition to the second special gaming state is repeated by adopting a configuration in which the variable display period of the picture is shortened. Even if it exists, the progress speed of a game can be raised and the refreshing feeling of a game can be improved.

Feature F10. Switching means for switching the starting entrance part to an accepting state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting entrance part and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which entering the game ball is more difficult than the accepting state (Electric accessory 71),
Switching control means for controlling the switching means (function to execute the power support process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The variable display period setting unit is configured to set the variable display period so that the variable display period of the pattern is shortened as the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage unit increases.
The period shortening means determines that the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means has reached an upper limit in the third normal gaming state and the determination result by the determination means corresponds to second determination information The variable display period of the picture set when the result is reached, the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the second normal gaming state has reached the upper limit, and the determination means The variable display period is set such that the variable display period is set to be shorter than the variable display period of the picture set when the determination result is a determination result corresponding to the second determination information. Gaming machine.

  As shown in this feature, the starting pitching portion can be switched between the accepting state and the non-accepting state, and the number of special information is secured (for example, the vicinity of the upper limit is shifted), so that the game progress speed can be increased. . However, for example, when the game state is shifted to the second special game state every game time, it is assumed that the progress of the game is delayed as a result of securing the execution period of the second special game state. This is assumed to be an obstacle to improving the exhilaration of the game. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the variable display period is shortened when the number of stored special information has reached the upper limit, the effects shown in the feature F1 and the like can be preferably exhibited. it can.

Feature F11. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (holding information) when a ball enters a starting ball entering portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition function), and
Acquisition information storage means (reserved ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the lottery process is executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
A pattern display means (for example, a main display unit 81) having a display section (for example, a display section DR for the operation port) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display section;
Prior to the determination being performed by the determination unit or based on the determination being performed by the determination unit, the variable display of the pattern is started in the pattern display unit, and a stop result corresponding to the determination result When the variable display of the picture is terminated as one game round, the graphic of each game round is variably displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means for controlling the pattern display means (for example, a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed from the normal game state to the player based on the fact that the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game time control means. Special game state transition means (function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special game state (for example, opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to
Switching means for switching the starting entrance part to an accepting state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting entrance part and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which entering the game ball is more difficult than the accepting state (Electric accessory 71),
Switching control means for controlling the switching means (function to execute the power support process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
As a switching control mode of the switching means by the switching control means, a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high frequency support) in which the non-accepting period is shorter than the first switching mode. Mode), and
As a determination mode for performing the determination by the determination means, a high probability mode in which a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high and a probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are relative With a low low probability mode,
As the normal gaming state, a first normal gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, a second normal gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode, and the first switching Mode and a third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode,
The game times control means has variable display period setting means for setting the variable display period of the picture (function of setting the variable display time of the picture in the display unit for the operation port in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The variable display period setting means is a period shortening means (varied by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that makes the variable display period of the picture in the third normal gaming state shorter than the variable display period of the picture in the second normal gaming state. A gaming machine having a function of switching a display time table.

  According to the feature F11, the frequency of entering the starting entrance portion is reduced by shifting from the second normal gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. However, since the variable display period of the pattern is shortened in the third normal gaming state as compared with the second normal gaming state, it is possible to suppress a slowing of the game progress speed due to a decrease in the pitching frequency. This is preferable for improving the degree of attention to the game.

Feature F12. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (holding information) when a ball enters a starting ball entering portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition function), and
Acquisition information storage means (reserved ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the lottery process is executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
A pattern display means (for example, a main display unit 81) having a display section (for example, a display section DR for the operation port) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display section;
Prior to the determination being performed by the determination unit or based on the determination being performed by the determination unit, the display unit starts variable display of a pattern, and a stop result corresponding to the determination result is displayed. Displaying and ending the variable display of the picture is regarded as one game round, and the picture is variably displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means for controlling the display means (for example, a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed from the normal game state to the player based on the fact that the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game time control means. Special game state transition means (function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special game state (for example, opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to
Switching means for switching the starting entrance part to an accepting state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting entrance part and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which entering the game ball is more difficult than the accepting state (Electric accessory 71),
Switching control means for controlling the switching means (function to execute the power support process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
As a switching control mode of the switching means by the switching control means, a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high frequency support) in which the non-accepting period is shorter than the first switching mode. Mode), and
As a determination mode for performing the determination by the determination means, a high probability mode in which a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high and a probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are relative With a low low probability mode,
As the normal gaming state, a first normal gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, a second normal gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode, and the first switching Mode and a third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode,
When the determination result by the determination means in the first normal gaming state becomes a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, the first normal gaming state passes through the special gaming state to the second normal gaming state. A first transition means for shifting (a function of executing a process of shifting to the second normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
A reference number setting means (a function for setting the number of time reductions in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for setting a reference number of times (number of time reductions) when shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state;
When the number of games executed in the second normal gaming state becomes the reference number, the second transition means (MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for shifting from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state. And a function of executing a process of shifting to the third normal gaming state at
The game times control means has variable display period setting means for setting the variable display period of the picture (function of setting the variable display time of the picture in the display unit for the operation port in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The variable display period setting means is a period shortening means (varied by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that makes the variable display period of the picture in the third normal gaming state shorter than the variable display period of the picture in the second normal gaming state. A gaming machine having a function of switching a display time table.

  According to the feature F12, the frequency of entering the start ball entering portion decreases by shifting from the second normal gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. However, since the variable display period of the pattern is shortened in the third normal gaming state as compared with the second normal gaming state, it is possible to suppress a slowing of the game progress speed due to a decrease in the pitching frequency. This is preferable for improving the degree of attention to the game.

  In particular, the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state is configured to go through the special gaming state, but the configuration directly shifts from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state. Therefore, when the progress speed of the game is accelerated during the transition from the second normal game state to the third normal game state, the difference can be made to stand out. In such a configuration, the change can be easily understood without excessively increasing the difference in the variable display period between the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to secure an opportunity to visually check the variable display of the pattern by suppressing the variable display period of the pattern from becoming extremely short in the configuration in which the progress speed of the game is changed.

Feature F13. A payout means (payout device 222) for paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on the entrance to the starting entrance portion,
The acquired information storage means, when a new entry to the starting entry part occurs in a situation where the number of stored special information has reached a preset upper limit, Based on the configuration that does not memorize special information,
In the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the difference in the storage rate in which the special information is stored by the acquired information storage unit is smaller than the difference in the entrance rate to the starting entrance part. The gaming machine according to Feature F11 or Feature F12, which is configured as described above.

  According to the feature F13, in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the second normal game state is preferentially given in that the number of game balls to be paid out based on the ball entering the starting ball entering part is large. The However, the number of special information acquired based on the entrance to the starting entrance part can be made equal in the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the differentiation between the two normal gaming states by the shortening of the variable display period described above does not function well because the third normal gaming state is inferior in the transition of the number of special information accompanying the progress of the game.

  Incidentally, in the combination with the feature F8, the “payout means” shown in this feature and the “payout means” shown in the feature F8 can be the same. In this case, the number of game balls to be paid out based on the entrance to the starting entrance part is “first predetermined number”, and the number of game balls to be paid out based on the entrance to the variable entrance part is “second predetermined number”. "Number".

  In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is “the acquired information storage means is a new entry into the starting entrance part under the condition that the number of stored special information has reached a preset upper limit. In the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state, the second normal gaming state is more in the starting ball entering part when the occurrence occurs. The gaming machine according to Feature F11 or Feature F12, wherein the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage unit is the same while the frequency of entering the ball is increased. It is also possible.

  Note that the technical ideas shown in the features F11 to F13 can be applied to the features F1 to F10.

  Further, the technical ideas shown in the features F1 to F13 may be applied to the features A to E.

<Feature G group>
The following group G is: “A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball to the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball fired from the game ball launching means enters the entrance part provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1) "In the gaming machine of the type described above, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game." It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature G1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
First special information (for example, holding information related to the lower working port 62a) is acquired when a ball enters the first starting ball entering part (for example, the lower working port 62a) provided in the game area. Information acquisition means (function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
First acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 lower working port holding area Ra) capable of storing a plurality of first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
First lottery means (the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162 executes the lottery process) that sequentially performs the first lottery process (lottery such as jackpot) based on the first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means. Function)
Second special information for acquiring second special information (holding information related to the right operation port 63a) when a ball enters a second start entrance part (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition means (function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
Second acquisition information storage means (reserved area Rb for the right working port of RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
Second lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that performs second lottery processing (lottery such as jackpot) based on the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means )When,
A first display unit (for example, a lower working port display unit DL) and a second display unit (for example, a right working port display unit DR) have a pattern on each of the first display unit and the second display unit. Variable displayable picture display means (for example, main display unit 81),
Prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or based on the fact that the first lottery process has been performed by the first lottery means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the first display unit. The first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means that the stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game time. First game time control means (for example, a function of executing game time control processing by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for controlling the picture display means so that the variable display of the picture of each game time is performed according to information; ,
Prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means, or based on the fact that the second lottery process has been performed by the second lottery means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the second display unit. And displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process and ending the variable display of the pattern as one game time, the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means Second game time control means (for example, a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the picture display means so that the variable display of the pattern of each game time is performed according to the information; ,
The lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result, and a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the first game times control means, or the lottery result by the second lottery means is predetermined A special game state (for example, an open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the second game time control means stops and displays a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result. Special game state transition means (function to execute processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The game times by the first game time control means and the game times by the second game time control means can be advanced at the same time,
As the normal gaming state, a first normal gaming state (a normal gaming state compatible with a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode), a second normal gaming state (a normal gaming state compatible with a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode), A third normal gaming state (a normal gaming state corresponding to a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode),
In the third normal gaming state, the required period of game times by the first game number control means is different from the required time of game times by the first game number control means,
In the first normal gaming state, when the lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result or when the lottery result by the second lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result, the first normal game A first transition means for transitioning from the state to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state (function for executing a process of transitioning to the second normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
A reference number setting means (a function for setting the number of time reductions in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for setting a reference number of times (number of time reductions) when shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state;
When the number of games executed in the second normal gaming state becomes the reference number, the second transition means (MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for shifting from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state. And a function of executing a process of shifting to the third normal gaming state at
The reference number corresponds to the first special information when the first special information is stored in the first acquisition information storage unit when the first transition unit shifts to the second normal gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that the game times to be executed are set to be executed before the transition to the third normal gaming state.

  According to the characteristic G1, when the winning result is obtained in the first normal gaming state and the second normal gaming state is entered, the reference number is set as the number of game times that can be executed in the second normal gaming state. . Then, when the number of game times executed in the second normal game state reaches the reference number, the state shifts to the third normal game state. At this time, all of the special information related to the first pitching portion is digested during the second normal gaming state, and carry-over to the third normal gaming state is avoided. That is, in the third normal gaming state, the game times proceed based on the special information related to the second pitching portion. The required times (the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period) are different between the game times corresponding to the first pitching part and the game times corresponding to the second pitching part, and the progress rhythm of the game is different. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to advance the game in the third normal gaming state with a good rhythm by fully digesting the special information related to the first incoming ball part before shifting to the third normal gaming state.

  In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is “a game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed” and a first start ball entering portion (for example, the lower operation port 62a) provided in the game area. 1st special information acquisition means (function to perform information acquisition processing in MPU602 of main control unit 162) which acquires the 1st special information (for example, holding information concerning lower operation mouth 62a), when the entrance to a ball occurs And a first acquisition information storage means (lower working port holding area Ra of the RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means, and stored in the first acquisition information storage means. A first lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for sequentially performing a first lottery process (lottery such as a big hit) based on the first special information that is provided, and the game area Second Second special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring second special information (holding information relating to the right operation port 63a) when a ball enters the moving ball unit (for example, the right operation port 63a). A function for executing the information acquisition process), and second acquisition information storage means (reserved area Rb for the right working port of the RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means, The second lottery means (the lottery process is executed by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) that sequentially performs the second lottery process (lottery such as jackpot) based on the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means Function), a first display unit (for example, a lower working port display unit DL) and a second display unit (for example, a right working port display unit DR), and the first display unit and the second display unit Variable display of each pattern Prior to the first lottery process being performed by the pattern display means (for example, the main display unit 81) and the first lottery means, or based on the fact that the first lottery process has been performed by the first lottery means. The first display unit starts variable display of a picture, displays a stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process, and ends the variable display of the picture as one game time. First game time control means (for example, MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the picture display means so that the variable display of the picture of each game time is performed according to the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means. And a function for executing the game lot control process at the second lottery means prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means or based on the fact that the second lottery process has been performed by the second lottery means. Accordingly, the variable display of the pattern is started in the second display unit, the stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process is displayed, and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, Second game time control means (for example, main controller 162) for controlling the picture display means so that the variable display of the picture of each game time is performed according to the second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means. And a game lot control process performed by the MPU 602) and a lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result, and a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the first game round control means. A game based on the fact that the lottery result by the second lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result and the picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the second game time control means. Special game state transition means (function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for shifting the state to a special game state (for example, an opening / closing execution mode) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state; The normal gaming state includes a first normal gaming state (a normal gaming state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (a normal gaming state corresponding to a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode) ) And a third normal gaming state (a normal gaming state corresponding to a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode), and the lottery result by the first lottery means is a predetermined winning in the first normal gaming state When the result is obtained or when the lottery result by the second lottery means is a predetermined winning result, the second game is passed from the first normal gaming state through the special gaming state. First transition means for transitioning to the gaming state (function of executing processing for transitioning to the second normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162), and transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state In this case, the reference number setting means (function for setting the number of time reductions in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting the reference number (the number of time reductions) and the number of games executed in the second normal gaming state are the reference Second transition means for shifting from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state when the number of times is reached (a function of executing a process of shifting to the third normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) The reference number of times is determined when the first special information is stored in the first acquisition information storage means when the first transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that the game times corresponding to the first special information are defined to be executed before the transition to the third normal gaming state. Can also be used.

Feature G2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
First special information (for example, holding information related to the lower working port 62a) is acquired when a ball enters the first starting ball entering part (for example, the lower working port 62a) provided in the game area. Information acquisition means (function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
First acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 lower working port holding area Ra) capable of storing a plurality of first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
First lottery means (the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162 executes the lottery process) that sequentially performs the first lottery process (lottery such as jackpot) based on the first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means. Function)
Second special information for acquiring second special information (holding information related to the right operation port 63a) when a ball enters a second start entrance part (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition means (function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
Second acquisition information storage means (reserved area Rb for the right working port of RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
Second lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that performs second lottery processing (lottery such as jackpot) based on the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means )When,
A first display unit (for example, a lower working port display unit DL) and a second display unit (for example, a right working port display unit DR) have a pattern on each of the first display unit and the second display unit. Variable displayable picture display means (for example, main display unit 81),
Prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or based on the fact that the first lottery process has been performed by the first lottery means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the first display unit. The first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means that the stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game time. First game time control means (for example, a function of executing game time control processing by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for controlling the picture display means so that the variable display of the picture of each game time is performed according to information; ,
Prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means, or based on the fact that the second lottery process has been performed by the second lottery means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the second display unit. And displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process and ending the variable display of the pattern as one game time, the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means Second game time control means (for example, a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the picture display means so that the variable display of the pattern of each game time is performed according to the information; ,
The lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result, and a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the first game times control means, or the lottery result by the second lottery means is predetermined A special game state (for example, an open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the second game time control means stops and displays a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result. Special game state transition means (function to execute processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The game times by the first game time control means and the game times by the second game time control means can be advanced at the same time,
As the normal gaming state, a first normal gaming state (a normal gaming state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. And a normal game state compatible with the high-frequency support mode) and a third normal game state (a normal game state compatible with the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode) more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. And
In the first normal gaming state, when the lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result or when the lottery result by the second lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result, the first normal game A first transition means for transitioning from the state to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state (function for executing a process of transitioning to the second normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
A reference number setting means (a function for setting the number of time reductions in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for setting a reference number of times (number of time reductions) when shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state;
When the number of games executed in the second normal gaming state becomes the reference number, the second transition means (MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for shifting from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state. And a function of executing a process of shifting to the third normal gaming state at
The reference number corresponds to the first special information when the first special information is stored in the first acquisition information storage unit when the first transition unit shifts to the second normal gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that the game times to be executed are set to be executed before the transition to the third normal gaming state.

  According to the feature G2, when a predetermined winning result is obtained in the first normal gaming state and the second normal gaming state is entered, the reference number is set as the number of game times that can be executed in the second normal gaming state. Is done. Then, when the number of game times executed in the second normal game state reaches the reference number, the state shifts to the third normal game state. Here, the reference number of times is defined so that all of the special information related to the first pitching portion can be digested during the second normal gaming state. For this reason, when the second normal gaming state is changed to the third normal gaming state without obtaining a predetermined winning result, all of the special information relating to the first pitching portion is digested during the second normal gaming state. Thus, carry-over to the third normal gaming state is avoided. That is, in the third normal gaming state, the game times proceed based on the special information related to the second pitching portion. In this way, by suppressing the intervention of the game times related to the first entrance part, it is possible to advance the game in the third normal gaming state with a good rhythm.

  Feature G3. The game according to Feature G2, characterized in that at least in the third normal gaming state, the lottery by the second lottery means is more advantageous to the player than the lottery by the first lottery means. Machine.

  In the configuration in which the second pitching part is preferentially shown as the characteristic G3, the third normal game is obtained by digesting the special information related to the first pitching part before shifting to the third normal gaming state. It can suppress that the player's predominance in a state falls.

Feature G4. In the second transition means, the sum of the number of game times executed by the first game number control means and the number of game times executed by the second game number control means in the second normal game state has reached the reference number. Based on that, it is configured to shift from the second normal gaming card to the third normal gaming state,
The reference number of times is larger than the upper limit number of the first special information that can be stored in the first acquisition information storage unit,
When the number of first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state has reached the upper limit number, it is executed based on the first special information The total duration of the variable display period and the fixed display period of the picture on the first display unit for each game time is the minimum required time required for the game times executed in the second normal game state to reach the reference number of times. It is comprised so that it may become shorter than this, The game machine as described in the characteristic G2 or the characteristic G3 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the feature G4, whether or not the reference number has been reached is determined by the sum of the game times related to the first special information and the game times related to the second special information. The reference number of times is set to be larger than the upper limit number of memories of the first special information, and the sum (total period) of the variable display period and the fixed display period of the pattern of the first display unit in the second normal gaming state is the first. (2) By carrying out the game times executed in the normal game state to be shorter than the minimum required time required for reaching the reference number of times, it is possible to suitably avoid carrying over the first special information to the third normal game state. it can. Thereby, the effect shown to the characteristic G2 can be exhibited suitably.

Feature G5. In the second transition means, the sum of the number of game times executed by the first game number control means and the number of game times executed by the second game number control means in the second normal game state has reached the reference number. Based on that, it is configured to shift from the second normal gaming card to the third normal gaming state,
The reference number of times that the upper limit number of first special information that can be stored in the first acquisition information storage unit and the number of first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit reach the upper limit number. The number of game times corresponding to the first special information is set to be greater than the sum of the maximum number of game times that can be executed by the second game time control means. The gaming machine according to Feature G2 or Feature G3, wherein:

  According to the feature G5, whether or not the reference number has been reached is determined by the sum of the game times related to the first special information and the game times related to the second special information. By increasing the reference count to the sum of the upper limit number of storage of the first special information and the game times corresponding to the second special information that can be executed before all the first special information is consumed, the third normal gaming state It is possible to suitably avoid carrying over the first special information. Thereby, the effect shown to the characteristic G2 can be exhibited suitably.

Feature G6. In the second transition means, the sum of the number of game times executed by the first game number control means and the number of game times executed by the second game number control means in the second normal game state has reached the reference number. Based on that, it is configured to shift from the second normal gaming card to the third normal gaming state,
In the second normal gaming state, when the number of first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit number, the first special information is included in the first special information. With respect to each game time, the variable display and final display of the picture on the second display unit are performed a predetermined number of times by the second game time control means during the total period of the variable display period and the final display period of the picture on the first display unit. It can be executed,
The gaming machine according to Feature G2 or Feature G3, wherein the reference number of times is greater than a sum of the upper limit number and the predetermined number of times.

  According to the feature G6, whether or not the reference number has been reached is determined by the sum of the game times related to the first special information and the game times related to the second special information. By increasing the reference count to the sum of the upper limit number of storage of the first special information and the game times corresponding to the second special information that can be executed before all the first special information is consumed, the third normal gaming state It is possible to suitably avoid carrying over the first special information. Thereby, the effect shown to the characteristic G2 can be exhibited suitably.

Feature G7. A special pitching portion (for example, an upper variable winning prize) that can be switched between an accepting state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which entering the game ball is more difficult than the accepting state. Device 64);
Switching means for special pitching part that switches the special pitching part to the receiving state in the special gaming state (function to execute opening / closing control in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
In the game area, as a flow path through which game balls flow down, a first flow path (left route) in which the first start ball input section is disposed, the second start ball input section, and the special ball input section And a second downflow path (right route) in which the game ball is disposed. In the first normal gaming state, the game ball is fired to the first downflow path rather than the second downflow path. It is more advantageous for the player, and in the second normal game state and the special game state, it is better for the player to launch the game ball to the second downstream path than to launch the game ball to the first downstream path. Configured to be advantageous,
The first downflow path and the second downflow path are such that a game ball flowing down the first downflow path cannot enter the second starting entrance ball portion and a game ball flowing down the second downflow path is the first downflow path. 1 It is formed so as not to enter the starting entrance part,
The special ball entry portion is disposed on the upstream side of the second start ball entry portion in the second flow path, and the game ball entering the second start ball entry portion when being in the receiving state. It is configured to prevent flow down,
Information display means for displaying information corresponding to the number of game times executed in the second normal gaming state (function of displaying the remaining number on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G6.

  According to the feature G7, the launch destination of the game ball is changed from the first flow down path to the second flow down path with the transition to the special game state. At this time, when the special ball entering part is in the receiving state, the game ball is prevented from flowing into the second starting ball entering part. Thereby, the number of second special information stored at the start of the second normal gaming state can be reduced. Therefore, at the start of the second normal gaming state, it is possible to suppress both the gaming times related to the first special information and the gaming times related to the second special gaming state from repeating start / end. This is a configuration in which information corresponding to the number of game times executed in the second normal game state (for example, the number of executions or the remaining number of times until the reference number is reached) is displayed, and the display update speed is the second normal game. It is preferable for suppressing an excessive speed at the beginning of the state.

Feature G8. As the special game state, a first special game state (for example, an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 16R) and a second special game state in which the special pitched portion is less likely to be switched to the receiving state than the first special game state ( For example, 6R open / close execution mode) is provided.
The gaming machine according to Feature G7, wherein in the first lottery process by the first lottery means, the lottery result corresponding to the second special gaming state is more likely to be obtained than the first special gaming state. .

  As indicated by feature G8, when the transition is made from the first normal gaming state to the special gaming state to the special gaming state, the launch destination of the game ball is changed from the first downstream path to the second downstream path. In this special game state, for example, the second special game state with a small number of times of opening (number of rounds) is easily selected, and therefore the number of second special information stored until the transition to the second normal game state is minimized. can do.

Feature G9. A plurality of variable display periods of the picture by the second game times control means are provided, and the variable is displayed when the number of second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means is smaller than a predetermined number. A predetermined variable display period is set as the display period.
The sum of the predetermined variable display period and the fixed display period of the picture by the second game times control means is stored in the first acquisition information storage means by the first game times control means in accordance with the transition to the second normal game state. The gaming machine according to Feature G7 or Feature G8, wherein the gaming machine is set to be longer than a total period of the variable display period and the fixed display period when the upper limit number of game times are executed.

  According to the feature G9, when the number of second special information stored when shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state is less than a predetermined number, the variable display period is a predetermined variable display. A period is set. Then, all the game times related to the first special information are executed during the predetermined variable display period. With such a configuration, at the start of the second normal gaming state, it is possible to suitably suppress the start / end of both the gaming times related to the first special information and the gaming times related to the second special gaming state. . This is preferable for exhibiting the effects shown in the feature G7 and the like.

Feature G10. The second starting pitching portion can be switched between an accepting state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter and a non-accepting state in which entering is more difficult than the accepting state,
There is provided a second starting and entering part switching means for switching the second starting and entering part to the accepting state and the non-accepting state (a function of executing an opening / closing process of the electric accessory 71 by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). ,
As a switching control mode of the second starting ball entering part by the second starting ball entering part switching means, a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the second starting ball entering part than the first switching mode. Is provided with a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) in which the period of non-acceptance is short,
In the second normal gaming state, the second switching mode is set as the switching control mode,
In the second normal gaming state, the second game time control means can change the pattern on the second display unit by reducing the number of second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means. The display period is configured to be short,
In the second normal gaming state, the first game time control means has a variable display period of the pattern on the first display section regardless of the number of first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features G7 to G9, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be constant and have a shorter period than the first normal gaming state.

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, in the second normal gaming state, the switching control mode of the second starting ball entering unit is the second switching mode, so that the number of balls entering the second starting ball entering unit is increased. Thereby, in each game time related to the second starting entrance part, the same or similar variable display period is set as the variable display period of the pattern, and the game time advances at a constant rhythm and with a good tempo. Become.

  Here, when the first special information remains at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state, the game times related to the first special information have the same variable display period. The game times will be digested at a good tempo. Thereby, the effect shown in the characteristic 7 etc. can be exhibited more suitably.

  Feature G11. In the second normal gaming state, the variable display period of the picture set by the first game turn control means is configured to be shorter than the variable display period of the picture set by the second game turn control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G10, wherein:

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, even when the first special information is stored at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state, the game times related to the first special information are quickly digested. Become. This makes it possible to reduce the reference number set as the transition condition to the third normal gaming state as much as possible, and contribute to an improvement in the degree of freedom of setting the reference number.

  Feature G12. In the second normal game state, the fixed display period of the picture set by the first game turn control means is configured to be shorter than the fixed display period of the picture set by the second game turn control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G11.

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, even when the first special information is stored at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state, the game times related to the first special information are quickly digested. Become. This makes it possible to reduce the reference number set as the transition condition to the third normal gaming state as much as possible, and contribute to an improvement in the degree of freedom of setting the reference number.

  The technical ideas shown in the features G2 to G12 can be applied to the feature G1.

  Further, the technical ideas shown in the features G1 to G12 may be applied to the features A to F.

<Feature H group>
The following group H is characterized in that a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball fired from the game ball launching means enters the entrance part provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1) "In the gaming machine of the type described above, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game." It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature H1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
It is possible to switch between a first state (open state) in which a game ball flowing in the game region can enter and a second state (closed state) in which it is more difficult to enter than the first state. A starting ball entry part (right action ball entry part 63);
Incoming ball detecting means (detection sensor 391d) capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the starting ball entering part,
Effective period setting means for setting an effective period for entering the start ball entering section when the start ball entering section is switched from the second state to the first state (the effective period is set in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). Function to set)
When a game ball is detected by the incoming ball detection means during the effective period, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player (for example, the function of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 and the payout device 222) Function for paying out prize balls),
A passing portion (through gate 66) provided in the gaming area, through which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can pass;
Predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information (electric role holding) based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage section (a function of acquiring electric power hold in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
Predetermined information storage means (electric storage area 633 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the predetermined information acquisition means;
Lottery means (function to execute support lottery in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for performing a lottery determination based on the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means;
A pattern display means (main display unit 81) having a display section (through gate display section DS) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display section;
Prior to the lottery being performed by the lottery means or based on the fact that the lottery has been performed by the lottery means, a variable display of the pattern on the display unit is performed, and after the variable display, the result of the lottery is handled. Display control means (for example, a function of executing display control of the through-gate display unit DS in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for displaying the displayed pattern definitely;
When the winning result is determined by the lottery means, the starting pitching portion is switched from the second state to the first state, and a predetermined condition (for example, an opening time) is set under the first state. Switching control means (a function of executing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 71 by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the starting ball-inching portion from the first state to the second state when With
The effective period setting means sets the effective period so that the effective period continues for a predetermined period (e.g., 0.7 sec) even after the start pitching portion is switched from the first state to the second state. It is configured to
When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage unit when the starting ball-in-turn unit switches from the first state to the second state, the display control unit The display unit has variable display start means for starting the variable display of the picture (function of starting the variable display of the picture in the through-gate display part DS by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). A featured gaming machine.

  According to the feature H1, when the starting ball entering part is switched from the first state to the second state, the effective period is continued for a predetermined period even after switching to the second state. As a result, for example, a game ball that has flowed into the starting ball-in part at the same time as switching to the second state can be set as a privilege grant target. This is preferable in order to avoid becoming a factor that lowers the player's willingness to play, such as being unable to obtain a privilege that should originally be obtained. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when predetermined information is stored until the starting ball-in-turn unit switches to the second state, variable display of the pattern on the display unit is started without waiting for the expiration of the effective period. Is done. As described above, when the variable display of the pattern is started during the effective period and the effective period and the variable display period are at least partially overlapped, the starting pitching portion is changed from the first state to the second state to the first. It is possible to prevent the variable display period of the pattern from becoming extremely short when switching to the state and proceeding the game quickly. This is preferable for improving the degree of attention to the game.

  Note that, “the display control unit is configured to store the predetermined information in the predetermined information storage unit when the starting ball-in-turn unit is switched from the first state to the second state. "Variable display start means for starting variable display of the pattern on the display section before the effective period has passed" means "the display control means is configured so that the starting ball entering section moves from the first state to the second state. In the case where the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means when switching to, the variable display start means for starting the variable display of the pattern on the display section before the predetermined period elapses. It is also possible.

Feature H2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Start that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game region can enter and a second state (closed state) in which it is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. A ball entry part (right operation ball entry part 63)
Incoming ball detecting means (detection sensor 391d) capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the starting ball entering part,
Effective period setting means for setting an effective period for entering the start ball entering section when the start ball entering section is switched from the second state to the first state (the effective period is set in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). Function to set)
Special information acquisition means (a function to acquire hold information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information when the entrance detection is detected by the entrance detection means during the effective period;
A first lottery means (a function for executing a lottery for a big hit and special in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for performing a lottery determination based on the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
When a winning result is obtained by the lottery by the first lottery means, special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than usual (in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162, switching to the opening / closing execution mode) The function to execute the migration process), and
A passing portion (through gate 66) provided in the gaming area, through which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can pass;
Predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information (electric role holding) based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage section (a function of acquiring electric power hold in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
Predetermined information storage means (electric storage area 633 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the predetermined information acquisition means;
Second lottery means (function to execute support lottery in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for performing a lottery determination based on the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means;
A pattern display means (main display unit 81) having a display section (through gate display section DS) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display section;
Prior to the lottery being performed by the second lottery means or based on the fact that the lottery has been performed by the second lottery means, variable display of the picture is started on the picture display means, and the result of the lottery is displayed. Display control means (for example, a function of executing display control of the through-gate display unit DS in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for displaying the corresponding pattern in a definite manner;
When a winning result is obtained by the lottery by the second lottery means, the starting pitching part is switched from the second state to the first state, and a predetermined condition is established under the state of the first state. Switching control means (function to execute the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 71 in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the start ball entering portion from the first state to the second state when
The effective period setting means is configured to set the effective period so that the effective period continues for a predetermined period even after the start ball-in part is switched from the first state to the second state. ,
In the case where the predetermined information is stored when the start ball entering section is switched from the first state to the second state, the display control means is configured to display the display section before the effective period elapses. A gaming machine having variable display start means (a function of starting variable display of a picture in the through-gate display unit DS in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for starting variable display of the picture.

  According to the feature H2, when the starting ball entering part is switched from the first state to the second state, the effective period is continued for a predetermined period even after switching to the second state. As a result, for example, a game ball that has flowed into the starting ball-in part at the same time as switching to the second state can be set as a privilege grant target. This is preferable in order to avoid becoming a factor that lowers the player's willingness to play, such as being unable to obtain a privilege that should originally be obtained. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when predetermined information is stored until the starting ball-in-turn unit switches to the second state, variable display of the pattern on the display unit is started without waiting for the expiration of the effective period. Is done. As described above, when the variable display of the pattern is started during the effective period and the effective period and the variable display period are at least partially overlapped, the starting pitching portion is changed from the first state to the second state to the first. It is possible to prevent the variable display period of the pattern from becoming extremely short when switching to the state and proceeding the game quickly. This is preferable for improving the degree of attention to the game.

  In addition, “the display control means shown in this feature, when the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means when the starting ball-in-turn unit is switched from the first state to the second state, "Variable display start means for starting variable display of the pattern on the display section before the effective period has passed" means "the display control means is configured so that the starting ball entering section moves from the first state to the second state. When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means when switching to, variable display start means for starting variable display of the picture on the display section before the predetermined period has passed. It is also possible.

Feature H3. A ball path for guiding the game ball that has passed through the entrance portion (the right operation port 63a) of the starting entrance portion to a detection area (detection area DE) by the entrance detection means;
The feature H1 or feature H2, wherein the predetermined period is a period determined based on a required period required for the game ball to move from the entrance portion to the detection area (detection area DE). Gaming machine.

  As shown in the feature H3, the predetermined period is set in order to secure the profit of the player by setting the predetermined period based on the required period when the game ball moves from the entrance part of the starting entrance part to the detection area. (Effective period) can be prevented from becoming excessively long. This is a preferable configuration for suppressing fraudulent acts related to the starting ball entering part while ensuring the profit collateral shown in the feature H1 and the like.

  Feature H4. The variable display start means is a case in which the predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means before the start pitching part is switched from the first state to the second state and during the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein when the predetermined information is newly acquired, variable display of the pattern is started during the predetermined period.

  In the configuration in which the predetermined information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage portion, the predetermined information is not necessarily acquired and stored before the starting ball-in-turn portion is switched from the first state to the second state. In some cases, the predetermined information is acquired after switching to the second state. Therefore, when the predetermined information is newly acquired during the predetermined period, the variable display of the pattern is started during the predetermined period. For example, the variable display of the pattern is started after the predetermined period has elapsed. Compared to this, it can contribute to the smooth progress of the game.

  Feature H5. If the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means before the start ball entering part is switched from the first state to the second state, the variable display start means may The variable display of the picture is started at the timing when the start ball entering part is switched from the second state to the first state, according to any one of the features H1 to H4. Game machines.

  As shown in feature H5, when predetermined information is stored by the time when the starting pitching part is switched to the first state, variable display of the pattern is started at the timing when the starting pitching part is switched to the first state. Will be. If the predetermined period is used well in this way, the effect of promptly switching to the next second state while ensuring the variable display period of the pattern can be more suitably exhibited.

Feature H6. The display control means includes variable display period setting means for setting a variable display period of the picture on the display section (function of setting a variable display time of the picture on the through-gate display section DS in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162). Have
As a switching control mode of the starting entrance part by the switching control means, a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high) that is shorter in the second state than the first switching mode. Frequency support mode), and
The feature H5 is characterized in that, in the second switching mode, the variable display period set by the variable display period setting means is configured to be shorter than the predetermined period. Game machines.

  As shown in the feature H6, in the second switching mode in which the frequency of entering the starting entrance part is high, the variable display period is made shorter than the predetermined period and the fixed display of the pattern is started during the predetermined period. The following effects can be expected. In other words, with the configuration in which the starting pitching part is switched to the first state via the variable display of the pattern on the display unit → the confirmation display, the confirmation display can be started before the end of the predetermined period (effective period). It is possible to shorten the period until the entrance part is switched to the first state again.

  Note that the configuration shown in this feature is “when the display control unit starts the variable display unit of the pattern in the display unit before the predetermined period has elapsed, and the variable display period has elapsed during the predetermined period. In this case, the game machine according to the feature H5, which is configured to start the fixed display of the pattern on the display unit during the predetermined period.

Feature H7. The display control means is a fixed display period setting means (a function for setting a fixed display time of a picture in the through gate display section DS in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting a fixed display period of the picture in the display section. Have
When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage unit before the start ball entering part is switched from the first state to the second state, the variable display starting unit The display unit is configured to start variable display of the pattern at a timing when the second state is switched to the first state.
The gaming machine according to Feature H6, wherein in the second switching mode, the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period is defined to coincide with the predetermined period.

  According to the feature H7, since the confirmation display can be ended at the timing when the effective period has elapsed, when the lottery related to the predetermined information is won, the start pitching portion is quickly changed as the effective period elapses. It becomes possible to switch to 1 state. Thus, the effects shown in the feature H1 and the like can be suitably exhibited.

Feature H8. The display control means includes variable display period setting means for setting a variable display period of the picture on the display section (function of setting a variable display time of the picture on the through-gate display section DS in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162). Have
As a switching control mode of the starting entrance part by the switching control means, a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high) in which the period of the second state is shorter than the first switching mode. Frequency support mode), and
When the first switching mode is set, the variable display period set by the variable display period setting unit is configured to be equal to or longer than the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  In the first switching mode, the frequency of entering the starting entrance portion is lower than in the second switching mode. In such a state, by setting the variable display period to be equal to or longer than the predetermined period, it is possible to lengthen the interval period in the case where the starting ball entering unit is continuously switched to the first state. This is preferable for differentiating between the first switching mode and the second switching mode.

Feature H9. Predetermined information storage means (electric storage area 633 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the predetermined information acquisition means;
The display control means is a variable display period setting means for setting a variable display period of the picture in the display section (function of setting a variable display time of the picture in the through gate display section DS in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162). A fixed display period setting means (a function for setting a fixed display time of the picture in the display part DS for the through gate in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting a fixed display period of the picture in the display unit,
Have
If the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means before the start ball entering part is switched from the first state to the second state, the variable display start means may At the timing when the starting pitching part is switched from the second state to the first state, the variable display of the pattern is started.
The starting entrance part has an entrance part (right operation port 63a) opened upward and a shutter (shutter 331) covering the entrance part, and the start entrance part is arranged at the closed position. When the part is in the second state, the shutter forms a bottom surface of a spherical passage that crosses over the entrance portion, and the shutter is displaced from the closed position to the open position to enter the first state. The game ball on the shutter is configured to fall to the entrance portion,
As a switching control mode of the starting entrance part by the switching control means, a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high) that is shorter in the first state than the first switching mode. Frequency support mode), and
In the first switching mode, the variable display period and the fixed display period are set such that the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period is longer than the predetermined period,
In the second switching mode, the variable display period and the fixed display period are set such that the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period is the same length as the predetermined period,
The period required for the game ball to pass over the shutter is shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period in the first switching mode, and the variable display period in the second switching mode and the The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be longer than a sum of the fixed display period.

  In the configuration indicated by the feature H9, when the shutter moves from the closed position to the open position, the game ball that has been launched into the starting ball entering part enters the starting ball entering part. In the configuration in which the shutter forms the bottom part (rolling surface) of the ball passage, the game ball located on the shutter falls to the starting ball entering part (inlet part) when the shutter moves to the open position. Here, with respect to the time required for the game ball to pass on the shutter, the period during which the shutter is maintained in the closed position becomes longer and shorter, so that a difference in the pitching frequency is provided, and the first switching mode and the second switching mode. Can be differentiated. Here, in order to make it possible to visually confirm a pattern, it is necessary to secure a variable display period and a fixed display period to some extent, but the restriction on the period becomes stronger by securing these periods. This can be a major limitation in making the difference. In this regard, if the technical idea shown in the feature H1 is applied to the configuration shown in this feature, the game progress speed is changed in order to diversify the game, resulting in a decrease in the visibility of the pattern. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, you may apply each technical idea shown to the characteristic H1-characteristic H9 to the said characteristic A group-G group.

<Feature J group>
The following group J is characterized in that “a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball to the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball fired from the game ball launching means enters the entrance part provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. As for the background art “see (for example, Patent Document 1)”, there is an invention that “the gaming machine of the type described above still has room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game”. It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature J1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (holding information) when a ball enters a starting ball entering portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition function), and
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the lottery process is executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
Prior to the determination being made by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, a game-turning operation (displaying the variation of the pattern in the operation port display portions DL and DR) is started. The game result of each game round is determined according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game round operation being terminated as a notification result corresponding to the determination result. Game time control means (for example, a function of executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the result notification means (the operation port display portions DL and DR) so that the revolving operation is performed;
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the completion of the game turning operation by the gaming time control means. Special game state transition means (function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (for example, opening and closing execution mode),
As the normal gaming state, a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low-frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. The second normal gaming state corresponding to the probability mode and the high-frequency support mode) and the third normal gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (the third normal state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode) Gaming state), and
Second normal gaming state transition means for executing a transition from the gaming state to the second normal gaming state upon completion of the special gaming state (processing for transitioning to the second normal gaming state is performed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
When the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state, the upper limit setting means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) sets the upper limit (number of times reduced) in the second normal gaming state. Function to set the number of hours)
Third normal game state transition means (main control device 162) for shifting the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on the fact that the number of games in the second normal game state has reached the upper limit. The MPU 602 for executing processing for transition to the third normal gaming state),
Information notifying means (function of displaying the counter image CF on the display screen 75a) for notifying information (counter image CF) indicating the number of remaining games until the transition to the 3 normal game state in the second normal game state; A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature J1, after the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state, the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, so that it is more than the second normal gaming state. Furthermore, it shifts to a third normal gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In the second normal gaming state, information indicating the number of remaining game games until the transition to the third normal gaming state is notified, and the transition to the third normal gaming state is expected by indicating the path to the third normal gaming state. The player can be encouraged to pay more attention to the game.

Feature J2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (holding information) when a ball enters a starting ball entering portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition function), and
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the lottery process is executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
Prior to the determination being made by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, a game-turning operation (displaying the variation of the pattern in the operation port display portions DL and DR) is started. The game result of each game round is determined according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game round operation being terminated as a notification result corresponding to the determination result. Game time control means (for example, a function of executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the result notification means (the operation port display portions DL and DR) so that the revolving operation is performed;
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the completion of the game turning operation by the gaming time control means. Special game state transition means (function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (for example, opening and closing execution mode),
As the normal gaming state, a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low-frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. The second normal gaming state corresponding to the probability mode and the high-frequency support mode) and the third normal gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (the third normal state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode) Gaming state), and
Second normal gaming state transition means for executing a transition from the gaming state to the second normal gaming state upon completion of the special gaming state (processing for transitioning to the second normal gaming state is performed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
When the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state, the upper limit setting means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) sets the upper limit (number of times reduced) in the second normal gaming state. Function to set the number of hours)
Third normal game state transition means (main control device 162) for shifting the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on the fact that the number of games in the second normal game state has reached the upper limit. The MPU 602 for executing processing for transition to the third normal gaming state),
In the second normal gaming state, the first information (target image TF) indicating the third normal gaming state that becomes the transition destination when the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit is notified. 1 notification means (function of displaying the target image TF on the display screen 75a);
Second notification means (display screen 75a) for notifying the second information (counter image CF) indicating the number of remaining games until the transition from the second normal game state to the third normal game state in the second normal game state. A game machine having a function of displaying a counter image CF.

  According to the feature J2, after the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state, the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit so that the second normal gaming state is exceeded. Furthermore, it shifts to a third normal gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Although diversification of games in this way can suppress the monotonization of the game and contribute to an increase in the degree of attention to the game, it is assumed that the complexity of the game will easily cause confusion for the player. There is a concern that this may hinder the effect of improving the attention level. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, in the second normal gaming state, information indicating the number of remaining game times and information indicating the transition destination at the time of the remaining game times are displayed until the transition to the third normal gaming state. In other words, by displaying each of the target and the process up to the target, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-described inconvenience and to appropriately exhibit the effect of increasing the attention to the game.

Feature J3. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (holding information) when a ball enters a starting ball entering portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition function), and
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the lottery process is executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
Prior to the determination being made by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, a game-turning operation (displaying the variation of the pattern in the operation port display portions DL and DR) is started. The game result of each game round is determined according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game round operation being terminated as a notification result corresponding to the determination result. Game time control means (for example, a function of executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the result notification means (the operation port display portions DL and DR) so that the revolving operation is performed;
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the completion of the game turning operation by the gaming time control means. Special game state transition means (function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (for example, opening and closing execution mode),
As the normal gaming state, a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low-frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. The second normal gaming state corresponding to the probability mode and the high-frequency support mode) and the third normal gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (the third normal state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode) Gaming state), and
Second normal gaming state transition means for executing a transition from the gaming state to the second normal gaming state upon completion of the special gaming state (processing for transitioning to the second normal gaming state is performed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
When the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state, the upper limit setting means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) sets the upper limit (number of times reduced) in the second normal gaming state. Function to set the number of hours)
Third normal game state transition means (main control device 162) for shifting the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on the fact that the number of games in the second normal game state has reached the upper limit. The MPU 602 for executing processing for transition to the third normal gaming state),
In the second normal gaming state, the first information (target image TF) indicating the third normal gaming state, which is the transition destination when the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, is notified. 1 notification means (function of displaying the target image TF on the display screen 75a);
In the second normal gaming state, second notification means (display screen 75a) for notifying the second information (counter image CF) indicating the process required to shift from the second normal gaming state to the three normal gaming state. The function of displaying the counter image CF at
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature J3, after the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state, the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, so that it is more than the second normal gaming state. Furthermore, it shifts to a third normal gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Although diversification of games in this way can suppress the monotonization of the game and contribute to an increase in the degree of attention to the game, it is assumed that the complexity of the game will easily cause confusion for the player. There is a concern that this may hinder the effect of improving the attention level. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, in the second normal gaming state, the target gaming state and the process up to the target are each displayed, thereby suppressing the occurrence of the above inconvenience and improving the degree of attention to the game. An effect can be exhibited suitably.

  Feature J4. The game according to Feature J2 or Feature J3, wherein the second notification means is configured to notify the second information in parallel with the notification of the first information by the first notification means. Machine.

  As shown in this feature, the second information indicating the process is notified in parallel with the notification of the first information indicating the target, and the second normal is suppressed by suppressing the display of the first information alone. The chance that the current gaming state is misunderstood as the third normal gaming state from the first information displayed in the gaming state can be reduced.

Feature J5. Comprising display means (symbol display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a);
The first notification means and the second notification means are configured to notify the first information and the second information by displaying the first information and the second information on the display screen,
The first notification means includes means for changing a display mode (for example, size, color, brightness, etc.) of the first information as the game times in the second normal gaming state approaches the upper limit,
The second informing means has means for changing the display content (for example, the number displayed) of the second information as the number of game times in the second normal gaming state approaches the upper limit. The gaming machine according to any one of features J2 to J4.

  Regarding the second information indicating the number of remaining game rounds (strokes), the display content is updated according to the progress of the game rounds, so that it can be clearly shown that the transition to the third normal gaming state is approaching. On the other hand, the display information of the first information indicating the target third normal gaming state is also changed according to the progress of the game times, so that the transition to the third normal gaming state is approaching. The function to show can be strengthened suitably.

Feature J6. Comprising display means (symbol display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a);
The first notification means and the second notification means are configured to notify the first information and the second information by displaying the first information and the second information on the display screen,
Changing means for changing the area ratio between the display area of the first information (transition destination display area TE) and the display area of the second information (remaining number of times display area CE) on the display screen (notification / production control device 143 and The gaming machine according to any one of features J2 to J5, wherein the display control device 710 has a function of changing an area ratio.

  In the configuration in which the first information and the second information are displayed, by changing the area ratio of the display area of each information, it is possible to change the target to be noticed as the game times are digested. Thereby, even if it is a case where the information provided increases, it can suppress suitably that it becomes a factor which causes a player's confusion.

  Feature J7. The game machine according to Feature J6, wherein the changing means changes a display area of the first information when the second information becomes predetermined second information set in advance.

  The second information is updated as the game times in the second normal gaming state are digested. Here, if the display area of the first information is changed when the second information becomes predetermined second information, relevance can be given to the two pieces of information. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp that the update of the second information has progressed to some extent even when the user is paying attention to the first information. For example, when the second information is a counter whose value is updated as the game progresses, the display area of the first information may be changed when the value of the counter reaches a predetermined number.

Feature J8. The display area of the second information can be changed to a first area and a second area larger than the first area,
The change means changes the display area of the first information when the display area of the second information changes from one of the first area and the second area to the other. A gaming machine described in J7.

  If the second information display area is changed in conjunction with the switching of the second information display area (first area / second area), the first information and the second information are associated with each other. It will be easier to promote understanding.

Feature J9. The display area of the second information can be changed to a first area and a second area larger than the first area,
The display area of the first information can be changed to a third area and a fourth area larger than the third area,
The change means changes the display area of the second information from the first area to the second area and then changes the display area of the first information from the third area to the second area. The gaming machine according to any one of features J6 to J8, wherein after changing to the fourth area, the change to the third area is not performed.

  When displaying the first information and the second information on the display screen, the occupied area on the display screen is increased by increasing the amount of displayed information. In order to improve the degree of attention to information, it is effective to enlarge the display area of information, but the occupied area is further increased by expanding the display area. This is assumed to be a factor of pressing an area for displaying other information on the display screen. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the first information indicating the target is temporarily increased for the second information indicating the process while appealing that the target area is approaching by increasing the size of the display area. By appealing the update of the information by expanding the display area, it is possible to suitably suppress the occupied area on the display screen from becoming excessively large in order to exhibit the notification function.

  Feature J10. The changing means includes means for changing the display area of the first information and means for changing the display area of the second information, and the change of the display area of the first information and the display area of the second information. The game machine according to Feature J6, wherein the game machine is configured to be executable at different timings.

  In the configuration in which the first information and the second information are displayed together, there is a concern that the necessity of viewing these two information at the same time may be a factor that increases the burden on the player. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the timing of changing the display area can be made different, it is possible to guide the line of sight to the information to be noticed, which can contribute to the suppression of the occurrence of the inconvenience.

Feature J11. The second notification means is configured to start notification of the second information when transitioning to the second normal gaming state and end the notification when transitioning to the third normal gaming state,
The first notification means is configured to start the notification of the first information when shifting to the second normal gaming state and to continue the notification even after shifting to the third normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features J2 to J10, characterized by

  According to the feature J11, the first information and the second information are notified in the second normal state, and the notification of the second information is terminated while the notification of the first information is ended by shifting to the third normal gaming state. Will continue. Thus, by continuing the notification of the second information even in the third normal gaming state, it is possible to clearly convey to the player what the second information indicates.

  Note that the technical ideas shown in the features J3 to J11 can be applied to the feature J1. In this case, the “information notification unit” shown in the feature J1 may be the same as the “second notification unit” shown in the feature J3 or the like.

Feature J12. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (holding information) when a ball enters a starting ball entering portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition function), and
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the lottery process is executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
Prior to the determination being made by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, a game-turning operation (displaying the variation of the pattern in the operation port display portions DL and DR) is started. The game result of each game round is determined according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game round operation being terminated as a notification result corresponding to the determination result. Game time control means (for example, a function of executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the result notification means (the operation port display portions DL and DR) so that the revolving operation is performed;
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the completion of the game turning operation by the gaming time control means. Special game state transition means (function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (for example, opening and closing execution mode),
As the normal gaming state, a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low-frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. The second normal gaming state corresponding to the probability mode and the high-frequency support mode) and the third normal gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (the third normal state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode) Gaming state), and
Second normal gaming state transition means for executing a transition from the gaming state to the second normal gaming state upon completion of the special gaming state (processing for transitioning to the second normal gaming state is performed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
When the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state, the upper limit setting means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) sets the upper limit (number of times reduced) in the second normal gaming state. Function to set the number of hours)
Third normal game state transition means (main control device 162) for shifting the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on the fact that the number of games in the second normal game state has reached the upper limit. The MPU 602 for executing processing for transition to the third normal gaming state),
In the second normal gaming state, first information (target image TF) indicating the third normal gaming state, which is a transition destination when the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, and the first Informing means for notifying the second information (counter image CF) indicating the number of remaining games until the transition from the 2 normal game state to the 3 normal game state (displays the target image TF and the counter image CF on the display screen 75a). A gaming machine characterized by having a function).

  According to feature J12, after the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state, the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, thereby Furthermore, it shifts to a third normal gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Although diversification of games in this way can suppress the monotonization of the game and contribute to an increase in the degree of attention to the game, it is assumed that the complexity of the game will easily cause confusion for the player. There is a concern that this may hinder the effect of improving the attention level. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, in the second normal gaming state, information indicating the number of remaining game times and information indicating the transition destination at the time of the remaining game times are displayed until the transition to the third normal gaming state. In other words, by displaying each of the target and the process up to the target, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-described inconvenience and to appropriately exhibit the effect of increasing the attention to the game.

Feature J13. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (holding information) when a ball enters a starting ball entering portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition function), and
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the lottery process is executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
Prior to the determination being made by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, a game-turning operation (displaying the variation of the pattern in the operation port display portions DL and DR) is started. The game result of each game round is determined according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game round operation being terminated as a notification result corresponding to the determination result. Game time control means (for example, a function of executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the result notification means (the operation port display portions DL and DR) so that the revolving operation is performed;
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the completion of the game turning operation by the gaming time control means. Special game state transition means (function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (for example, opening and closing execution mode),
As the normal gaming state, a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low-frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. The second normal gaming state corresponding to the probability mode and the high-frequency support mode) and the third normal gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (the third normal state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode) Gaming state), and
Second normal gaming state transition means for executing a transition from the gaming state to the second normal gaming state upon completion of the special gaming state (processing for transitioning to the second normal gaming state is performed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
When the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state, the upper limit setting means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) sets the upper limit (number of times reduced) in the second normal gaming state. Function to set the number of hours)
Third normal game state transition means (main control device 162) for shifting the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on the fact that the number of games in the second normal game state has reached the upper limit. The MPU 602 for executing processing for transition to the third normal gaming state),
In the second normal gaming state, first information (target image TF) indicating the third normal gaming state that is a transition destination when the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, and the first Informing means for notifying the second information (counter image CF) indicating the process required to shift from the 2 normal gaming state to the 3 normal gaming state (displaying the target image TF and the counter image CF on the display screen 75a) A gaming machine characterized by having a function).

  According to the feature J13, after the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state, the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, so that it is more than the second normal gaming state. Furthermore, it shifts to a third normal gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Although diversification of games in this way can suppress the monotonization of the game and contribute to an increase in the degree of attention to the game, it is assumed that the complexity of the game will easily cause confusion for the player. There is a concern that this may hinder the effect of improving the attention level. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, in the second normal gaming state, the target gaming state and the process up to the target are each displayed, thereby suppressing the occurrence of the above inconvenience and improving the degree of attention to the game. An effect can be exhibited suitably.

  The technical ideas shown in the features J4 to J11 can be applied to the features J12 and J13. In this case, the “first notification means” and the “second notification means” shown in the features J4 to J11 may be the same as the “notification means” shown in this feature.

  Further, the technical ideas shown in the features J1 to J13 may be applied to the features A to H.

<Feature K group>
The following feature K group is: “A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball to the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball fired from the game ball launching means enters the entrance part provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. As for the background art “see (for example, Patent Document 1)”, there is an invention that “the gaming machine of the type described above still has room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game”. It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature K1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (holding information) when a ball enters a starting ball entering portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition function), and
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the lottery process is executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
Prior to the determination being made by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, a game-turning operation (the display of variation in the pattern on the operation port display portions DL and DR) is started. The game result of each game round is determined according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game round operation being terminated as a notification result corresponding to the determination result. Game time control means (for example, a function of executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the notification means (the operation port display portions DL and DR) so that the turning operation is performed;
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the completion of the game turning operation by the gaming time control means. Special game state transition means (function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (for example, opening and closing execution mode),
As the normal gaming state, a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low-frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. The second normal gaming state corresponding to the probability mode and the high-frequency support mode) and the third normal gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (the third normal state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode) Gaming state), and
Second normal gaming state transition means for executing a transition from the gaming state to the second normal gaming state upon completion of the special gaming state (processing for transitioning to the second normal gaming state is performed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
When the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state, the upper limit setting means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) sets the upper limit (number of times reduced) in the second normal gaming state. Function to set the number of hours)
Third normal game state transition means (main control device 162) for shifting the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on the fact that the number of games in the second normal game state has reached the upper limit. The MPU 602 for executing processing for transition to the third normal gaming state),
Display means (symbol display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a);
When in the second normal gaming state, a suggestion image (target image TF and restraint image LF) suggesting the transition to the third normal gaming state is displayed on the display screen. Display control means (notification / production control device 143 and display control device 710) for performing display control of the display means,
The display control means is a display range changing means for changing the display range of the suggestion image on the display screen as the number of games in the second normal gaming state approaches the upper limit (the target image TF in the notification / production control device 143). And a function of changing the display range of the constrained image LF).

  According to the characteristic K1, after the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state, the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, so that the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit. Furthermore, it shifts to a third normal gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In the second normal gaming state, a suggestion image suggesting transition to the third normal gaming state is displayed, and the display range of the suggestion image is changed as the number of games in the second normal gaming state approaches the upper limit. With such a configuration, it is suggested that a player who is expected to enter the third normal gaming state is approaching the third normal gaming state, and promotes an increase in the degree of attention to the game. it can.

  The configuration shown in this feature is “the game board (game board 60) in which the game area (game area PE) is formed” and the starting entrance part (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Special information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters, and the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means Information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) that can be stored, and whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) And a display unit (a function for executing lottery processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and a display unit (for example, a display unit DR for the operating port), and the display unit can variably display a picture. Prior to the determination performed by the display means (for example, the main display unit 81) and the determination means, or based on the determination performed by the determination means, the pattern display means starts variable display of the pattern Each game time is displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the stop result corresponding to the determination result being displayed and the variable display of the pattern being terminated as one game time. The game turn control means (for example, the function of executing the game turn control process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the picture display means so that the variable display of the picture is performed, and the determination result by the determination means are predetermined. The determination result corresponding to the determination information is displayed, and the game state is changed to the normal game based on the fact that the game time control means stops and displays the pattern corresponding to the determination result. Special game state transition means (function to execute a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (for example, opening / closing execution mode) more advantageous to the player than the state, and As a normal gaming state, a first normal gaming state (first normal gaming state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high probability that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state) Mode and the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode) and the third normal gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (the third normal game corresponding to the high probability mode and the low-frequency support mode) State), and a second normal gaming state transition means (MPU of the main control device 162) that transitions the gaming state to the second normal gaming state when the special gaming state ends. A function for executing a process for shifting to the second normal gaming state at 602) and a game in the second normal gaming state when the second normal gaming state shifting means shifts to the second normal gaming state. Based on an upper limit setting means (a function for setting the number of times in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting an upper limit (number of times for the time), and the number of games in the second normal gaming state has reached the upper limit. Third normal gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state (function of executing processing for transitioning to the third normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) ) And a display screen (display screen 75a), and when the player is in the second normal gaming state, a suggestion image (target that suggests transition to the third normal gaming state on the display screen) A suggestion image display means (symbol display device 75) for displaying the image TF and the constraint image LF), and the display range of the suggestion image on the display screen as the number of game times in the second normal gaming state approaches the upper limit. A gaming machine comprising display range changing means for changing the size (function of changing the display range of the target image TF and the restricted image LF in the notification / production control device 143). Can also be used.

Feature K2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (holding information) when a ball enters a starting ball entering portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition function), and
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the lottery process is executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
Prior to the determination being made by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, a game-turning operation (the display of variation in the pattern on the operation port display portions DL and DR) is started. The game result of each game round is determined according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game round operation being terminated as a notification result corresponding to the determination result. Game time control means (for example, a function of executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the notification means (to the operation port display units DL and DR) so that the revolving operation is performed;
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, and the gaming state is specially advantageous to the player over the normal gaming state based on the completion of the game turning operation by the gaming time control means. Special game state transition means (function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a game state (for example, opening / closing execution mode),
As the normal gaming state, a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low-frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. The second normal gaming state corresponding to the probability mode and the high-frequency support mode) and the third normal gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (the third normal state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode) Gaming state), and
Second normal gaming state transition means for executing a transition from the gaming state to the second normal gaming state upon completion of the special gaming state (processing for transitioning to the second normal gaming state is performed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
When the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state, the upper limit setting means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) sets the upper limit (number of times reduced) in the second normal gaming state. Function to set the number of hours)
Third normal game state transition means (main control device 162) for shifting the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on the fact that the number of games in the second normal game state has reached the upper limit. The MPU 602 for executing processing for transition to the third normal gaming state),
Display means (symbol display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a);
Display control means (notification / production control device 143 and display control device 710) for performing display control of the display means,
The display control means includes
Means for displaying on the display screen a picture corresponding to the determination result by the determination means;
Means for displaying a suggestion image (target image TF and restraint image LF) suggesting transition to the third normal gaming state on the display screen when the second normal gaming state is set;
As the number of games in the second normal gaming state approaches the upper limit, the display range of the suggestion image (transition destination display area TE) and the display range of the pattern (second variation display area ME2 or third variation display) on the display screen. Display range changing means (a function for changing the display range of the target image TF and the restraint image LF in the notification / production control device 143) to change the display range so that the area ratio with the region ME3) changes. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature K2, after the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state, the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, so that it is more than the second normal gaming state. Furthermore, it shifts to a third normal gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In the second normal gaming state, a suggestion image suggesting transition to the third normal gaming state is displayed, and the display range of the suggestion image is changed as the number of games in the second normal gaming state approaches the upper limit. With such a configuration, it is suggested that a player who is expected to enter the third normal gaming state is approaching the third normal gaming state, and promotes an increase in the degree of attention to the game. it can.

  On the display screen, not only the suggestion image but also a pattern corresponding to the determination result is displayed. In the configuration in which the suggestion image and the picture are displayed on the display screen as described above, the suggestion function can be enhanced by cooperation between the two by changing the area ratio between the suggestion image and the picture.

  Feature K3. The display range changing means sets a display range of the suggestion image to a predetermined display range (for example, a maximum display range) when the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit and shifts to the third normal gaming state. And a second changing unit that gradually expands the display range of the suggestion image within a range not exceeding the predetermined display range as the number of games in the second normal gaming state approaches the upper limit. The gaming machine according to Feature K1 or Feature K2, further comprising a changing unit.

  As shown in the feature K3, if the suggestion image is gradually enlarged to be close to the maximum display, the suggestion image becomes more noticeable as the number of games approaches the upper limit, and the effect of improving the degree of attention shown in the feature K1, etc. It can be suitably exhibited.

  If the configuration shown in this feature is applied to a type of gaming machine that displays a pattern or the like corresponding to the determination result on the display screen, the image of the pattern that does not correspond to the predetermined determination information when the player's attention is directed to the suggestion image Even if the display is repeated, it can be suppressed that the game willingness of the player who is playing the game is expected to be reduced as a result of the determination corresponding to the predetermined determination information.

  Feature K4. The gaming machine according to Feature K3, wherein the second changing unit enlarges the suggestion image so that the display range of the suggestion image before the change is included in the display range of the suggestion image after the change. .

  If the display range after the change is included in the display range after the change as shown in the feature K4, the amount of movement of the line of sight of the player who is gazing at the suggestion image in the process of approaching the upper limit will be reduced. Can do. This is advantageous in reducing the chance of missing a suggestion image change. In this way, if it is configured to reduce the chance of missing, it is not necessary to excessively increase the amount of change in the size of the suggestion image, and even if the upper limit is set for the size of the suggestion image The number of changes in the size of the image can be suitably increased.

Feature K5. The display screen is configured to display a pattern corresponding to the determination result by the determination unit,
The display range changing means is configured to gradually expand the display range of the suggestion image as the number of games in the second normal gaming state approaches the upper limit,
The display control means includes means for not displaying the design when the display range of the suggestion image is expanded to a range including at least a part of the display range of the design. The gaming machine according to any one of K1 to K4.

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, in the configuration in which the pattern corresponding to the determination result is displayed on the display screen, the suggestion image appears as if it has eroded the display range of the pattern, thereby entering the third normal gaming state. It can be preferably suggested that the transition is close. As already described, one of the requirements is that a transition to the third normal gaming state does not result in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. However, it is feared that a player who expects to become the predetermined determination information emphasizes that the determination result does not correspond to the predetermined determination information, which causes a decrease in game motivation. The Therefore, when the game in the second normal gaming state progresses to some extent, the display range of the design is eroded by the suggestion image and the design is not displayed, thereby emphasizing that the determination result does not correspond to the predetermined determination information. This can be avoided, and the occurrence of the inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

  Feature K6. The display control means includes means for setting game times for changing the display range of the suggestion image based on the upper limit set by the upper limit setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  In the configuration in which the second normal gaming state ends when the upper limit is reached, the opportunity to expand the display range depends on the upper limit. Therefore, as shown in this feature, it is possible to appropriately change the display range (enlarged display) by determining in advance the game times for changing the display range according to the upper limit.

Feature K7. The suggestion image has a character part (target image TF) indicating the third normal gaming state and a plurality of decoration parts (restraint image LF) displayed so as to overlap the character part.
The display control means includes number changing means for changing the number of the decoration parts in accordance with a change in the display range of the suggestion image, according to any one of the characteristics K1 to K6. Game machines.

  As shown in this feature, by changing the number of decorations attached to the character image according to the change of the display range, even if the difference before and after the change of the display range is small Can reduce the chances of being missed. This is preferable for diversifying the change mode of the display range.

Feature K8. The display range changing means is configured to gradually expand the display range of the suggestion image as the number of games in the second normal gaming state approaches the upper limit,
The decorative portion is an image configured to be recognized by a player as preventing the character portion from being enlarged,
The gaming machine according to Feature K7, wherein the number changing means is configured to reduce the number of the decoration portions in accordance with an expansion of a display range of the suggestion image.

  As shown in this feature, by reducing the number of decorative parts configured to be recognized as preventing the expansion with the expansion of the display range, it is preferable to promote understanding that the upper limit is being approached Can do.

  Feature K9. The display range changing means is configured to change the display range in accordance with the start of the game turn operation by the game turn control means. Any one of the characteristics K1 to K8 The gaming machine described in 1.

  When the display range is changed as shown in the feature K1 or the like, it is preferable to secure a change period to some extent in order to appeal the change. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by changing the display range at the start of the game turning operation, the operation period of the game turning operation can be used as the display range changing period, which is a practically preferable configuration. Can be realized.

  Feature K10. The gaming machine according to Feature K9, wherein the display range changing unit changes the display range of the suggestion image regardless of a determination result by the determination unit in a game round.

  In the type of gaming machine shown in the feature K1 or the like, the challenge to the third normal gaming state may end due to a jackpot result or the like during the second normal gaming state. Here, if the display range is avoided based on the fact that it is a jackpot result or the like even though the display range is supposed to be changed, it becomes a foothold and this The end of the challenge will be exposed as soon as possible. Therefore, in the configuration in which the display range is changed at the start of the game turning operation as indicated by the feature K9, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by changing the display range regardless of the determination result.

  In addition, you may apply each technical idea shown to the characteristic K1-characteristic K10 to the said characteristic A group-J group.

<Feature L group>
The following feature L group is: “A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball to the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball fired from the game ball launching means enters the entrance part provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. As for the background art “see (for example, Patent Document 1)”, there is an invention that “the gaming machine of the type described above still has room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game”. It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature L1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (holding information) when a ball enters a starting ball entering portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition function), and
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the lottery process is executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
Prior to the determination being made by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, a game-turning operation (the display of variation in the pattern on the operation port display portions DL and DR) is started. The game result of each game round is determined according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game round operation being terminated as a notification result corresponding to the determination result. Game time control means (for example, a function of executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the notification means (the operation port display portions DL and DR) so that the turning operation is performed;
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the completion of the game turning operation by the gaming time control means. Special game state transition means (function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (for example, opening and closing execution mode),
As the normal gaming state, a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low-frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. The second normal gaming state corresponding to the probability mode and the high-frequency support mode) and the third normal gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (the third normal state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode) Gaming state), and
The predetermined determination information includes first information (information corresponding to the jackpot result) and second information (information corresponding to the special hit result),
When the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to the first information and the transition to the special gaming state is made, the gaming state is shifted to the second normal gaming state with the end of the special gaming state. Second normal gaming state transition means (function of executing processing for transition to the second normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
When the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state, the upper limit setting means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) sets the upper limit (number of times reduced) in the second normal gaming state. Function to set the number of hours)
The game state is determined based on the fact that the number of games in the second normal game state has reached the upper limit without the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first information in the second normal game state. Third normal gaming state transition means (function for executing processing for transition to the third normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for shifting from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state;
A pattern display having a display screen (for example, display screen 75a) and capable of variably displaying a pattern (for example, a pattern) in a predetermined display area (for example, the second variable display area ME2 or the third variable display area ME3) on the display screen. Means (for example, symbol display device 75);
Prior to the determination being performed by the determination unit or based on the determination being performed by the determination unit, the pattern display unit starts variable display of the pattern, and corresponds to the determination result by the determination unit. Display control means (for example, a notification / production control device 143 and a display control device 710) for stopping and displaying the pattern,
As the predetermined display area, a first display area (second variable display area ME2) and a second display area (third variable display area ME3) larger than the first display area are provided,
The display control means corresponds to the determination result of the determination means in both the first display area and the second display area in game times other than the last game time corresponding to the upper limit in the second normal gaming state. While the picture is stopped and displayed, the picture corresponding to the result of the determination is stopped in the first display area of the first display area and the second display area in the final game round in the second normal gaming state. A gaming machine configured to be displayed.

  In the configuration shown in the feature L1, in the second normal gaming state, the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information (for example, a big hit result) is not obtained (for example, a loss result or a special hit result is obtained) in the final game round that reaches the upper limit. Is a condition for shifting to the third normal gaming state. Here, as shown in this feature, when it is premised that the game state is advantageous to the player on the condition that the determination result corresponds to the predetermined determination information, the predetermined determination information It is assumed that the determination result other than the determination result corresponding to is emphasized and displayed as a factor that makes the player feel uncomfortable. That is, there is a concern that the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game will not be exhibited well due to the diversification of the game. Therefore, as shown in this feature, in the final game round, the determination result is not displayed in the relatively large second display area, and the determination result is displayed only in the relatively small first display area. Therefore, occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed. Thereby, the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game due to the diversification of the game can be suitably exhibited.

Feature L2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (holding information) when a ball enters a starting ball entering portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition function), and
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the lottery process is executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
Prior to the determination being made by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, a game-turning operation (the display of variation in the pattern on the operation port display portions DL and DR) is started. The game result of each game round is determined according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game round operation being terminated as a notification result corresponding to the determination result. Game time control means (for example, a function of executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the notification means (the operation port display portions DL and DR) so that the turning operation is performed;
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the completion of the game turning operation by the gaming time control means. Special game state transition means (function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (for example, opening and closing execution mode),
As the normal gaming state, a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low-frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. The second normal gaming state corresponding to the probability mode and the high-frequency support mode) and the third normal gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (the third normal state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode) Gaming state), and
The predetermined determination information includes first information (information corresponding to the jackpot result) and second information (information corresponding to the special hit result),
When the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to the first information and the transition to the special gaming state is made, the gaming state is shifted to the second normal gaming state with the end of the special gaming state. Second normal gaming state transition means (function of executing processing for transition to the second normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
When the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state, the upper limit setting means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) sets the upper limit (number of times reduced) in the second normal gaming state. Function to set the number of hours)
The game state is determined based on the fact that the number of games in the second normal game state has reached the upper limit without the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first information in the second normal game state. Third normal gaming state transition means (function for executing processing for transition to the third normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for shifting from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state;
A pattern display means (for example, a symbol display device 75) having a display screen (for example, a display screen 75a) and capable of variably displaying a pattern in a predetermined display area on the display screen;
Prior to the determination being performed by the determination unit or based on the determination being performed by the determination unit, the pattern display unit starts variable display of the pattern, and the pattern corresponding to the determination result is displayed. Display control means (for example, a notification / production control device 143 and a display control device 710) to stop display,
As the predetermined display area, a first display area (second variable display area ME2) and a second display area (third variable display area ME3) larger than the first display area are provided,
The display control means, when a determination result (for example, a jackpot result) corresponding to the first information is obtained in the final game times corresponding to the upper limit in the second normal gaming state, The display corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed in both of the second display areas, and the determination result corresponding to the second information (for example, the special hit result) or the determination that does not correspond to the predetermined determination information in the last game round When a result (for example, a detachment result) is obtained, the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed in the first display area of the first display area and the second display area. A featured gaming machine.

  In the configuration indicated by the feature L2, in the second normal gaming state, the determination result corresponding to the first information (for example, the big hit result) is not obtained (for example, the result of losing or the special hit result is obtained) in the final game round that reaches the upper limit. ) Is a condition for shifting to the third normal gaming state. Here, if it is premised on the transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player on the condition that the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained as shown in this feature, it corresponds to the first information. The determination result other than the determined determination result, that is, a determination result corresponding to the second information (for example, a special hit result) or a determination result not corresponding to the predetermined determination information (for example, a loss result) is highlighted. Is assumed to be a factor that makes the player feel uncomfortable. That is, there is a concern that the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game will not be exhibited well due to the diversification of the game. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained in the final game round, the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed in both the first display area and the second display area. On the other hand, when the determination result corresponds to the second information or the determination result does not correspond to the predetermined determination information, the design corresponding to the determination result is not displayed in the relatively large second display area. Such a problem can be prevented from occurring by using a configuration in which the display is performed in a very small first display area. Thereby, the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game due to the diversification of the game can be suitably exhibited.

  Feature L3. The display control means determines the determination result in both the first display area and the second display area regardless of the determination result by the determination means in game times other than the predetermined game time in the second normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to Feature L2, wherein the game machine is configured to stop and display a picture corresponding to the above.

  According to the feature L3, in the game times other than the final game time, the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed in both the first display area and the second display area. In order to use both the first display area and the second display area in this way, the relationship between the two display areas is transmitted to the player until the final game time, and the pattern in the second display area is not displayed. Even if it becomes, it has the technical significance that it can suppress that it becomes a factor which confuses a player.

  Feature L4. The display control means stops and displays a picture corresponding to the result of the determination means in the first display area of the first display area and the second display area in the final game round in the second normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features L1 to L3, wherein the picture in the second display area is not displayed when the game is performed.

  As shown in the feature L4, if the pattern in the second display area is not displayed in advance, for example, a place for displaying a still image, a moving image, or the like that suggests transition to the third normal gaming state in the second display area; Time can be suitably secured. Also, as shown in this feature, if the design in the second display area is not displayed, for example, the design in the second display area remains changed, or the design that is stopped and displayed in the previous game round is left as it is. Is avoided. This is preferable for preventing the player from being confused by a difference in the display of the first display area and the second display area.

  Note that the configuration shown in this feature is, for example, “the display control means is a determination result corresponding to the second information or a determination result not corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the final game round in the second normal gaming state. In this case, the design displayed in the second display area is not displayed before the design in the predetermined game times is stopped and displayed in the first display area. It is also possible to use “the gaming machine described in the feature L3.”

  Feature L5. The display control means stops and displays a picture corresponding to the result of the determination in the first display area of the first display area and the second display area in the final game round in the second normal gaming state. In this case, any one of the features L1 to L3 is characterized in that the display in the second display area is not displayed based on the start of the game-playing operation in the final game-play without variably displaying the design. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature L5, the picture stopped and displayed in the previous game round is hidden with the start of the predetermined game round. In this way, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity when the pattern is hidden by avoiding that the pattern in the second display area is suddenly hidden during variable display.

  Feature L6. In the case where the display in the second display area is not displayed, the display control means shifts to the third normal gaming state in an area (maximum display range) including at least a part of the second display area. The gaming machine according to any one of features L3 to L5, characterized by having suggestion means to suggest.

  As indicated by the feature L6, if the transition to the third normal gaming state is suggested instead of hiding the pattern of the second display area, the miss of the suggestion can be suitably suppressed.

Feature L7. When the display control means shifts to the second normal gaming state, the display control means applies the second normal game to a predetermined area (information display area IE) deviated from the first display area and the second display area on the display screen. An image showing the third normal gaming state that is the transition destination from the gaming state is displayed,
The feature L6 is characterized in that the suggestion means enlarges and displays the image as a suggestion in a region including at least a part of the second display region when the design in the second display region is not displayed. The gaming machine described.

  As shown in the feature L7, according to the configuration in which the image displayed in the predetermined area is enlarged and displayed in an area including at least a part of the second display area, the image can be grasped in advance. Even if the display period in the second display region is shortened, it is possible to suppress difficulty in grasping the image. In this way, relaxing the restrictions on the period is advantageous in facilitating the progress of the game.

  Feature L8. The said 2nd display area is provided in the center of the said display screen, and the said 1st display area is provided in the corner part of the said display screen, It is any one of the characteristics L1 thru | or the characteristics L7 characterized by the above-mentioned. Gaming machine.

  As shown in this feature, by arranging the second display area in the center of the display screen and the first display area in the corner of the display screen, the pattern corresponding to the game result in the last game round It can suppress suitably.

  The technical ideas shown in the features L1 to L8 may be applied to the features A to K.

<Feature M group>
The following feature M group is: “A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball to the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball fired from the game ball launching means enters a ball entering section provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. As for the background art “see (for example, Patent Document 1)”, there is an invention that “the gaming machine of the type described above still has room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game”. It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature M1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (holding information) when a ball enters a starting ball entering portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition function), and
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the lottery process is executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
Prior to the determination being made by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, a game-turning operation (the display of variation in the pattern on the operation port display portions DL and DR) is started. The game result of each game round is determined according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game round operation being terminated as a notification result corresponding to the determination result. Game time control means (for example, a function of executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the notification means (the operation port display portions DL and DR) so that the turning operation is performed;
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed from the normal game state to the game state based on the fact that the game time control means stops and displays the pattern corresponding to the determination result. Special gaming state transition means (function for executing processing for gaming state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special gaming state (for example, an opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the user,
As the normal gaming state, a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low-frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. The second normal gaming state corresponding to the probability mode and the high-frequency support mode) and the third normal gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (the third normal state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode) Gaming state), and
Second normal gaming state transition means for executing a transition from the gaming state to the second normal gaming state upon completion of the special gaming state (processing for transitioning to the second normal gaming state is performed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
When the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state, the upper limit setting means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) sets the upper limit (number of times reduced) in the second normal gaming state. Function to set the number of hours)
Third normal game state transition means (main control device 162) for shifting the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on the fact that the number of games in the second normal game state has reached the upper limit. The MPU 602 for executing processing for transition to the third normal gaming state),
Information display means (symbol display device 75) for displaying numerical information (counter value in the counter image CF) in the second normal gaming state;
Display control means (notification / production control device 143 and display control device 710) for performing display control of the information display means,
The display control means includes
When the numerical information is sequentially updated so as to approach predetermined numerical information (eg, “0”) as the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, and the upper limit is reached. And information updating means (the function of executing countdown display in the notification / production control device 143 and the display control device 710) that uses the numerical information as the predetermined numerical information,
Switching means for switching the information update means to a first update state (for example, subtraction level 1) and a second update state (for example, subtraction level 2) in which the update width of the numerical information for each game time is larger than the first update state. (A function for switching the subtraction level by the notification / production control device 143).

  According to the feature M1, after the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state, the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, so that it is more than the second normal gaming state. Furthermore, it shifts to a third normal gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In the second normal gaming state, the numerical information displayed on the display screen is sequentially updated so as to approach the predetermined numerical information, and when the number of games in the second normal gaming state is the upper limit, the numerical information is a predetermined numerical value. Information. The player can predict the remaining time until the transition to the third normal gaming state by viewing the numerical information displayed on the display screen. Here, the update state of the numerical information includes a first update state / second update state, and the update speed of the numerical information can be changed by switching between these update states. By such a switching function, it is possible to suitably suppress monotonization of the game by causing a rhythm change in the game progress up to the transition to the third normal gaming state.

Feature M2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (holding information) when a ball enters a starting ball entering portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition function), and
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the lottery process is executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
Prior to the determination being made by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, a game-turning operation (the display of variation in the pattern on the operation port display portions DL and DR) is started. The game result of each game round is determined according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game round operation being terminated as a notification result corresponding to the determination result. Game time control means (for example, a function of executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the notification means (the operation port display portions DL and DR) so that the turning operation is performed;
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed from the normal game state to the game state based on the fact that the game time control means stops and displays the pattern corresponding to the determination result. Special gaming state transition means (function for executing processing for gaming state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special gaming state (for example, an opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the user,
As the normal gaming state, a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low-frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. The second normal gaming state corresponding to the probability mode and the high-frequency support mode) and the third normal gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (the third normal state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode) Gaming state), and
Second normal gaming state transition means for executing a transition from the gaming state to the second normal gaming state upon completion of the special gaming state (processing for transitioning to the second normal gaming state is performed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) Function)
When the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state, the upper limit setting means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) sets the upper limit (number of times reduced) in the second normal gaming state. Function to set the number of hours)
Third normal game state transition means (main control device 162) for shifting the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on the fact that the number of games in the second normal game state has reached the upper limit. The MPU 602 for executing processing for transition to the third normal gaming state),
Information display means (symbol display device 75) for displaying numerical information (counter value in the counter image CF) in the second normal gaming state;
Display control means (notification / production control device 143 and display control device 710) for performing display control of the information display means,
The display control means includes
As the numerical information, numerical information correlated with the remaining game times until the transition to the three normal game states in the second normal game state is displayed, and the number of games in the second normal game state reaches the upper limit. Information updating means for updating the numerical information as the game progresses (a function of executing countdown display in the notification / production control device 143 and the display control device 710);
Switching means for switching the information update means to a first update state (for example, subtraction level 1) and a second update state (for example, subtraction level 2) in which the update width of the numerical information for each game time is larger than the first update state. (A function for switching the subtraction level by the notification / production control device 143).

  According to the feature M2, after the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state, the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, so that it is more than the second normal gaming state. Furthermore, it shifts to a third normal gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In the second normal gaming state, numerical information correlated with the remaining game times is displayed on the display screen. The player can predict the remaining amount up to the third normal gaming state by looking at the numerical information displayed on the display screen. Here, the update state of the numerical information includes a first update state / second update state, and the update speed of the numerical information can be changed by switching between these update states. By such a switching function, it is possible to suitably suppress monotonization of the game by causing a rhythm change in the game progress up to the third normal game state.

Feature M3. The display control means displays numerical information corresponding to a numerical value larger than a product of the upper limit and the update width in one game time in the first update state as the numerical information when shifting to the second normal gaming state. It is configured to
The game machine according to Feature M1 or Feature M2, wherein the information update unit is configured to perform the update such that a numerical value indicated by the numerical information decreases.

  As shown in this feature, when the value indicated by the numerical information is subtracted every time the game time is consumed, the numerical information displayed at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state should be estimated more than the above upper limit. Thereby, the setting freedom degree of a 1st update state and a 2nd update state can be raised suitably.

  Feature M4. The display control means includes means for setting game times for switching the update state by the switching means based on the upper limit set by the upper limit setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  In the configuration in which the second normal gaming state ends when the upper limit is reached, the opportunity to switch the update state depends on the upper limit. Therefore, as shown in this feature, it is possible to appropriately update the numerical information for the predetermined numerical information by determining in advance the game times for switching the update state according to the upper limit. .

  Feature M5. The switching means includes means for switching the update state from the first update state to the second update state during the second normal gaming state. Any one of the features M1 to M4 The gaming machine described in 1.

  If the update state is changed from the first update state to the second update state as shown in this feature, the update speed of the numerical information can be increased toward the third normal gaming state. Thereby, a player's attention degree with respect to transfer to a 3rd normal game state can be improved suitably.

  Feature M6. In the first update state and the second update state, the number of updates in one game time is the same, and in the second update state, the numerical information is updated by one update than in the first update state. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M5, wherein the gaming machine is configured to have a large width.

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to reinforce the update of numerical information by setting the same number of updates and providing a difference in the update width in one update.

  Feature M7. In the first update state and the second update state, the width of the numerical information changed in one update is the same. In the second update state, one game is more than in the first update state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features M1 to M5, wherein the number of times that the update is executed during the round is increased.

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, the subtraction rhythm can be changed by increasing the number of updates instead of increasing the number to be changed at a time.

Feature M8. It is provided with a pattern display means (function to execute display control processing in the notification / production control device 143 and the display control device 710) that performs variable display of the pattern and finally displays the pattern corresponding to the determination result by the determination means,
The pattern display means is a means for determining the number of times to temporarily stop and display the pattern corresponding to the determination result by the determination means before the final stop display according to the number of times the numerical information is updated during one game. A gaming machine according to Feature M7, wherein

  If the update of numerical information is linked to the display of the pattern as shown in the feature M8, the update is missed while the display range of the numerical information is reduced and coexistence with other information on the display screen is attempted. Can be reduced.

  Feature M9. The display control means switches a display mode (for example, color and brightness) of the numerical information between a first display mode corresponding to the first update state and a second display mode corresponding to the second update state. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M8, characterized in that it has means.

  In the configuration in which the update speed is changed by switching the update state of the numerical information as shown in the feature M1 or the like, the change is easily overlooked because the display range of the numerical information is reduced. Therefore, if the display mode of the numerical information is switched according to the update state as shown in this feature, it is possible to reduce the chance that the update speed is overlooked without darkly increasing the display range. .

  The technical ideas shown in the features M1 to M9 may be applied to the features A to L.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means (game ball launching handle 41) operated by the player, game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, and the fired A ball path (guide path 103 of the guide rail 100, etc.) for guiding a game ball to a predetermined game area (game area PE) and game parts (nails, etc.) arranged in the game area, each of these game parts Among these, a gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing portion (general winning opening 61 or the like).

  Slot machine, etc .: A variable display means that displays a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. Special game advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stoppage or when a predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of stoppage is a specific symbol A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

  Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of multiple symbols in a variably displayed state, and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. The special game state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating means or when the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol A throwing device for performing a throwing process for taking in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball tray, A gaming machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means is made effective when a game ball is inserted by.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine as a gaming machine, 41 ... Game ball launching handle, 60 ... Game board, 62 ... Lower operation entrance, 62a ... Lower operation entrance, 63 ... Right operation entrance, 63a ... Right operation entrance, 64 ... Upper variable winning device, 65 ... Lower variable winning device, 70 ... Pitching unit, 75 ... Pattern display device, 75a ... Display screen, 81 ... Main display unit, 110 ... Game ball launching mechanism as game ball launching means , 162 ... main control device, 191 ... power supply / launch control device, 311 ... upper prize winning port, 315 ... shutter, 323 ... intermediate passage part, 331 ... shutter, 335a, 336a ... ridge part, 345 ... shutter, 602 ... MPU, 604 ... RAM, 632 ... reserved ball storage area, CF ... counter image, D ... main display unit, DL ... lower working port display unit, DR ... right working port display unit, DS ... through gate display unit, I ... information display area, LF ... restraint image, ME1 ... first fluctuation display area, ME2 ... second fluctuation display area, ME3 ... third fluctuation display area, PE ... game area, SE1 ... first specific area, SE2 ... second Specific area, TF ... target image.

Claims (5)

A game board in which a game area is formed;
Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball enters the start ball portion provided in the game area;
Acquisition information storage means capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information;
Prior to the determination being made by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, a game turning operation is started, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination is used. A game for controlling the result notifying means so that the operation for the game times of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the operation being ended as one game time. A time control means;
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the completion of the game turning operation by the gaming time control means. Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state,
The normal game state includes a first normal game state, a second normal game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state, and a third normal that is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. A gaming state is provided,
Second normal gaming state transition means for transitioning the gaming state to the second normal gaming state with the end of the special gaming state;
Upper limit setting means for setting an upper limit of the number of games in the second normal gaming state when the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state;
Third normal gaming state transition means for transitioning the gaming state from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state based on the fact that the number of games in the second normal gaming state has reached the upper limit;
In the second normal gaming state, from the second normal gaming state, the first information indicating the third normal gaming state as a transition destination when the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit A gaming machine comprising: notifying means for notifying second information indicating the number of remaining games until the transition to the three normal gaming state.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the notification unit is configured to notify the second information in parallel with the notification of the first information. Comprising display means having a display screen;
The informing means is configured to notify the first information and the second information by displaying the first information and the second information on the display screen, and the game times in the second normal gaming state. Means for changing the display mode of the first information as it approaches the upper limit, and means for changing the display content of the second information as the game times in the second normal gaming state approaches the upper limit. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that: Comprising display means having a display screen;
The notification means is configured to notify the first information and the second information by displaying the first information and the second information on the display screen,
4. The apparatus according to claim 1, further comprising a changing unit that changes an area ratio between the display area of the first information and the display area of the second information on the display screen. 5. The gaming machine described.   The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the changing means changes a display area of the first information when the second information becomes predetermined second information set in advance.

Images